Home

Y106-E1-09_4 - Products

1. For category 4 rating Emitter L S agg Receiver t E Wiring for use of the test function of the Light Curtain _ i F39 JCLIA L or gt F39 JCLIA D or F39 JCHEL L fl F39 JCOED D I I Cable with fa Cable with Connector on One Connector on One I I End for Emitter End for Receiver l l g l A l SANI Po P Own lo e e I RS 485 A D D SS I gray gt o c 5 Oo l OO 0 c V E s O lt Aa Sie ele 2 NI O BEa 5 1 iIg9 szcszit Elz 2929353 H 3 get lc 5 amp 2 ig S J g alg 9 9 i oSls EST Sl agal Zall Test Q s 2 di5 gt 1 s8252 5 53 O i t O g o 2355 28 amp l switch I l Z e cd ei agl ze 5 3 l T l s ogy E 22 6 2 __ l 28 o l l 9 xo oe Sls l l B 2 1 e g oo X M CM CEDE C C BI 8 o 3 oo oo ar lll c Llc
2. Emitter F3SN ALISS Receiver Wiring for use of the test c3 function of the Light Curtain _ i pe Ies l l F39 JCOA L or F39 JCLIA D or F39 JCHEL L FS9 JCLIELI D l Cable with Cable with l Connector on One t Connector on One I End for Emitter End for Receiver g ike JAHLGA a o o 5 sz I lic oc 3508 m RS 485 A 1H c 9 2 5 gray amp 2 5 gt lII RS B Q o i O taz l g a o Q I o E 9 l fol Zol pink 7 zs qe Ne 7 3 zl s i 3 SI il Cg 2 2 3 Se BID 28282 8 8 zE 222 o lt Test GE o gt 5 SEs z w I o l Switch l 3 3 15 Fel 99 8 Blo l l 2eg sc l gt ez g E je z 88a agi 33 2 2 I I S g xO z 9 g ia E F 2 d 5 6 amp i ES ee L e je Es o ell 2s og 2c S2 SB 4 E Fuses h Po 3 24 V a DO E1 BOS AMEE 8 COGOCOGO CO s h i i Oo gt 0 i i lt SENDO Control circuits ad TM E1 24 VDC e bien F3SX N L2R ac i Ly o ER K2 JEAN A i i Co S ov A2 GO 3 eas EL1AEL2A
3. Model No of Protective Model Protective PNP Output 1 NPN Output Beams Height mm 2 PNP output 1 NPN Output Beams Height mm 2 F3SJ A0245P20 F3SJ A0245N20 16 245 rom necgure eee eee ee F3SJ A0275P20 F3SJ A0275N20 118 275 ee ee A F3SJ A0305P20 F3SJ A0305N20 20 305 E ioi F3SJ A0380P25 F3SJ A0380N25 19 380 F3SJ A0335P20 F3SJ A0335N20 22 335 EGG CADADOBOS ESS ADADONGS TUN F3SJ A0365P20 F3SJ A0365N20 24 365 F3SJ A0460P25 F3SJ A0460N25 23 460 F3SJ A0395P20 F3SJ A0395N20 26 395 F3SJ A0500P25 F3SJ A0500N25 25 500 oe F3SJ A0425P20 F3SJ A0425N20 28 425 F3SJ A0540P25 F3SJ A0540N25 540 o lt F3SJ A0455P20 F3SJ A0455N20 30 455 F3SJ A0580P25 F3SJ A0580N25 29 580 F3SJ A0485P20 F3SJ A0485N20 32 485 FSSJ A0620P25 F35J A0620N25 31 620 F3SJ A0515P20 F3SJ A0515N20 34 515 ose TUNE soo EL B sian ene s e Hd F3SJ A0780P25 F3SJ A0780N25 39 780 28 F3SJ A0605P20 F3SJ A0605N20 40 605 F3SJ AOSPOPO5 FSSIAOS2UNSS 141 Bon S F3SJ A0635P20 F3SJ A0635N20 42 635 F3SJ A0860P25 F3SJ A0860N25 2 860 DED F3SJ A0665P20 F3SJ A0665N20 44 665 F3SJ A0900P25 900 a 2E F3SJ A0695P20 F3SJ A0695N20 46 695 F3SJ A0940P25 F3SJ A0940N25 a BOs F3SJ A0725P20 F3SJ A0725N20 48 725 F3SJ A0980P25 c Im e F3SJ A0755P20 F3SJ A0755N20 50 755 roo USO weeds USE 1020 F3SJ A0785P20 F3SJ A0785N20 52 785 Oboe is a E Co F3SJ A0815P20
4. M12 waterproof connector F3SN AL SS Accessories Mounting Brackets Top and Bottom 4 307 nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 Material Iron zinc plating Note Provided with the main unit R2 max Mounting Brackets Intermediate uonoo es onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 SUOIINEIAId o0srSIN Material Iron pine A M5 x bracket fixing screw Intermediate bracket 3 i 13 75 e 11 D c lt H d N J Note P rovided with the main unit The number of brackets required depends on the total length of the Sensor Intermediate S M4 x 6 sensor fixing screw bracket 1 bracket 2 a e O oO Tl C23 Qo Jg e V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o omnon ow o D 7 oz o 7 uonoojes jonpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 Ea V HS 4 SSOY NS 4 s8 NS 4 l0L dS J S L 6 4 zJeAfSed OO8PSN SJe3 V NS 4 suonneoeJd Sse F3SN AL SS Accessories Order Separately Wall Mounting Bracket F39 L18 Ly ER A me m 3 14 2 dia Eight R2 15 Free location Bracket F39 L19 X Mounting 1 EJ 5 m 30 Emitter Cover or Receiver Cover 11 18 93 30 ind 10 OE 10 8 po
5. nw Kd Mirrors Reduce Operating Range by 12 with Each Unit o T Mirror material Width mm Depth mm Length mm Model 406 F39 MLG0406 610 F39 MLG0610 py 711 F39 MLG0711 TS 914 F39 MLG0914 S9 1 067 F39 MLG1067 3 Glass mirror 145 32 1 219 F39 MLG1219 EFI 1 422 F39 MLG1422 o os 1 626 F39 MLG1626 oo 1 830 F39 MLG1830 lt 2 134 F39 MLG2134 Spatter Protection Covers Include Two Pieces for Emitter and Receiver Reduces Operating Range by 10 with Each Unit Appearance Applicable sensor Model a F3SN ADOOOP 14 F39 HNC TL T 177 14 i F3SN ADOOOP 25 01 E F 3SN ADOOOP 40 01 F3SN ADOOOP 70 01 1 F3S5N BOOOOP 25 FS9 HNL1 1 1 25 8 F3SN BOOOOP 40 d F3SN BOOOOP 70 j F3SH A09P03 01 F39 HH09 03 T Note The same 4 digit numbers as the protective heights OOOI in the light curtain type names are substituted by L IL IL IL in the model names a l 9 Spatter Protection Slit Covers Include Two Pieces for Emitter and Receiver e Model Appearance Applicable sensor Slit width 1 15 mm Slit width 0 6 mm T T T RRF F3SN ADOOOP 14 01 F39 HSOOOODA 14 F39 HS_ILILILIB 14 als s ae mE F3SN ADOOOP 25 01 F 3SN ADOOOP 40 01 F3SN ADOOOP 70 01 a F3SN BITTTTIP 25 F39 HS I 1 1 JA 25 F39 HS I 1 1 JB 25 z F3SN BOOOOP 40 P F3SN BOOOOP 70 o oO F 3S H A09P 03 01 F39 HSH09A 03 F39 HSHO09B 03 Operating range will decrease substantially Refer to Specificat
6. OSD oz 5 D o 29 424 VDC See note 2 o oS Power So E es E S E IE EEEE l zo 1 When the EDM is Not Used When the EDM is not necessary o 1 Use the F39 MC11 to disable the EDM eo or 2 Disable the EDM by changing the wiring as shown in the figure below when the auxiliary output is Dark ON d Note 1 Use very low load type switches la 2 IfK3 is not necessary short circuit the auxiliary lt output with the EDM input D N Series Connection Up to 3 Sets Emitter Receiver q Using series connection models model numbers ending in 01 03 r E EA 04 05 enables series connection as shown in the figure atthe right M i Either stand alone models and the series connection models can be _ used for the light curtains located at the top end _ d Note 1 To maintain sensor performance please use double ended o connector cables for series connection which are the length 4 of F39 J C3B or shorter Double ended connector cables c EET ACOE that are longer than F 39 J C7B cannot be used for series on Both Ends for Emitter on Both Ends for Receiver connection F39 J CR2B L F39 CR2B D F39 CR5B L F39 CR5B D o 2 The F3SN and F3SH cannot be connected in series oe i n Tr 3 Series connection is possible for model numbers ending in jdn ni Cue sae ek 04 or 05 with 0 2 m cable with connectors Emitter Receiver Refer to page 379 aca eat _ _
7. 45 mm 26 mm Flexible cable with a 5 mm bending radius makes wiring a snap The F3SJ cables 0 3 m have M12 connectors and can be routed in any direction Problems with connector compatibility have been eliminated Flexible cables with 5 mm bending radius can be adhesively mounted to the Free directional floor cables can be routed down back left or right F3SJ Ver 2 The included standard mounting brackets are easier than ever to use The included mounting brackets which are suitable for general use have been redesigned with ease of use in mind The new design allows easy screwdriver access even when mounting in tight spaces Also after aligning the beams screws can be tightened while oriented perpendicular to the lens surface just like the panel mounting screws On previous models the carefully adjusted beam angles would sometimes come out of alignment when tightening the final screws This problem has been solved with the F3SJ because the screw tightening direction is different from the angle adjustment direction The result is reduced installation time Previous model F3SJ The sensor can be rotated along its axis Beam alignment can be fine tuned even when mounted side by side on a surface The direction of all screws can be oriented perpendicular to the lens surface Easy screwdriver access Side mounting in tight spaces is simple When using standard mounting brac
8. SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 E oO o o
9. Mounting adapter included Emitter F3SS emitted TI wy beams vus e visible infrared c Receiver Mirror n Td Alignment lj plate Note The Laser Alignment Kit includes the alignment plate level with visible laster mounting attachment and three AA batteries omnon F3SS Glass Mirror Mirrored Surface Mounting Surface F39 MSG Stainless Steel Mirror F39 MSS These Mirrors are used to bend the beams at 90 angles Multiple Mirrors can be used to provide protection in two directions or to build a detection system with a 2 beam configuration There are two types of Mirror Glass and Stainless Steel The reflection rate of the Stainless Steel Mirror is lower but there is no change of breakage The rate of attenuation in the detection distance is 12 for each 10 24 machine L7 di screws 4 1110 toothed washers 4 Pad 38 1 Mounting tabs oo F39 MSG Glass Mirror and 18 for each F39 MSS Stainless Steel 4 Mirror The detection distances according to the number of Mirrors lt used is given in the following table i Mirror Model Detection distance m vs No of mirrors material 1 Mirror 2 Mirrors 3 Mirrors 4 Mirrors Glass F39 MSG 52 46 40 35 Ov O Stainless ga steel F3
10. Model No of Protective PNP Output NPN Output Beams Height mm F3SJ A0245P30 F3SJ A0245N30 10 245 F3SJ A0295P30 F3SJ A0295N30 12 295 F3SJ A0320P30 13 320 F3SJ A0345P30 F3SJ A0345N30 14 345 F3SJ A0370P30 15 370 F3SJ A0395P30 F3SJ A0395N30 16 395 F3SJ A0445P30 F3SJ A0445N30 18 445 F3SJ A0470P30 19 470 F3SJ A0495P30 F3SJ A0495N30 20 495 F3SJ A0520P30 21 520 F3SJ A0545P30 F3SJ A0545N30 22 545 F3SJ A0595P30 24 595 F3SJ A0620P30 F3SJ A0620N30 25 620 F3SJ A0645P30 26 645 F3SJ A0670P30 F3SJ A0670N30 27 670 F3SJ A0695P30 28 695 F3SJ A0720P30 F3SJ A0720N30 29 720 F3SJ A0770P30 F3SJ A0770N30 31 770 F3SJ A0795P30 32 795 F3SJ A0820P30 F3SJ A0820N30 33 820 F3SJ A0845P30 34 845 F3SJ A0870P30 F3SJ A0870N30 35 870 F3SJ A0895P30 36 895 F3SJ A0920P30 F3SJ A0920N30 37 920 F3SJ A0945P30 38 945 F3SJ A0970P30 F3SJ A0970N30 39 970 F3SJ A0995P30 40 995 F3SJ A1020P30 F3SJ A1020N30 41 1020 F3SJ A1045P30 42 1045 F3SJ A1070P30 F3SJ A1070N30 43 1070 F3SJ A1095P30 44 1095 F3SJ A1120P30 F3SJ A1120N30 45 1120 F3SJ A1145P30 46 1145 F3SJ A1170P30 F3SJ A1170N30 47 1170 F3SJ A1195P30 48 1195 F3SJ A1220P30 F3SJ A1220N30 49 1220 F3SJ A1270P30 F3SJ A1270N30 51 1270 F3SJ A1295P30 52 1295 F3SJ A1395P30 F3SJ A1395N30 56 1395 F3SJ A1495P30 60 1495 F3SJ A1620P30 F3SJ A1620N30 65 1620 F3SJ A1745P30 70 1745 F3SJ A1870P30 F3SJ A1870N30 75 1870 F3SJ A1995P30 80 1995 F3SJ A2120P30
11. n l l l l l l KM1 KM2 N O contact l i 1 l l I I I ud K1 K2N C contact C 1 1L e e 1 ot I Io l ao KM1 KM2 N C contat 71 gt 1 LJ I I l PLC input 1 amp 2 l o J ii PLC input 2 EU I l I I 1 ot y PLC output i i K2 2 The output operation mode for auxiliary output 1 is E Ircul control output data inverse of control output signals enabled default setting omnon F3SJ Ver 2 System Configuration and Connection Muting system Muting System The muting function temporarily disables the safety function of the F3SJ keeping the control outputs ON even if beams are interrupted This makes it possible to install safety light curtains for AGV passage enabling both safety and productivity When muting the muting lamp external indicator blinks to notify people in the surrounding area that the safety functions are disabled For each operation modes refer to page 354 The muting and override functions disable the safety functions of the device Additional safety measures must be taken to ensure safety while these functions are working Install muting sensors so that they can distinguish between the object that is being allowed to be pass through the detection zone and a person If the muting function is activated by the detection of a person it may result in serious injury Muting lamps external indicators that indic
12. Applicable sensor F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Supply voltage 24 VDC 10 Power consumption MEE esum ou M s Operating time 100 ms max does not include the sensor s 300 ms max does not include the sensor s response time response time and bounce time Response time EE not include the sensor s Aa dboccd S sensor s T No of contact 3NO 1NC 3 NO o8 Relay output Rated load 25 VAC 5A cos diameter 21 30 VDC 5AL R Oms 250 VAC 5A o Rated carry voltage 5A Connection Between sensor s M12 connector 8 pins method Other Terminal block Weight packed state Approx 280 g Approx 300 g 3 Accessory Instruction manual 5 3 For further details on the G9SA 300 SC refer to the page 557 instruction manual od o Setting Console External Indicators 29 Item Model F39 MC11 Model F39 A01PR L F39 A01PG L id So Emitter Emitter o Applicable sensor F3SN A F3SH A F39 A01PR D F39 A01PG D lt Supply voltage 24 VDC 10 provided from the sensor Item Receiver Receiver Connection method Cable included F3SN ALILILILIPLILI 01 03 04 05 Applicable sensor F3SH A09P 03 01 RB Weight packed state 360g 7 3 eo eS One br
13. M ao ao Cable with Connector on One End for Receiver F39 JCLJA D or F39 JCLIEL D Cable with Connector on One End for Emitter F39 JCLJA L or F39 JCLIEL L omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 uonoosjes onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 V HS 4 SSLIV NSE4 a NSE4 LOl dS 4 S l 6 4 249A rSe4 OO08vSN V NS 4 suonne2eJd SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o F3SN AL SS I O Circuit Diagrams Circuit 3 24 VDC I External indicator output Emitter main circuit Load Y E OV o 9 Oo T RS 485 A E Gray ns 38 og 3 I I A o 3 Receiver main D 229 circuit 2 o o e et o gt Zo I I o I Co e e 3 Receiver main External SEDIT t indicator output Load P Auxiliary N output Ny 1 aps 1 ove m Note The numbers in O indicate pin numbers of the Connector e The numbers in indicate pin numbers of the series connection Connectors 1 Open normal light emission short stops light emission 2 Refer to Connections Basic Connection on page 419 z 3 The section encircled with the dashed line applies to models ending in 01 and 04 only uF Cable with Connector on One End Signal name Tl Ti Tl gp G2 9 9 Internal wiring IZZ Receiver Emitter 0 Interlock 1 White Control output 2 selection input c Cable sheath color gt
14. SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 S3 3 i C2 o o MS4800 Series Sensor Restart of Machine Cycle Operation PSDI Using the Safety Light Curtain to initiate a machine cycle after an object is removed from the sensing area is called Presence Sensing Device Initiation PSDI Use of PSDI places additional requirements on the guarding and safety controls It can restrict advanced Safety Light Curtain features such as floating blanking and fixed blanking Details on PSDI can be found in ANSI RIA 15 06 1999 OSHA 1910 217 h and ANSI B11 2 1995 R2005 For wiring N WARNING For PNP output connect the load between the output and 0 V line Connecting the load between the output and 24 V line results in a dangerous condition because the operation mode is reversed to ON when light is interrupted Do not interconnect an output line with a 24 V line Otherwise the output is always ON creating a dangerous situation Also 0 V of the power supply must be grounded so that output does not turn ON due to grounding of the output line Configure the system by using the optimal number of control outputs that satisfy the requirements of the necessary safety category Do not connect the lines of the MS MSF4800 to a DC power supply higher than 24 V 2096 Also do not connect to an AC power supply Otherwise it may result in electric shock Programming and Diagnostics Module The MS MSF4800 series Safety Light Curtains r
15. o o sz amp X gt A l L cl E er o N E 8 2 I sg Q E bl 8 Bl O gt D 2 QAN ol o gt st ol ol gt e E gs 3 c ef 2 o o 5 O Of 0o e tc o O E1 Feedback loop KM1 N Control 4 09 84 22 KM2 Timing Chart Light incident F3SS Light interrupted I Reset Switch S1 zt K1 or K2 NO contact K1 or K2 NC contact KM1 or KM2 NO contact KM1 or KM2 NC contact PLC input EE y I I PLC output Dl EN KM3 I o A Terminal names or numbers are given in brackets S 1 Start switch to release interlock NC contact KM1 KM2 Magnetic contactors KM3 Solid state contactor e g G3J M Three phase motor E1 E2 24 VDC power supply recommended S82K OUT Note When connecting the F3SS to the G9SA 301 disable the F3SS s start restart interlock function and use the interlock function in the G9SA 301 instead Refer to the nstruction Manual included with the product for details omnon nw Dm D 7 o lt o 7 uonoogjos onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud LOL dS 4 SOL 6E4 c 49A PSEA 008v SIN V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 SS J nw Dm E 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud LOL dS 4 SOL 6E4 c 49A PSEA 008v SIN V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4
16. SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 sdg SS J F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Specifications Main Units For details refer to the instruction manual F3SN A F3SH A Model Stand F3SN ALILI TL PA0 F3SN ALI ICT IP70 8 alone x1 x1 eln a ELE Series F3SN ALILILI_IP40 01 F3SN ALI T TE P70 01 Item connection x1 x1 Fein iN SUE Sensor type Type 4 Safety Light Curtain Setting tool connection Connectable Safety category Category 4 3 2 1 or B Opaque objects Opaque objects Opaque objects Opaque objects u mm in diameter mm in diameter mm in diameter mm in diameter Detection capability 14 in di t 25 mdi t 40 indi t 70 indi t 21 to 125 Number of beams n odd numbers only 13 to 120 7 to 60 5 to 30 4 189 to 1125 mm 217 to 1822 mm 217 to 1807 mm 277 to 1777 mm Protective DIJOAN PH n xP PH n 1 xP 37 PH n 1xP437 PH n 1 xP 37 Outermost beam gap 900 mm Lens diameter 9mm x 4 6 mm Diameter 9 mm Operating range 0 2to7m 0 2to10m ERE ON to OFF 10 to 15 5 ms max ON to OFF 10 ms max incident condition OFF to ON 40 to 62 ms max OFF to ON 40 ms max Startup waiting time 1s max Power supply voltage Vs 24 VDC 10 ripple p p 10 max Current Emitter Up to 50 beams 140 mA max 51 to 85 beams 155 mA max 86 beams and more 1
17. Reset input Yellow l F c 5 x ES T o c 2 30 a 5 2 E a i O o6 2 2 co I 8 ME amp a o esgic e E o D amp ogo o pum w c p g x LLI Control output 1 EDM input Red Green Use a switch suitable for micro loads If K3 is not necessary short circuit the auxiliary output with the EDM input Auxiliary output Yellow Series Connection Up to 3 Sets The use of series connection types models ending in 01 or 04 enables series connection as shown in the figure atthe right Any type of Sensor can be used at the top end Emitter Receiver F3SN A P25SS Note 1 To maintain sensor performance please use double ended connector cables for series connection which are the length of F 39 J C3B or shorter Double ended connector cables that are longer than F 39 J C7B cannot be used for series connection 2 Models ending in 04 can be connected in series without an optional Cable with Connectors on Both Ends because they have a Connector with a 0 2 m cable on top ll Cable with Connectors on Both Ends for Receiver F39 JCR2B D F39 JCR5B D or F39 JC3B D See notes 1 and 2 Cable with Connectors on Both Ends for Emitter F39 JCR2B L F39 FCR5B L or F39 JC3B L See notes 1 and 2 Emitter Receiver F3SN A P25SS 01 or F3SN A P25SS 04 pL
18. UOI 99 9S onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 SUOIINEIAId 008rSIN 6 49A FSES S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 i C2 o o F3SJ Ver 2 Using Side Flat Mounting Bracket F39 LJ2 F39 LJ2 Material Stainless steel Use standard brackets r e Mounting screw holes 4 M5 IN B l pee A C 74 B C 39 5 c 4 digit number of the model name protective height omnon F3SJ Ver 2 Using Free Location Mounting Bracket F39 LJ3 Backside mounting 31 Mounting screw holes i rT 4 6 M5 F39 LJ3 Material Zinc die cast 42 pod ED B C Protective 42 B height J nw Du D 72 o lt o 7 uonoojes onpoJd mi s E sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008t SIN Side mounting F39 LJ3 Material Zinc die cast stainless Mounting screw holes 6 M5 V 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 C Protective height zm B 15 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o omnon F3SJ Ver 2 Dimensions B C and F Dimension F B C 90 Number of intermediate C 4 digit number of the model name protective height iain mounti
19. F39 L19 Brackets 1 and 2 M5 x 12 screw Brackets and screws included in one set V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 information on preventing mutual interference of Safety Light Curtains e Mounting bracket 1 1 that are not connected in series SA ning AELE O e M5 x 12 screw 1 Z e Mounting bracket 3 1 gt e M4 x 8 Screw 1 e Toothed washer 2 o o m m C3 C9 N TI OW TI C2 o o nw Dn D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 4n oO o o 408 F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Safety related Functions Interlock Function The auto reset mode and the manual reset mode are wire selectable features of the F 3SN A F 3SN B F 3SH A Auto reset Mode After the power is turned ON and none of the beams are interrupted the OSSD Output Signal Switching Device outputs will go to their ON state Manual Reset Mode For the factory setting the start restart interlock is selected in the manual reset mode When the light curtain enters the interlock condition it keeps the OSSD outputs in the OF F state Even if all beams become free the OSSD outputs will not go to the ON state When none of the beams are interrupted in the detection zone applying the rese
20. wy 2120 MSF4800 30 J 25 Slave 2 2a Basic XR2 5 Series S 360 t Master MSF4800B 40 O Vg I 12 to 68 MS4800B 40 0 amp a 2040 MSF4800 40 Q P9 Slave amp 2 o ZD Note A 4 digit number indicating the protective height of the Light Curtain must be included in place of the box L1 in the model number Sa 1 There is no muting function in Basic series Safety Light Curtains 2 The same Slave Light Curtains are used for both the Advanced Series and Basic Series These Slaves cannot be used individually E o Functional Comparison of Advanced Series and Basic Series e e Series Advanced Series Basic Series Function Model MS MSF4800A MS MSF4800B T Scan code for mutual interference reduction Supported 1 Supported 1 L lt External device monitoring EDM Supported 2 Supported 2 9 Operation mode Supported 1 Supported 1 gt Machine test signal MTS Supported 1 Supported 1 T Auxiliary output PNP transistor x 1 or NPN transistor x 1 Supported 1 SUPP uU i l P NP control output synchronizing only Q Supported 1 Muting via the MS4800 RM6 Resource Module MSF4800A only E C3 Floating blanking Supported 1 o Fixed blanking Supported 1 d Monitored blanking Supported 1 Reduced resolution blanking Supported 1 Sensing distance setting Supported 1 Supported 1 DOD Start input method Supported 1 gt UD Response time adjustment Supported 1
21. nnm gt DOD S l Note 1 The above circuit diagram conforms to Category 4 IZZ 2 In this connection example the auxiliary output is set to the gt U standard setting Dark ON operation To operate using non standard settings refer to the catalog or 7 Emitter F3SN AOSS Receiver Instruction Manual for the F3SN ALISS oO imi Use the optional F39 MC11 Setting Console to disable the EDM Z Timing Chart P g Reset switch S2 ON o OFF IMEEM SS OL o Emergency stop ON switch 1 OFF a 8 I F3SN ALISS ON m C9 Co control outputs N TI 1 and 2 One i i i nn F3SX N L2R ON m l i d R output OFF T d External indicator iis i l OFF NEN NENNEN ENN 2 li P n KM1 KM2 E i i BEEN D OFF E f o l i T Motor M Rotate EE a Stop i i Reset input F3SN Reset input Emergency Reset input light F3SN stop switch Emergency interrupted light OFF stop switch incident ON Note This timing chart does not allow for I O device response delays omnon F3SN AL SS F3SX N L2R Auto reset For category 4 rating
22. 008t SIN 6 49A l S J SOL 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 SS J nw on D 72 o lt o 7 uonoojes onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008Tt SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 EELE 4n oO o o F3SJ Ver 2 Indication Patterns and Intensity Levels of the Light Intensity Level Indicators LEVEL 1 to 5 I N ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5 Nl mum Nest cl mm l NA 1 NZ l N 1 N l hj Light intensity level 170 or higher of control output ON level nm Nel m m mm e GD D CD C 7 l N 1 N l N 1 N From 130 to 170 of control output ON level POM MP m DL See Xe D WD Co 7 1 N l NZ 1 N man ee Ye B C gt CO 7 1 N l Ni eL gt 7 r N From 100 to 130 of control output ON level From 75 to 100 of control output ON level From 50 to 75 of control output ON level Ge D Less than 50 of control output ON level Note Operation is possible with light intensity level of 100 or more but to ensure stability operate when at least 5 of the indication lamps are ON Error Mode Indication Patterns and Cause of Errors ERROR A to C C i x OFF Blinking ON gt 7 N Cause of error Mutual interference or ambien
23. Insulation resistance 20 MO min at500 VDC Dielectric strength 1000 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 min Degree of protection Vibration resistance Shock resistance omnon IEC Standard IP 65 Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz 0 7 mm double amplitude 20 sweeps in X Y and Z directions Malfunction 100 m s 1000 times in X Y and Z directions F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Model Stand F3SN ALJLJ_ILIP14 F3SN AL IL ILL P25 F3SN A IL ILL IP40 F3SN A LLL P70 IL 1L Series F3SN A IP14 01 F3SN A IP25 01 F3SN ALILILILIP40 01 F3SN ALILI T P70 01 Item KI 2 1 1 X1 F3SH A09P03 01 Materials Case Aluminum end cap Zinc die cast optical cover PMMA acrylic resin Cable Oil resistant PVC Weight g Detection width x2 4 a Detection width of 189 to 639 mm a 700 Detection width of 652 to 1 267 mm a 800 Detection width of 1 282 to 1 822 mm a 900 Model with no suffix or 01 B 0 Model with suffix 02 03 or 05 B 100 Model with suffix 04 p 200 Test rod amp 6 instruction manual error mode label mounting brackets top and bottom mounting brackets intermediate amp 7 IEC61496 1 EN61496 1 Type 4 ESPE Electro Sensitive Protective Equipment IEC61496 2 Type 4 AOPD Active Opto electronic Protective Devices 3 1 The 4 digits in L IL IL TL in the model number represent the protective height Use the formula given in t
24. SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 SS J omron BEP F3SJ Ver 2 Spatter Protection Cover F39 HJ I Assembled dimensions S 10 40 b Four digits in the model number protective height 10 oo 9n o 2L o c o 7 Material polycarbonate for the protective cover uonoogjes onpoJd Setting Support Software for the F3SJ F39 GWUM SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 625 7 008v SIN Insulated vinyl round cable 4 6 dia Standard length 0 5 m 6 49A l S J SOL 6E4 LOL dS 4 Setting Console F39 MC21 Communications jack V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 d r9 Connection indicator o T ie Function selection indicator D Channel indicator o Channel key Mode indicator m m W C2 N TI oo Up cursor key Right cursor key c yt Left cursor key Dowin cursor key Enter key Delete key omnon F3SJ Ver 2 Protective Bar F39 PJL I IL 1L S Backside mounting nw Du D 72 o lt o 7 uonoogjos onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 Mounting screw holes suonneoaJd 3 M5 bolts with Mounting bracket 2 hexagonal holes and When using M5 When using M6 M8 attached washers 20 2 M8 4 M5 3 75 6 25 Y 008t SIN 2 M6 6 49A l S J UJ B C Protective height S01 6 4 I
25. 5 23 9 63 69 L co OV Qo C lt a j E TI g h2 613 622622 EEL wre ESEA j Q KM1 KM KM3 KM4 PLC etc St External test switch connect to 0 V if the switch is not necessary l S2 Lockout reset switch connect to 24 V if the co g switch is not necessary E yes controner KM1 to KM4 Magnetic contactor 4 operation commana M1 M2 3 o phase motor Timing Chart E1 24 VDC power supply S82K Control output M PLC Programmable controller i i Used for monitoring not related to safety KM1 KM2 N C contact system KM3 KM4 N C contact Wiring for manual reset mode UD ses cogis 7 KM1 KM2 N O contact nmm V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSL_IV NSE4 A e A T O Q 5 5 Motor operation command EN J Motor rotation O kK 0 0 OFF delay time Tl 7i o S3 Reset switch omnon F3SJ Ver 2 For NPN output See page 332 for PNP output wiring Wiring for single F3SJ application category 4 e Use of relay welded relay contact detection and interlock is possible without a controller or relay unit R Manual reset mode Emitter icd Using external device monitoring pu function E nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 D F39 JCLIA L F39 JCLIA D UO0I 99 9S onpoJd icai 933 Communication 533 2 amp 9 line Gray oz elg TS M 3 z c T
26. The service life will depend on the switching conditions Be sure to check the actual operating conditions using the actual devices and make sure thatthe number of switching operations will not cause performance problems If you continue to use the device with deteriorated performance it may result in breakdown of insulation between circuits or cause burning of the product Precautions for Safe Use Handle with Care Do not drop the product or expose it to excessive vibration or shock Doing so may prevent it from functioning properly Adhesion of Solvent Do not allow solvents such as alcohol thinner trichloroethane or gasoline to come into contact with the product Such solvents may make the markings illegible and cause deterioration of parts Installation Location Do notinstall or store the product in the following locations Doing so may result in product failure or malfunction e Locations subject to direct sunlight Locations subject to temperatures outside the range 10 to 55 C Locations subjectto humidity levels outside the range 3596 to 8596 Locations subject to condensation due to extreme temperature changes e Locations subject to atmospheric pressures outside the range 86 to 106 kPa e Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases e Locations subject to shock or vibration in excess of the product ratings e Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals e Locations subject to dust including i
27. To notify workers that the muting function is working external lamp s must be installed Use the F39 A01PLJ PAC external indicator set or an F39 JJ3N universal indicator cable with a commercially available external indicator F3SJ Internal Indicators e The muting input 1 indicator turns ON when input is applied to muting input 1 e The muting input 2 indicator turns ON when input is applied to muting input 2 e The muting input 1 indicator and muting input 2 indicator blink under muting override e he muting error indicator on the receiver side turns ON when there is a muting error Attachment Positions for Included Labels Internal indicator labels are included with the F39 CN6 Key Cap for Muting When using a muting system attach the internal indicator labels so the arrows will be in line with the positions of the indicators as shown by the shading below Emitter Receiver Internal indicator labels omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 uonoogjos onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaJd 008t SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o ow Du D 72 oz o UOI 99 9S onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ
28. UOI 99 9S onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SE pE i C2 o o E3ZS E3FS Safety Precautions Preventing Mutual Interference Observe the following items during installation to prevent Single beam Safety Sensors from interfering with each other or with Safety Light Curtains e Leave adequate space between the Sensors during installation Refer to the instruction manuals for the E3ZS E8FS and the F3SN F3SH e Use baffle plates to separate Sensors e Alternate Emitters and Receivers during installation See the figure below OMRON s Single beam Safety Sensor Input Module B1 Module from the F3SX Series is the only Controller that can be used for the E3ZS T81A ESFS 10BALI IL type 2 Normal operation may not be possible if another Single beam Sensor Controller is used The Sensor cannot be used as part of a safety system when the mode selection input of the Single beam Safety Sensor Receiver is connected to 0 V because the Sensor will turn ON when light is interrupted Dark ON Be sure to connect the mode selection input to 24 VDC if you want the Sensor to turn ON when light is incident Light ON AN Refer to the Precautions for All Safety Sensors on page 242 for calculating the Safety distance Check for mutual interference between Single b
29. o 7 uonoojos onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 SUOIINEIAId LOL dS 4 SOL 6E4 c 49A PSEA 008t SIN V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o nw Dm D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud LOL dS 4 SO1L 6E4 c 49A PSEA 008v SIN V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 SS J F3SJ Ver 2 When four muting sensors are connected e The muting function can be used by attaching the F39 CN6 Key Cap Muting lamp external indicator T Ez o Emitter Receiver m m r F39 JC a F39 JC Gray Communication line D i p uw uS ls ip Pink 2 S a E s E x2 Communica t Pus D O j o 59350g tion line c LF oc c 5g t E gt OV External device Auto reset mode Using external device monitoring function S1 External test switch connect to 24 V if the switch is not necessary S2 Lockout reset switch connect to 0 V if the switch is not necessary KM1 KM2 Safety relay with forcibly guided contacts G7SA or magnetic contactor KM3 Solid state contactor G3J M 3 phase motor E1 24 VDC power supply S82K PLC Programmable controller Used for monitoring not related to safety system A1 B1 A2 B2 Muting sensor
30. o D o o o uonoo es onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud LOL dS 4 SOL 6E4 6 49A l S J 008v SIN V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o nw on D 72 o lt o 7 uonoogjes onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 SUOIINEIAId 008v SIN 6 49A l S J SOL 6E4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 MS4800 Series Nomenclature Receiver LED Indicators Machine Run stop Indicator Green R ed Transmitter Detection zone R eceiver amp Pp P P Interlock or Alarm Lockout Indicator Yellow Blanking Active Amber Sealing Sealing we Cap P M8 Programming C Port for PDM T SLOT mounting PDM Cable one per beam Red 7 Receiver Connections M 12 male 8 pin 1 24 VDC Brown 6 External device 2 0 V Blue monitoring 3 Ground Green EDM Red 6 4 Control output 2 7 Auxiliary output White Pink 5 Start or external 8 Control output device monitoring 1 Black mode selection Yellow Note Remove the sealing cap M8 to connect the PDM cable Individual Beam Indicators Transmitter LED Indicators KM Status Indicator Yellow Transmitter Programming Port for PDM Transmitter Connections M 12 male
31. F3SN A JL I 1 JPAO F3SN AL I I 1 IP25 Yes F3SN A IL IL JPA0 01 F3SN A J P70 F3SN A IL 1 1 JP70 01 x1 The OOL in the model numbers indicates the protective height in mm Refer to Safety Light Curtain Model List on page 381 for model number details 2 Safety Light Curtains with model numbers ending in 02 through 05 provided with different connector configurations are also available as options Refer to page 379 for details Consult with your dealer or OMRON representative when ordering these models F3SN B Safety Light Curtains Type 2 C Infrared Connector Detection Beam Number Protective Output capability gap Appearance Operating range obean height 1 bod px Model 2 3 25 mm dia hr 13 to 119 No F3SN BLILILILIP25 217 to for hand 15 mm non 1807 mm protection continuous Y es F3SN B 1 I 1 P25 01 40 mm dia 7 to 60 I PNP No F3SN BLILILILIP40 for presence 30 mm e i Eo non transistor 1807 mm detection continuous output Yes F3SN B 1 I 1 P40 01 70 mm dia No F3SN BI I I P70 211 to for presence 60 mm 1777 mm detection Yes F3SN BLILILILIP70 01 1 Models with NPN transistor outputs are also available as options For details on the method for securing safety by using an NPN transistor for output contact your OMRON representative x2 The IL IL I in the model numbers indicates the protective height
32. Free location bracket l Mounting Back mounting only Materials Zinc die cast zinc plating F39 L19 _ Distance from the mounting surface 7 mm Note Not provided with an angle deflection Recommended pitch 670 mm max DED mechanism for beam control Beam adjustment Not available rotating 359 direction o 2 o d Free location bracket E ET Materials Minimum order quantity 1 pc Sensor fixing element Mounting Both front and back mounting Zinc die cast zinc plating F39 L20 Distance from the mounting surface About o Mounting bracket Iron zinc plating 15 mm l Es l l Recommended pitch 400 mm max e Note Provided with an angle deflection Beam adjustment Available mechanism for beam control z Use these brackets for Sensors having a protective height where no intermediate bracket is required with a protective height of less than 640 mm a lt External Indicator Separate Models for Emitters and Receivers x Appearance Specification Indicator Type Model Emitter F39 A01PR L e P NP output E mitter F39 A01PG L i C3 5 Receiver F39 A01PG D E e Spatter Protection Cover Includes Two Pieces for Emitter and Receiver Each Unit Reduces the Operating Range by 1096 Appearance Model V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 F39 HNi_ILJLILJ 25 z amp SS V NS J The same 4 digit numbers as protective heights LL IL IL in Light Curtain model numbers are substituted by L IL IL IL in the model numbers SZ 3 SJ
33. H m Purple Reset input Se hh eee ee E Ayayes o D o o o White Safety output 2 Black Safety output 1 Gray Auxiliary output 1 Red External device monitoring input UOI 99 9S onpoJd l l NSD mum B l S os o Sz p T FE EE i Blue Power supply 0 V ans a 13 5s 6 b0d6 be 6586 CN7 MSA1 CN8 MSB1 CN5 MSA2 CN6 MSB2 Muting Sensor A1 Muting Sensor B1 Muting Sensor A2 Muting Sensor B2 7 c Use the following connecting cable to connect the Muting Sensors lt M12 4 pin connector Pin 1 24 V Pin 2 Not used Pin 3 0 V Pin 4 Output When using a Through beam Photoelectric Sensor use an XS2R D426 I11 F Y joint with Socket and Plug or similar product to connect the transmitter and receiver S o Model with Override Mode F39 TC5P02 o CN2 COMM Setting Console F39 MC21 CN3 L CN4 D or CN1 7 F 3S A Emitter F 3S A Receiver PC Tool for F3S F39 GWUM 1 O auxiliary terminals U e 02 9 0 0 C0 8 pF CDD 000 0 9 CD 00D 0 0 OOOO l l Brown Power supply HeH 24VDC CHE dL ilL l V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 I I HHH Pink Test input y I Purple Reset input Z SE e OO O a White Safety output 2 gt E S E Black Safety output 1 z Lo bo LLL Gray Auxil
34. H H 5 9 E Communication 2 G z 9 line Pink ZI I Se ie a 2 8 S s gig S w S amp S g 2 U a e E c c Fl e 2 2 S 8 Qo d gt xX O o lt 9 DI D Sg is HE gt x lt c e j O Ol T 24 VDC OUT d E1 4 OV Timing Chart C CO C9 i E 3 l l l I I OON Light incident S1 External test switch connect to 24 V if the IZZ Light interrupted l switch is not necessary gt UD oi oo i S2 Interlock lockout reset switch l l l l External test switch S1 AN KM1 KM2 Safety relay with forcibly guided contacts d a 4 G7SA or magnetic contactor o Reset switch S2 E i E E i H KM3 Load PLC for monitor gt E KM4 Solid state contactor G3J o d M 3 phase motor sd Control output PL FE EH E1 24 VDC power supply S82K Dod MEE i PLC Programmable controller mm KM1 KM2 N O contact Used for monitoring not related to safety LP p NE EXPO KM1 KM2N C contact 1 rog I 7 PLC inpats So d 2 PLC output The output operation mode for auxiliary output 1 is control output data inverse of control output signals enabled default setting omron RY F3SJ Ver 2 Wiring for connection with a controller G9SA 301 P category 4 NPN models only t Es F3SJ settings Emitter SSS Receiver Auto reset mode External device monitoring function disabled e G9SA 301 P settings e Manual reset mode Using emerg
35. J RM PEC o Fr d BP ambient light amp B Receiver Emitter omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 uonoog es onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaJd LOL dS 4 SOL 6E4 c 49A PSEA 008t SIN V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 szeg SJ 3 C2 o o nw a D 72 oz o UOI 99 9S jonpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J Safety Light Curtain MS4800 Series Safety Light Curtains with Durable Impact resistant Body and Long 20 m Sensing Distance MS MSF4800A Advanced Series Programming and Diagnostics Module PDM makes it easy to set functions Series connection is possible only with the MSF4800A Blanking can be set Muting is possible only with the MSF48004A by using the MS4800 RM6 Resource Module MS MSF4800B Basic Series Features all necessary basic Safety Light Curtain functions Series connection is possible only with the MSF4800B Programming and Diagnostics Module PDM makes it easy to set functions Be sure to read the Precautions for Safe A Use on page 273 Features Durable Housing with a Thickness of 3 mm Min Withstands Vibration and S3L 6 4 LO L dS J V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 szegd sdg SS J Impacts Unlike conventional Safety Light Curtains the MS 480
36. Use standard F39 LJ5 brackets Material Stainless steel C Protective height nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 uonoogjos onpoJd EE o P9 o g o Sz C 34 D lt C 4 digit number of the model name protective height LI o Inward outward facing mounting 30 eo Mounting screw holes e Use standard F39 LJ5 brackets Material Stainless steel 6 J9A f S J d 8 d bob od B Oo ea i A 7 i kA H 3 FEDIVe Nel V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 C 44 C3 B C 12 2 C 4 digit number of the model a name protective height o m m C3 C9 NTI OW Tl C3 D omnon Ayayes o D o fe o uonoogjes onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 4n oO o o F3SJ Ver 2 F3SN replacement correspondence table F3SN mounting holes can be used without modification When replacing F3SN IP N 14 with F3SJ AL I I J IP N 14 F3SN Replacement F3SJ Replacement method Protective using F39 LJ5 height Protective height F3SN 10153P N 14 153 Model Inward facing F3SN 10180P N 14 180 idunt F3SJ A0245P N 14 F3SN L10189P N 14 189 F3SJ A0245P N 14 F3SN 10198P N 14 198 F3SJ A0245P
37. Wiring Example The following example is for when two muting sensors are connected in the auto reset mode and the external device monitoring function is enabled L2 EB T A RE 2 _ a oO op op Lo cc o D c c l a eo st pe pe pe p o o o o D D D D JIJIA fel fafa AJE o o o nn sic S l z Sls o S amp nd 2 2 a 0 9 eio tl 2 6 j 2 2 2 2 Io 2 EJ gt 2 Ja Qo 2 7 CIO aol lol SIs 2 al gt o oZ Ei ilz 5 3 2 8a elal S 8 o 2 5 zi HAR S S 2 sl Ss S Ol c a S 20 3 2 S s wo D gt l S d S 5 H S a 8 5 2 5 5 5 a 2 2 E gt 5 2 E 2 E 5 gt 6 5 S 5 gt S 5 S 3 5 SlFL NO SIL S alo Alolo lo l o lo 1 Muting output uonoogjes jonpoJd L3 T Qd l 3 E a aes switch Note If you are connecting four muting 9 E KM2 s 2 pal contagio sensors connectthe sensor outputs to ons oe MA1 MA2 MB1 and MB2 Also Zo mE short circuit MAO to L1 and MBO to L8 z Note 1 To use the muting function a S Muting Keycap F39 CN6 2 must be mounted to the F3SJ 2 If a lockout reset is required connecta switch between RST o and V c lt T io The following example is for when two muting sensors are connected in auto reset mode and the external device monitoring function is disabled O e E o o 9 o S f i
38. light intensity level indicator green 5 levels Receiver Mutual interference prevention function 3 OFF state indicator red ON state indicator green lockout indicator red blanking indicator green F 3S N A only Power indicator green F3SH A only error mode indicator 3 red light intensity level indicator green 5 levels Time shared beam projection system by series connection Series connections Test functions e Number of series connected light curtains Up to 3 sets e Number of beams Up to 240 beams e Length of the series connection cable 3 m max e Self test when power is turned ON and while power is supplied one cycle during response time External test emission stop function by test input Safety functions Connection method e Auto reset manual e Auto reset manual reset interlock 4 e EDM External Device Monitor A E ene ea e Fixed blanking 5 External Device e Floating blanking 5 Monitor M12 connector 8 pins Protective circuits Output short circuit protection power supply reverse polarity protection Ambient temperature Operating 10 to 55 C storage 30 to 70 C with no icing or condensation Ambient humidity Ambient operating light intensity Operating storage 3596 to 9596 with no condensation Incandescent lamp 3000 Ix max light intensity on the receiver surface Sunlight 10000 Ix max light intensity on the receiver surface
39. o 7 uonoojes onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suoineoaud 008Tt SIN 6 49A l S J SOL 6E4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 SS J F3SJ Ver 2 F3W C replacement correspondence table F3W C mounting holes can be used without modification When replacing F3W CI with F3SJ AlI_JLILIL 30 F3W C Replacement F3SJ Model Protective height Model Protective height F3W C044 120 F3W C084 280 F3SJ A0320L130 320 F3W C124 440 F3SJ A0470L I30 470 F3W C164 600 F3SJ A0620L I30 620 F3W C204 760 F3SJ A0795L130 795 F3W C244 920 F3SJ A0945 J30 945 o h it p lt New holes must be drilled for the intermediate bracket o D gt o o o Using Top Bottom Mounting Bracket C F39 LJ11 F39 LJ11 30 Material Stainless steel Mounting screw holes UOI 99 9S jonpoJd 35 n I 4 M5 e T gu 54 5 DIT o2n7 es 4d o c Y o S S Bo o A bog Co i T C Protective height B A B o lt a D E un O 54 5 PE s Dimensions A to C ae z A C 109 4 Mounting holes B C 69 ama c 4 digit number of the model NNW name protective height T22 D gt UD Accessories Z Single end Connector Cable o F39 JCR5A L 0 5 m F39 JC10A L 10 m F39 JC3A L 3 m
40. onpoJd 83 XS2W D421 J81 A L 10m 223 XS2W D421 C81 R L 1m P XS2W D421 D81 R L 2m NE 96 XS2W D421 G81 R L 5m 14 9 diam XS2W D421 J81 R L 10m 7 I S XS2W D422 D81 A L 2m n XS2W D422 G81 A L 5m P S Ro m e T XS2W D423 D81 A L 2m a XS2W D423 G81 A L 5m b 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 XS2W D424 D81 A L 2m XS2W D424 G81 A L 5m SSLIV NS 4 szed SE pE 4n oO o o omnon E3ZS E3FS Cables with Connector Socket on One End XS2F D421 C80 A L 1m XS2F D421 D80 A L 2m XS2F D421 G80 A L 5m XS2F D421 J80 A L 10m XS2F D421 C80 R L 1m XS2F D421 D80 R L 2m XS2F D421 G80 R L 5m XS2F D421 J80 R L 10m o h it p lt XS2F D422 C80 A L 1m XS2F D422 D80 A L 2m XS2F D422 G80 A L 5m XS2F D422 J80 A L 10m XS2F D422 C80 R L 1m XS2F D422 D80 R L 2m XS2F D422 G80 R L 5m XS2F D422 J80 R L 10m o D o o o uonoojos onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud Connector Plug Assemblies Solder Type XS2G D425 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 c w WW DC LOL dS 4 Connector Plug Assemblies Screw on Type XS2G D4S5 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 SS J omnon nw Dum D 7 o lt o
41. 1 This function can be set by using the Programming and Diagnostics Module PDM oO 2 This function can be set by using the PDM or a wiring connection T p o m ITI C3 C9 NTI OW o 5 o omnon MS4800 Series Safety Light Curtain Model List Advanced series Curtains Used Individually Basic series Curtains Used Individually Minimum detectable object 30 mm dia Beam gap Minimum detectable object 30 mm dia Beam gap 20 mm 20 mm Model Number of beams Protective height mm Model Number of beams Protective height mm MS4800A 30 0280 14 280 MS4800B 30 0280 14 280 MS4800A 30 0320 16 320 MS4800B 30 0320 16 320 MS4800A 30 0360 18 360 MS4800B 30 0360 18 360 MS4800A 30 0400 20 400 MS4800B 30 0400 20 400 MS4800A 30 0440 22 440 MS4800B 30 0440 22 440 ote MS4800A 30 0480 24 480 MS4800B 30 0480 24 480 EY MS4800A 30 0520 26 520 MS4800B 30 0520 26 520 os MS4800A 30 0560 28 560 MS4800B 30 0560 28 560 a MS4800A 30 0600 30 600 MS4800B 30 0600 30 600 MS4800A 30 0640 32 640 MS4800B 30 0640 32 640 MS4800A 30 0680 34 680 MS4800B 30 0680 34 680 MS4800A 30 0720 36 720 MS4800B 30 0720 36 720 MS4800A 30 0760 38 760 MS4800B 30 0760 38 760 9 MS4800A 30 0800 40 800 MS4800B 30 0800 40 800 og MS4800A 30 0840 42 840 MS4800
42. 3 C2 o o omron QE nw a D 72 oz o UOI 99 9S onpo4d SsJosuag Ayayes IV 404 szeg V HS 4 ede SSLIV NSe4 8 NS 4 LOl dS 4 S L 6 4 ZJeAfS J OO08tSW V NS 3 suonne2aJd SS J F3SN AL SS Specifications Refer to the instruction manual for details Main Unit refer to page 414 for details on accessories Item Model F3SN ALI ILL IP25SS LL Sensor type Type 4 Safety Light Curtain Setting tool connection Connectable Safety category Category 4 3 2 1 or B Detection capability Opaque objects 25 mm in diameter Beam gap P 15 mm Number of beams n 13 to 118 Refer to Ordering Information on page 412 Protective height PH 217 to 1792 mm PH n 1 x P 37 mm Lens diameter Diameter 9 mm Operating range 0 2 to 3 5 m Response time under stable light ON OFF Protective height 217 to 742 mm 10 0 ms 832 to 1222 mm 12 5 ms 1312 to 1792 mm 15 0 ms Hia Rd a ior OFF gt ON Protective height 217 to 742 mm 40 ms 832 to 1222 mm 50 ms 1312 to 1792 mm 60 ms Startup waiting time 1s max Power supply voltage Vs 24 VDC 10 ripple p p 10 max ars seem rele hola Emitter Up to 50 beams 140 mA max 51 to 85 beams 155 mA max 86 beams or more 170 mA max Receiver Up to 50 beams 100 mA max 51 to 85 beams 110 mA max 86 beams or more 120 mA max Light source emitted wavelength Infrared LED 870 nm
43. 42 b A V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 Light incident Sa Eel man Light interrupted EE NE cal External test switch S1 D l l I i l l Interlock reset switch S3 gt l p Emergency stop switch S 1 1 TTT cowoloutpt 1T PP TT mm og EN to a9 K1 K2 NO contacts 1 For the MS MSF4800B use NC contacts for the 0o o 1 start input switch E ERE For the MS MSF 4800A refer to Start Input Methods KM1 KM2 NO contacts MS MSF4800A Only on page 266 d d BN 2 MES provided pi 2 Se K1 K2 NC contact Em NEED NND 3 The testinputis disabled with the default setting To di dc use the test input connect the P DM to the Receiver Qo and enable the test input and use NC contacts for o KM1 KM2 NC contacts mm e mw the test input Lo x4 If an emergency stop switch is not used connect PLC input 1 Depends on the output operation control output 1 to T12 terminal and control output 2 mode oi ihe auxihary Aupa to T23 terminal directly PLC input 2 PLC output A a omnon MS4800 Series Example When Connected to the G9SB 301 D Controller Category 4 MS MSF4800 Settings Transmitter Receiver Auto start mode L S1 External test switch External device monitoring not used S2 Start input e Test input used S3 Interlock reset switch Use the PDM to enable the test input gt S4 Emergency stop switch A165E A22E e
44. A NC contacts OV Reset Optical Synchronization The synchronization between the MS 4800 series Transmitter and Receiver is optical To establish synchronization the system needs to have a certain number of consecutive clear beams Note For details refer to the Mini Safe 4800 Series Safety Light Curtains Installation and Operating Manual MS4800 Series Dimensions Unit mm Safety Light Curtains Safety Light Curtains Used Individually MS4800 59 3 Top surface view Reversing the mounting bracket nw Dm D 72 o lt o T 37 2 50 0 uonoogjes onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J Sealing Cap M8 37 2 Rear surface view with mounting brackets reversed SOL 6E4 mue i LOL dS 4 Left side view Left side view Bottom surface view Right side view Rear surface view with PDM cable attached V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 SS J omron Iyi MS4800 Series MS4800 30 Transmitter and Receiver Dimensions MS4800 40 Transmitter and Receiver Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Sensing area DA z z 2 2 Sensing area EMEN E p E 2
45. Correct Receiver 1 Receiver 2 Emitter 1 Emitter 2 AAAAAAA Correct Correct Receiver 1 Emitter 1 Emitter 1 Receiver 1 o Rel Emitter 2 Receiver 2 el K Receiver 2 n E a TE a a L ti d H U AAAAAAA Precautions for All Safety Sensors 2 Install a light interrupting wall in between sensors Correct Emitter 1 Receiver 1 Emitter 2 Receiver 2 Light interrupting wall 3 Install the light curtains facing away from the one another to eliminate mutual interference Correct Correct L Emitter 1 Receiver 1 Emitter 2 Receiver 2 0 Ig L 0 5 F3SN A F3SN ACISS F3SH A F3SJ 0 10 F3SN B Emitter 1 fol Allowable installation distance D Distance between emitter and receiver Detection Distance Type 4 Type 2 For0 2to3m 0 26 m 0 52m L x tan5 L x tan10 Fels M GE MET L x 0 088 m L x 0 18 m Operating range Chattering may occur in the output when the distance between the emitter and the receiver is less than 0 2 m Use only in the rated operating range 4 Use a spatter protection slit cover F3SN and F3SH 5 S horten the detection distance by setting with a setting tool F 3S Before changing Receiver Emitter T X cn MR 8 B Receiver Emitter After changing Emitter Receiver 3
46. Curtain that would be interrupted by the workpiece are muted The blanking function disables specific beams of the Safety Light Curtain Fixed blanking LT The beam that would otherwise be constantly interrupted by the workbench is disabled A warning zone can be set to alert people before they enter a danger zone Dividing the zone between series connected sensors Detection zone Ld Warning zone A single sensor can also be divided Position detection muting This is used in applications where the workpiece is set in position each time by an operator and then a turntable or positioning robot moves the workpiece to the area where the work is done A limit switch or other means is used to detect when the robot is in a safe position and muting is then applied A a Ayayes o D o0 o a UOI 99 9S jonpoJd E Noy o g 9S ET o E S Floating blanking a 1 i ii Ls J agi i Lor a FLE HI 7 4th 3 Ka LHI d wt a il i _ In this case 2 beam floating blanking is set If three or more beams are V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 interrupted the output goes OFF SSL IV NS 4 Detection zone szeg SJ 3 C2 o o Warning zone F omnon oo o o L o c o D UOI 99 9S jonpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008vt SIN 6 J9A f S J SOL 6E4 LOL dS 4
47. Gray Communication line gt 5 8 9 didd E m 2 Pink Communication line ooo 5 o e Tee 2 S9 c T PU 8 eI 9 2 5 ilg 9 E E oo 5 5 o z I 3 8 gt AE 6j fg x o S o o o 3 O O E S1 External test switch connect to O V if the switch is not S HA necessary E P S3 Lockout reset switch connect to 24 V if the switch is not necessary K4 Load or PLC etc for monitoring A 1 Use a switch for micro loads Input D specifications 24 V 1 8 mA K1 K2 Relay or other device that controls hazardous o parts of the machine 2 F3SJ operates even when K4 is not connected K3 Load or PLC etc for monitoring The F3SJ operates even when K3 is not connected When K3 is not necessary connect auxiliary output 1 only to the external device monitoring input omnon F3SJ Ver 2 For NPN output See page 304 for PNP output wiring Wiring when using manual reset mode external device monitoring S1 External test switch connect to 24 V if the switch is not necessary S2 Interlock lockout reset switch K1 K2 Relay or other device that controls hazardous parts of the machine K3 K4 Load or PLC etc for monitoring Receiver 1 Use a switch for micro loads Input specifications 5 V 1 mA 2 F3SJ operates even when K3 and K4 are not connected v Pink T TE D Communication o D T line o o a o lt gt D st N Auxiliary output 2 Re
48. O S 218 D Sie sl sle els e sv ol aie 8 8 258 i 39 2232 E8222 l ps Bat S t S ml a m el l b5 2e i lO Sis J SE Si Sja al a gt l 1 pet 2 S 3 s 51 gt gt 3 2 EO switch T 2 o 2 8 os 3 33 B B z 3 Alzo 38 2 5 l l c 28 sg 2 s 9 x0 e 6 o 2 9 gt peo Ss x 2 8 6 Qv ee l e o plus d og oc S2 i 7 SS e h OS 3 24V o 29 E1 o oS A1 AT11HT12HT21HT22H Y1 Y3 8 6 1 3 4 5 7 So o2 eo lt Control circuits 24 VDC vm 24 VDC E1 F3SX EL2 0 24 VDC I 1 Co e i OV m as eso Gs C909 oO Qo C KM1 KM2 ake e El N 24 V e e e d dL e e co i D 3 D t o o 2 E 4 TIa 85 c 9 8 Q asig 7S3 Sleslg a gt e o amp a 08 5 32 3 gl c S als 2 Zesz 2 5 o glEl5 gt 7 se9 25 d o OQ Yl oe 4 3sgl8523 OC 9 sx aiiEzB g g Tl E1 T 3 E 5 5 5 a Z RS 485 B 4 pink n A EN X KM1 RS 485 A 81 Emergency stop switch A165E A22E gray S2 Reset switch 7 J X ie KM1 KM2 Relay with forcibly guided contacts ang a NV aan M Three phase motor On So ET 24 VDC power supply S82K IZZ I i dg t 1 dio n Note 1 The above circuit diagram conforms to Category 4 2 In this connection example the auxiliary output is set to the d c gt i3 standard setting Dark ON operation Qo 7 FSSNADISS i To operate using non standard settings refer to the catalog or
49. Position the Muting Sensors so that a distinction can be made between the entry of an objector a human If the muting function were to operate when a human passed through it may cause serious injury Install a Muting Lamp where it can be seen from all work locations so that workers can check the status of the muting and override functions Muting times must be precisely set according to the application by qualified personnel who have received appropriate training In particular ifthe muting time limitis to be setto infinity the person who makes the setting must bear responsibility Use two independent input devices for the muting inputs Install the F3SJ Muting Sensors or a protective wall so that workers cannotenter hazardous areas while muting is in effect and set muting times Install override switches where they can be seen from the hazardous area and where they cannot be operated from within the hazardous area Before starting an override check to make sure that nobody is within the hazardous area omnon Precautions for Safe Use Installation Conditions e Connector tightening torque 0 39 to 0 49 N m e Panel mounting tightening torque 0 6 to 0 8 N m use metric 4 screws Handling e Make sure that the power is turned OFF before connecting or disconnecting the connector e Make sure that fasteners are tightened properly by hand 0 39 to 0 49 N m The use of pliers may cause damage If the
50. Red 5 Auxiliary output 1 Safety output 1 Black Safety output 2 White B 4 Test input S2 2 Reset input KM2 omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 uonoojes onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008t SIN 6 49A l S J SOL 6E4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 SS J F39 TC5 NPN Model with Muting Sensor Output Mode F39 TC5NO1 Note The Key Cap for Muting and the Muting Lamp can Setting Console be connected to either the F39 MC21 Emitter or the Receiver SAP E E eS eS lt lt e 2 S S 2 S S 3 S 8 Muting Lamp H or ajal 8 Z ede 3 Na Key Cap for Muting PC Tool for alas 3 3 2 F39 CN6 orange F3SJ Z a amp 3 3 F39 GWUM plal 7 5 gt gt oo ol 9 sx z o D Sa F SIKMI 8i amp o F3SJ E Ni e o o N PC e Emitter Receiver Ly Muting Sensor NPN UOI 99 9S onpoJd 24 VDC OV Qd o9 4 ES o S Bo z D S Short circuit connector c Model with Override Mode F39 TC5NO2 lt x Note The Key Cap for Muting and the Muting Lamp Setting Console can be connected to Tn F39 MC21 e either the Emitter or the KMI zi Receiver gt of s sla v e cal S 8 S KM2 Muting Lamp H or asi z S mz T Ke
51. S2 i Control output KM1 KM2 N O contact a rt gm KMiKM2N C cotat 1 od Pciputs 1 1 PLC output Auxiliary output 1 Yellow Receiver F39 JCLIA D OUT S1 S2 KM1 KM2 KM3 KM4 M E1 PLC The output operation mode for auxiliary output 1 Is control output data inverse of control output signals enabled default setting omnon Manual reset mode Using external device monitoring function KM1 External test switch connect to O V if the switch is not necessary Interlock lockout reset switch Safety relay with forcibly guided contacts G7SA or magnetic contactor Load PLC for monitor Solid state contactor G3J 3 phase motor 24 VDC power supply S82K Programmable controller Used for monitoring not related to safety system F3SJ Ver 2 Wiring for connection with a controller F3SP B1P category 4 PNP models only e Reduced wiring due to connector connection e Safety relay included Emitter Bela manua reset moge _ gt Using external device monitoring 1 L3 function Ayayes o D o o o INT IN2 F39 JCLIB L F39 JC UOI 99 9S onpoJd OSD RE 0 PQ o 2 41 OOS 20 02 Interlock zo selection TeSt Reset Auxiliary output 1 o I Co e e External device monitoring 5 gt o L 24 VDC E1 OV Used for moni
52. SZ 3 SJ 3 a C2 o o F3SS Dimensions F3SS AT60P Receiver Blowup Interlock indicator OFF output indicator yellow red Emitter Blowup P3 Operation Fault indicator indicator red orange ON output indicator X Intensity indicator green orange Unit mm IILB8 w Open the back cover to access the mode switch Applicable cable dia 4 to 7 T nut grooves 2 wmm T aine d O N CD Accessories Order Separately Laser Alignment Kit for Beam Alignment F39 LLK The Laser Alignment Kit is used to align beams for long detection distances or when using Mirrors in the installation A Level with a Visible Laser Beam is mounted on top of the E mitter and an Alignment P late is mounted on the Receiver First the built in levels are used to level the E mitter and Receiver and then the visible laser is turned ON The heights and angles of the E mitter and R eceiver are then adjusted so thatthe visible laser beam strikes the cross marks on the alignment plate Power supply Three AA batteries included in the Kit Not Using Mirrors or Using Mirror To Bend Beam Horizontally Level with visible laser Alignment plate Ne Laser switch Mounting adapter included Using Two Mirrors to Bend Beam at a Right Angle Level with visible laser Mirror
53. The F3SN B received the following certification from BG PRUFZERT of Germany e BG test and certification mark License Type 2 ESPE EN61496 1 Type 2 AOPD prEN61496 2 The F3SN B is designed according to the following standards To make sure that the F 3S5 N B complies with the following standards and regulations you are asked to design and use itas provided by any other related standards laws and regulations Consult UL or other standardization bodies if you have any questions e EN415 4 European standard e OSHA 29 CFR 1910 212 US Industrial Safety and Health R egulation e ANSI RIA 15 06 US standard e Guideline Concerning Failsafe Methods for Control Mechanisms in Machine Tools 28 September 1998 The Announcement No 464 Ministry of Health Labour and Welfare omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 uonoogjos onpo4d sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaJd 008t SIN 6 49A l S J SOL 6E4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 a NSe4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o o Qo Dum E 7 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpo4d SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 S3 3 SS J F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Detection Zone and Intrusion Path Refer to Precautions for All Safety Sensors
54. _ _ n or 03 04 05 sk oO oO _ c P _ o __ gt o _ m m Cable with Connector Cable with Connector nm te One End LI ERE End for Emitter for Receiver x Series connection is F39 J CCIA L F39 J CLIA D possible for the F 3SN B is C2 5 o omnon F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A An Example of Safety Circuits Where the F3SP B1P Controller is Used For category 4 rating F3SN A F3SH A category 2 rating F3SN B Emitter Receiver Applicable operation mode ool Manual reset mode S1 External test switch S2 Interlock lockout reset switch S3 Lockout reset switch If the switch is not necessary connect between X1 and H1 KM 1 KM2 Magnetic contactor KM3 Solid state contactor G3 M 3 phase motor A El 24 VDC power supply S82K S5 PLC Programmable controller lt Used for monitoring This is nota part of a safety 7 system Wiring for the Auto reset mode Sm aye sv etc a av eA Interlock Test selection output pp oo Qe o9 3 D 0 External device selection ols monitoring a DO S g MD Lelie ee a a AR GNOME o Sz 424 VDC Note 1 If the EDM is not necessary short circuit T31 ga E1 and T32 A 2 For the number and arrangement of all terminals on the F3SP B1P see the o instruction manual packaged together with the F3SP B1P C3 c lt 2 N oO P O Ol TI amp o bs Q V H
55. _ D 2 o O Oo or V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 Gray Communication line y Z Pink Communication line gt m o c sol zZ JN o z di 2 3 5 9 olge e mos Iia l2 K1 K2 Relay or other device that controls mm 9 gt D C2 gt z350 So hazardous parts of the machine Na og S a c t K3 Load PLC etc for monitoring O 155 O Oo 9 ojO lo ge The F3SJ operates even when K3 is not E x connected When K3 is not necessary connect auxiliary output D Q 1 only to the external device monitoring input omron RU nw oo D 72 o lt o 7 uonoogjes onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 SUOIINEIAId 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 4n oO o o F3SJ Ver 2 I O Circuit Diagrams PNP Output Type The numbers in white circles indicate the connector s pin numbers The black circles indicate connectors for series connection The words in brackets indicate the signal name for muting system External indicator output 2 External indicator output 1 Brown Brown amp Emitter Main Circuit Muting input 1 1 Yellow Reset input External device monitoring input Receiver Main Circuit 2 White Control output 2 A Green Control output 1 Receiver Main Circuit 1 Auxiliary o
56. diagram below This position is a reference line for measuring safety distance Use the line closerto the hazardous area as a reference line for the safety distance Safety distance Beam center line mark omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 uonoo es onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 a NSe4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o nw a D 72 oz o UOI 99 9S jonpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SS V NS 4 SZ 3 S3 3 SS J Short range Safety Light Curtain Type 4 F3SN A_ SS Greater resistance to external light interference Significantly less interference with other sensors e Interference reduced both between Sensors of the same type and Sensors of different types Setting Console Optimizes Light Sensitivity for S pecific Ranges deal Where Installation Space Is Limited Conforms to International Safety Standards Korean standard S mark models are also available A Be sure to read the Safety Precautions on page 431 and the Precautions for All Safety Sensors on page 242 Features New Emitter Mechanism Eliminates Excessive Light Removing excessive light is the
57. including ANSI RIA 15 06 1999 OSHA 1910 217 h and ANSI B11 2 1995 R2005 When using the Start Restart Interlock Mode install the interlock reset switch in a location that provides a clear view of the entire hazardous area and where it cannot be activated from within the hazardous area Do not use the MS MSF4800 in environments where flammable or explosive gases are present Doing so may result in explosion The MS MSF4800 cannot protect a person from an object flying from a hazardous area Install protective cover s or fence s Make sure that the MS MSF4800 is securely mounted and its cables and connectors are properly connected Be sure to test the operation of the MS MSF4800 after installation with the machine in a non operating condition to verify that the MS MSF4800 operates as intended Unintended function settings may cause a person to go undetected resulting in serious injury omnon Additional Protection Itis necessary to use an appropriate means such as a fixed barrier guard interlock guard or safety mat to protect areas that provide access to any hazardous areas of a machine that are not protected by the MS MSF4800 See the examples in the following diagram Correct Safety Light Curtain Installation Examples Auxiliary protection Example of auxiliary protection Mechanical protection Auxiliary protection Three directional MSFA800 Protection Adding Mechanical Prot
58. lt 2 N iN oO us O Ol TI amp 5 U L V HS 4 a NSe4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o omron BET nw a D 72 oz o UOI 99 9S onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud LOL dS 4 SO1L 6 4 c 49A PSEA 008vt SIN V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 szed sd d SS J 388 F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A F3SN B __ Different from specifications of F3SN A Model x6 Item Sensor type F3SN B F3SN B IP70 F3SN B IP40 I IP25 Type 2 Safety Light Curtain Setting tool connection Safety category Detection capability Beam gap P Number of beams n Not connectable Category 2 1 or B Opaque objects Opaque objects 25 mm in diameter 40 mm in diameter 30 mm 13 to 119 noncontinuous 7 to 60 noncontinuous Opaque objects 70 mm in diameter 60 mm 5 to 30 Protective height PH Lens diameter 217 to 1807 mm 217 to 1807 mm PH n 1 XP 37 mm PH n 1 XP 37 mm Diameter 9 mm 277 to 1777 mm PH n 1 XP 37 mm Operating range Response time under stable light incident condition 0 2 to 10 0 m ON to OFF 10 to 15 ms max OFF to ON 40 to 60 ms max Startup waiting time Power supply voltage Vs Current consumption Light source emitted wavelength ls max 24 VDC 10 ripple p
59. mode selection input 2 to 24 VDC 3 Make sure to connect to the OV terminal when the E3FS is not connected to an F3SX and the test input is not used Note The ESFS 10BA4L IL IL functions as a standalone Sensor when it is connected as shown in the wiring diagram above However it is certified a Type 2 Safety Sensor when it is properly connected to the B1 Module of the F3SX This also means it must be properly connected to an F3SX to use it as part of a safety system omnon Timing Charts Output Modes and Timing Chart Light interrupted Operation Green MEN indicator Red ouput MEN output OFF Emitter Timing Chart Hp Fr NR OFF Emission ON ir C OFF Operation ON indicator OFF orange E3ZS E3FS Excess Gain Ratio Mutual Interference Range ineering Data Parallel Operating Range Eng E3ZS Precautions F3SN A Safety Product E3FS for All Safety MS4800 F3SJ Ver 2 F39 TC5 F3SP TO1 F3SN B F3SN AL SS Sensors Selection cansors F3SH A E3ZS F3SS N mE 10 Distance m Distance m c e C E O e e Excess Gain Ratio seuun oes ure sseox3 ANS Aa B PE P x eg 5 S IE D a e o co Oo c tc o Q c lt im E VAL ips m 2 z c D o o o o o o o B 8 B amp B 8 gt 3 3 0 8 3 8 8 8 e 7 7 ei co t e e Y s
60. o a Receiver 2 Amount of light incident from Emitter 1 a m threshold value can vary the threshold value Normally a fixed When the threshold value jumps from 18 to 80 for example you won t be caught off guard light incident from Emitter 1 UOI 99 9S onpoJd The threshold at which the light curtain turned ON and OFF was fixed and could not be adjusted with conventional models With the new series however the The current amount aee Gap goy threshold value can be adjusted with a Setting of incoming light can eae AE E Console This reduces the effects of external light now be displayed TEE y GOs interference and stabilizes light curtain operation a ea 29 cU lt Ideal Where Installation Space Is Limited Back mounted Connector Cable Models and Optional Right angle Cables Models with connector cables attached at the back F3SN ALISS 02 04 can be used for 2 installation where space is limited and there is no extra room at the bottom of the Light Curtains The F3SN ALIS S 04 also equipped with a connector cable at the top for series connection When there is no space at the back traditional Straight Connector Cables or an a optional L shaped Connector Cable F 39 CL IELI that extends from the side of the lens lt Surface are also available i oan color se Cable color M j Black us E i Ss 43 mm minimum i t i ta j 2 4 F3SN ALISS 0
61. set and integrated into the mechanical control system by a qualified technician who has received the appropriate training Failure to make correct settings may prevent detection of people and result in serious injury When changing parameters with a setting tool F39 GWUM or F39 MC21 the change must be made and the contents of the change must be managed by the person in charge of the system Unintentional or mistaken parameter changes may prevent detection of people and result in serious injury For machines Do not use this sensor for machines that cannot possibly be stopped by electrical control For example do not use it for a pressing machine that uses full rotation clutch Otherwise the machine may not stop before a person reaches the hazardous part resulting in serious injury Do not use the auxiliary output or external indicator output for safety applications Failure of the F3SJ may cause a person to go undetected resulting in serious injury For mounting Make sure to test the operation of the F3SJ after installation to verify that the F3SJ operates as intended Do not operate the machine until the test has been completed and F3SJ operation has been verified Unintended function settings may cause a person to go undetected resulting in serious injury Make sure to secure the safety distance between the F3SJ and the hazardous parts Otherwise the machine may not stop before a person reaches the hazardou
62. specifications 5 V 1 mA K1 K2 Relay or other device that controls hazardous mm 2 F3SJ operates even when K4 is not connected parts of the machine Na K3 Load or PLC etc for monitoring The F3SJ operates even when K3 is not connected When K is not necessary connect auxiliary output 1 A only to the external device monitoring input 7 omnon F3SJ Ver 2 Basic Connection for Muting System For PNP output See page 307 for NPN output wiring Wiring when using muting and external device monitoring functions 4 Receiver nn Gray 5 Communication line o c T o Pink s 2 9 2 Communica eic o Z tion line Glos s 3 sI e Qo Uu 2 26 a sg 2 92 og x E Nas 26 D 9 cg 32 e 2 EE S2 se Og UV a x1 o 9 oE 24 VDC 29 Power o OV supply S1 External test switch connect to 0 V if the switch is not necessary 7 l oe q S2 Lockout reset switch connect to 24 V if the switch is not necessary e A1 Contact by muting sensor A1 B B1 Contact by muting sensor B1 K1 K2 Relay or other device that controls hazardous parts of the machine 3 K3 Load or PLC etc for monitoring M1 Muting lamp 2 1 Use a switch for small loads input specifications 24 V 1 8 mA ii 2 When using the interlock function this also functions as an interlock reset switch Must be set with a setting tool 3 The F3SJ will operate even if K3 is not connected e x4 Connect the muting
63. t T N TI 2 2 9 a 2 7 D D E o 2 i e zi 5 5 2 Z s Jal amp EE AE E SSE amp lle Sls nmn L g z g e 2 2 DOO SIE else si amp zlsle oe als S I8elS 9 SIS S 5 slele Por eB s3zs 9s 3ss3ES P0 SE EIE Sle 8 Elsie z r iojojcjolj wmijoljorjsjolojolj o M ue ur ues ve zT JJ Le LE bes I 4 S2 co is 01 bs D4 Connecting Computer Tool S Cable for F3SJ E39 Z12 1 F39 GWUM g 9002092609 hay L3 Connecting Four Muting Sensors T MIN S1 External test switch m X E PA On S2 Interlock lockout reset switch 2 2 2 2 KM1 KM2 Magnet contactor D D D D es M 3 phase motor E E E i F1 F2 Fuse o o Note 1 To use the muting function a Keycap for Muting F39 CN6 must be mounted to the F3SJ 2 To use the manual reset mode while using the muting function the F3SJ setting must be changed using the S upport Software 3 It is recommended that you use the E39 Z12 1 as the modular cable to Note If you are connecting four muting connect the Support Software sensors connectthe sensor outputs to MA1 MA2 MB1 and MB2 Also short circuit MAO to L1 and MBO to L8 5 5 fol amp 5 3 o o oj oj c c 5 5 SY omron F3SP TO1 The following example is for when no muting sensors are connected in the manual reset mode and the external device monitoring function is enabled x put 1 White e El put 2 Red
64. ww A eBuei eouaJoepetur enin N Ex ww A eDuei eoueJepelul renin E a e x 5 S e D a Oo e e e e eo Parallel Operating Range ESFS 50 100 150 200 ww A uonisod 6unejedo o D gt o fe o uonoogles onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes Iv 10 SUOIINEIAId 008srSIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 Sides i C2 o o E3ZS ESFS Dimensions Sensors Unit mm Pre wired Cable with ABS Resin Case E3ZS T81A 1 a 10 4 3 54 Operation indicator Receiver only Emitting indicator Emitter only Stability indicator Receiver only 6 7 dia Beam Vinyl insulated round cord with four Receiver conductors and three Emitter conductors 4 dia cross sections of conductors 0 2 mm insulation system 1 1 mm dia Standard length 2 m Pre wired Cable with ABS Resin Case E3FS 10B4 2M td 9 dia Vinyl insulated round cord with four Receiver conductors and three Emitter conductors 4 dia cross sections of conductors 0 2 mm insulation system 1 1 mm dia Connector with Metal Case E3FS 10B4 M1 M a i Lens surface a ews y 5 9 dia i m 16 4 dia i Operation indicator Safety Controller F3SX For details refer to FSSX on page
65. 1 5 mm 2 h each in the X Y and Z directions Shock TON 100 m s2 1000 times in the X Y and Z directions Fosse Malfunction 500 m s 3 times each in the X Y and Z directions Material Case Polybutylene terephthalate Case ABS Case Brass Weight packed state Accessories Sensor only Approx 120 g for one set including 2 m cable Operation manual 4 IEC 60947 5 3 PDF D EN954 1 Category 1 Approx 150 g for one set Approx 125 g for one set including 2 m cable including only Sensor Operation manual k4 nuts for mounting Emitter Receiver 2 each Applicable Sensor standards connected to F3SX IEC EN 61496 1 Type 2 ESPE amp 5 IEC prEN 61496 2 Type 2 AOPD 6 EN 954 1 Category 2 IEC EN 61496 1 Type2 ESPE 5 IEC prEN 61496 2 Type2 AOPD k6 Switching element category from IEC60947 5 3 DC13 control of electromagnetic load Controller F3SX Series 1 This may vary according to the F3SX model connected to the Sensor For details refer to the F3SX operation manual 2 Connect the Sensor to an F3SX to use it as a safety device or as part of a safety system 3 Depending on the wiring this may turn ON when light is interrupted For your safety be sure to connect the pink receiver wire mode selection input to 24 VDC to turn ON when light is incident 4 F3SX operation manual is not included 5 Electro Sensitive Protective Equipment 6 Active Opto electronic Protecti
66. 100 m s D 30 VDC 3A resistive load Ambient operating 15 55 C Rated current 3A temperature Applicable Relays G7SA 3A1B 24 VDC Ambient operating 9 mm Pp 4 humidity A0 SaN N TI oo Weight Approx 215 g Durability TI P Electrical xu eid aL min Um Ike Switching frequency 1 800 operations h Mechanical 5 000 000 operations min durability Switching frequency 7 200 operations h omnon F3SP TO1 Connections it Diagrams I Cul Internal C Modular Connector Safety Sensors I O terminals O ON 9 9 69 99 69 693 193 19 6569 69 6 8 amp 9 OOO OOOO OO OO GO 9 69 C CO C2 r I 9 69 9 69 9 9 9 9 2 9 9 69 9 9 9 9 9 Product Selection Precautions for All Safety Sensors MS4800 F3SJ Ver 2 Relay contact output terminal iagrams D iring W F3SN A F39 TC5 F3SP T01 F3SN B F3SN AUSS E352 F3SH A PJSIYS 9 peu Indu Buuotuoui eoiep euJaX3 gq enig A 0 2d uld eui suoneoiunuJulo2 9q e1C eui suomeoiunululo EENEN A wo 8A 1ndino ueiiixny 7q ue8J5 1ndino joNUOD eq uwoJg A ve za SYM z 1ndino j ou02 LA pJeius 9 peu z indui Gun 87 enig A 0 71 T Jens be 4Utg eui suoneoiunujulo2 97 AeJ eui suoneoiunuuul02 G7 MOl 9A Indu 1eseg v7 u898J5 1ndui 1s8 1 uwoJg A ve 21 e3tuM Indu Bunny 13 F3SS c e C E O F3SP TO1
67. 1360 68 1360 MSF4800B 30 1360 68 1360 n MSF4800A 30 1400 1400 MSF4800B 30 1400 70 1400 a MSF4800A 30 1440 1440 MSF4800B 30 1440 72 1440 lt MSF4800A 30 1480 74 1480 MSF4800B 30 1480 74 1480 T MSF4800A 30 1520 76 1520 MSF4800B 30 1520 76 1520 ii MSF4800A 30 1560 78 1560 MSF4800B 30 1560 78 1560 MSF4800A 30 1600 80 1600 MSF4800B 30 1600 80 1600 a MSF4800A 30 1640 1640 MSF4800B 30 1640 82 1640 H MSF4800A 30 1680 84 1680 MSF4800B 30 1680 84 1680 a MSF4800A 30 1720 86 1720 MSF4800B 30 1720 86 1720 MSF4800A 30 1760 88 1760 MSF4800B 30 1760 88 1760 MSF4800A 30 1800 90 1800 MSF4800B 30 1800 90 1800 o MSF4800A 30 1840 92 1840 MSF4800B 30 1840 92 1840 bi MSF4800A 30 1880 94 1880 MSF4800B 30 1880 94 1880 MSF4800A 30 1920 96 1920 MSF4800B 30 1920 96 1920 MSF4800A 30 1960 98 1960 MSF4800B 30 1960 98 1960 MSF4800A 30 2000 100 2000 MSF4800B 30 2000 100 2000 PP MSF4800A 30 2040 102 2040 MSF4800B 30 2040 102 2040 IZZ MSF4800A 30 2080 104 2080 MSF4800B 30 2080 104 2080 diui MSF4800A 30 2120 2120 MSF4800B 30 2120 106 2120 T Q3 Advanced series Curtains Connected in Series Basic series Curtains Connected in Series 2 Minimum detectable object 40 mm dia Beam gap 30 mm Minimum detectable object 40 mm dia Beam gap 30 mm P Masters Masters T Model Protective height mm Model Number of beams Protective height mm MSF4800A 40 0360 360 MSF4800B 40 0360 12 360 mm MSF4800A 40 0480 480 MSF4800B 40 0480 16 480 N m MSF4800A 40 0600 20 6
68. 3 SS J F3SJ Ver 2 Standard Muting Mode The F3SJ is set to this operation mode when it is shipped from the factory The muting function is enabled by providing a time lag between muting inputs 1 and 2 Use a separately purchased setting tool to change parameters related to muting time or to select other muting operation modes Start Conditions If both of the following 2 conditions are present muting is activated 1 No interrupting object is found in the F3SJ s detection zone and control output is ON 2 After muting input 1 is turned ON connected to 9 to 24 V for PNP types or to O to 1 5 V for NPN types muting input 2 is turned ON connected to 9 to 24 V for PNP types or to 0 to 1 5 V for NPN types within the muting input time limit T1 min to T1 max 0 03 to 3 S Once ils conditions in item 2 above are met the muting function will be enabled in 0 15 s max When condition 1 is satisfied but time condition of 2 is not a muting sequence error occurs and receiver s muting error indicator turns ON However the F3SJ safety functions will continue operating and the F3SJ will operate normally even during a muting error A muting error is released when either of the following occurs e When muting is started using a proper procedure e When power is turned on while muting inputs 1 and 2 are OFF End Conditions If either of the following conditions are satisfied the muting state is released 1 Muting input 1 o
69. 3 This function can be set so that the top and bottom beams cannot be set for the function Diagnostic Functions Self test After power ON the F3SN A F 3SN B F3SH A performs a complete self test within 1 second In addition it performs a self test within response time periodically during operation External Test This function stops the emission of light from the light curtain using an external signal and checks that the light curtain operates properly Lockout Condition If an error is detected by the self test the light curtain enters the lockout condition keeps the OSSD outputs in their OFF state and displays the error mode Lockout condition can be cleared either by resetting the power or by changing the setting of the reset switch from closed to open open to closed for auto reset With some errors the lockout condition is automatically reset when the light curtain confirms that the cause of the error has been removed omnon EDM External Device Monitoring This function monitors the state of the NC contacts Connect the NC contact of the MPCEs to the EDM input line of the receiver If the correct logical relationship between the OSSD outputs and the EDM input is not kept the light curtain immediately enters the lockout condition and the OSSD outputs will go to their OFF state The light curtain s normal operation is up to 300 ms max amp this allows for the delay time caused by the release of the MPCEs To
70. 3 b 8 g Connecting Four Muting Sensors Y E j N e lt aAa a AE allalla 3 E S ps z 7a 216 FE Oo Oo D D NNW E als S 2 s ela 2 8 2 Sls TTT p l 3 3sa s sz gt U 3 5 3 2 E1851 S15 gt 2 slelsl sls a e 9 ex C o E 2 O amp 9000926G L3 T m ITI 9 C2 S1 External test switch Nan KM1 KM2 Magnet contactor Note If you are connecting four muting M 3 phase motor sensors connect the sensor outputs to ES EEG MA1 MA2 MB1 and MB2 Also short circuit MAO to L1 and MBO to L8 M yt Note 1 To use the muting function a Muting Keycap F39 CN6 must be mounted to the F3SJ 2 If a lockout reset is required connecta switch between RST and V SYM omron F3SP TO1 The following example is for when no muting sensors are connected in the auto reset mode and the external device monitoring function is enabled L a D 3 2 D E 09 w oc l pen zl AE T sie E O Si S 2 5 sls elo i al 2 gt j S PR s z c ol lol CIs 2j P z siLis z 8 3 s a 18 oo 9 9 9 9 5 Sis SIS Pe sis Oo o 3 S 2 S 1 S Co 3 2 2 ES 5 2 a 3 5 5 6 4 6 2 5 a gt 5 a 2 8 2 gt 3 5 1 5 gt 5 Sle S of SI 3 S gt S SPE O lt NL Z o Z F ON SILLS nul Ol oo GB O nN Ss Tc KK E 0060990000
71. 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 SS J Precautions for All Safety Sensors Refer to the Safety Precautions section for each Sensor for specific precautions applicable to each Sensor Installation Conditions Detection Zone and Intrusion Path Install a protective structure so that the hazardous part of a machine can only be reached by passing through the sensor s detection zone Install the sensors so that part of the person is always present in the detection zone when working in a machine s hazardous areas If a person is able to step into the hazardous area of a machine and remain behind the Safety Light Curtain s detection zone configure the system with an interlock function that prevents the machine from being restarted Otherwise it may result in heavy injury AN Correct Installation Correct Installation A person enters the detection zone during operation A person can only reach the hazardous part of the machinery by passing through the sensor s detection zone Incorrect Installation Incorrect Installation A person can reach the hazardous part of the machinery without passing through the sensor s detection zone A person is between the sensor s detection zone and the hazardous part of the machinery Install the interlock reset switch in a location that provides a clear view of the
72. 4 OMRON offers many Safety Application Controllers to help you build safety circuits Refer to page 568 for available models Refer to page 574 for specifications SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 4n oO o o omnon F3SJ Ver 2 Dedicated External Indicator Set Can be connected to either an emitter or a receiver Appearance Color Model Remarks r4 g Indicator red mounting bracket 1 set and dedicated gm 4 ARG PO Renee connection cable 0 1 m a A A S EE EEE f m is Geen F39 A01PG PAC Indicator green mounting bracket 1 set and dedicated connection cable 0 1 m JL Indicator yellow mounting bracket 1 set and dedicated VEION POSAR re connection cable 0 1 m Note For indication timing operation mode see Specifications on page 296 nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 General External Indicator Cable Appearance Cable length Specifications Model Cable to connect top of the main unit and an off the shelf external indicator 2 wire F39 JJ3N uonoojes onpo4d p Spatter Protection Cover Includes two pieces for emitter and receiver Os n 3 Each unit reduces the operating range by 10 o ES oz Appearance Applicable sensor Model oo lt 7 F3SJ A series F39 HJULULI s amp B S The same 4 digit numbers as the protective heights LILILIL in the light curtain type n
73. 5 pin 1 0 V Blue OQ Q 2 24 VDC Brown 3 Test input MTS White 4 Test input MTS return Black 5 Ground Green Individual Beam Indicators IBI Receiver LED Indicators O OFF Flashing B ON Description Two Receiver control outputs Safety outputs are ON and the green Machine Run indicator is ON Two Receiver control outputs safety outputs are OFF and the red Machine Stop indicator is ON Two Receiver control outputs safety outputs are OFF and the red Machine Stop indicator and the yellow Interlock indicator are ON Two Receiver control outputs safety outputs are OFF the red Machine Stop indicator is ON the yellow Interlock indicator is flash ing and the auxiliary output is OFF All MS 4800 Safety Light Curtains have an Individual Beam Indicator Operating Condition IBI next to each infrared beam on the Receiver The IBI indicates condition indication whether the beam is interrupted or clear When the beam is interrupted the IBI goes ON when it is clear the IBI goes OFF If Machine Run there is less than 10 clear beams every other IBI will light to indicate State O Oo that the MS MSF4800 is not synchronized Green Example of IBI Indication for an Error Error Code 34 achine Stop Front View of the Receiver State O O E d CF Red CF All IBIs starting with the ninth one os from the end cap are OFF a Interlock State 5 cy Yellow Red CP
74. 652 omnon Accessories Order Separately E3ZS E3FS Branch Connector F39 CN3 Wiring Diagram Dummy Plug F39 CN4 Sensor Mounting Bracket for E3FS Y92E B18 32 0 2 CHO ez 7 Material Plastic 18 dia Hexagonal bolt M5 x 32 The molded part B of the Connector is black Sensor Mounting Bracket for E3ZS E39 L104 Material Stainless steel SUS304 R1 oo Dm D 7 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 SUOIINEIAId 008t SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 SS J E3ZS E3FS Cables with Connectors on Both Ends for Branch Connection F39 JF1S F39 JF2S F39 JF5S m L T 30 10 p 26 F39 JF10S Model L mm F39 JF1S 1 000 Vinyl insulated round cord 6 dia gray EOP F39 JF2S 2 000 150 Dimensions will vary with the model as shown in the table on the left 4 conductors cross sections of conductors 0 5 mm2 0 E insulation system 1 70 mm dia a S 74 il F39 JF5S 5 000 0 Standard length L k 15 Oo 300 T F39 JF10S 10 000 5 Cables with Connectors Socket and Plug on Both Ends XS2W D421 C81 A L 1m XS2W D421 D81 A L 2m XS2W D421 G81 A L 5m uonoogjes
75. A0873P 14 01 873 97 F3SN A0243P 14 01 243 27 F3SN A0567P 14 01 567 63 F3SN A0891P 14 01 891 99 F3SN A0261P 14 01 261 29 F3SN A0585P 14 01 585 65 F3SN A0909P 14 01 909 101 og F3SN A0279P14 01 279 31 F3SN A0603P 14 01 603 67 F3SN A0927P 14 01 927 103 og F3SN A0297P 14 01 297 33 F3SN A0621P 14 01 621 69 F3SN A0945P 14 01 945 105 T F3SN A0315P14 01 315 35 F3SN A0639P 14 01 639 71 F3SN A0963P 14 01 963 107 F3SN A0333P 14 01 333 37 F3SN A0657P 14 01 657 73 F3SN A0981P 14 01 981 109 F3SN A0351P 14 01 351 39 F3SN A0675P 14 01 675 75 F3SN A0999P 14 01 999 111 F3SN A0369P 14 01 369 41 F3SN A0693P 14 01 693 77 F3SN A1017P14 01 1017 113 om F3SN A0387P 14 01 387 43 F3SN A0711P14 01 711 79 F3SN A1035P14 01 1035 115 ae F3SN A0405P 14 01 405 45 F3SN A0729P 14 01 729 81 F3SN A1053P 14 01 d lan g2 F 3SN A0423P 14 01 423 47 F3SN A0747P 14 01 747 83 F3SN A1071P 14 01 eee TEE F3SN A0441P14 01 441 49 F3SN A0765P 14 01 765 85 F3SN A1089P 14 01 1089 121 NE F3SN A0459P14 01 459 51 F3SN A0783P 14 01 783 87 F3SN A1107P14 01 PANES B F3SN A0477P 14 01 477 53 F3SN A0801P 14 01 801 89 F3SN A1125P14 01 1125 125 oo F3SN A0495P 14 01 495 55 F3SN A0819P 14 01 819 91 F3SN ACILILILIP25 01 F3SN BCILIDILIP25 01 Z ee aM NE LLL 8 Mode Protective umber Model Protective Number Mode Protective Mumbo F3SN
76. C2 o o nw Dn D 72 oz o UOI 99 9S onpo4d SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SE pE SS J E3ZS E3FS Cables with Connectors Socket and Plug on Both Ends Type Standard cable Robot cable vibration resistant Note Extend the cable under the following conditions DC Cable connection direction C e length L m Model Straight straight Right angle right angle UL standard XS2W D421 C81 A XS2W D421 D81 A XS2W D421 G81 A XS2W D421 J81 A XS2W D422 D81 A XS2W D422 G81 A Straight right angle Right angle straight Straight straight XS2W D423 D81 A XS2W D423 G81 A XS2W D424 D81 A XS2W D424 G81 A XS2W D421 C81 R XS2W D421 D81 R XS2W D421 G81 R XS2W D421 J81 R AI MNI Oo PM O1 PM OT PMP gt AINI O O e Overall cable length for both an E3FS Receiver connected to an F3SX and the Emitter connected to the F3SX must be within 50 m e Overall cable length for both an E3ZS Receiver connected to an F3SX and the Emitter connected to the F3SX must be within 100 m Cables with Connector Socket on One End Type Standard cable Robot cable vibration resistant Note Extend the cable under the following conditions Cable connection direction m Straight Right angle
77. Effective aperture angle EAA Within 2 5 for the Emitter and Receiver at a detection distance of at least 3 m according to IEC61496 2 Control output OSSD Co T M C did Auxiliary output non safety output DEDE output load current 50 mA max residual voltage 2 V max exceptfor voltage drop due External indicator output One PNP transistor output load current 40 mA max residual voltage 2 V max except for voltage drop due non safety output 2 to cable extension Control output Light ON Output operation mode Auxiliary output Dark ON can be changed by the F39 MC11 External indicator output Light ON can be changed by the F39 MC11 2 Input voltage Test input interlock selection input reset input and external relay monitor input voltages ON voltage 9 to 24 V sink current 3 mA max OFF voltage 0 to 1 5 V or open Emitter Power indicator green interlock indicator yellow lockout indicator red test indicator orange error mode Indicators 3 indicator 3 red light intensity level indicator green 5 levels Recevar OFF state indicator red ON state indicator green lockout indicator red blanking indicator green error mode indicator 3 red light intensity level indicator green 5 levels Mutual interference prevention function Series connections Time shared beam projection system by series connection Sensitivity Automatic sensitivity adjustment capability supported by the F39 MC11 e Number of serie
78. F3SJ A2120N30 85 2120 F3SJ A2245P30 90 2245 F3SJ A2370P30 F3SJ A2370N30 95 2370 F3SJ A2495P30 100 2495 Protective Height mm Total sensor length omnon F3SJ A2370P55 F3SJ A2420P55 F3SJ A2470P55 F3SJ A2370N55 F3SJ A2420N55 F3SJ A2470N55 48 49 50 Protective Height mm Total sensor length 2370 2420 2470 F3SJ Ver 2 Accessories Optional Single end Connector Cable 2 cables per set for emitter and receiver For wiring with safety circuit such as single safety relay safety relay unit and safety controller Appearance Cable length Specifications Model F39 JCR5A 3m F39 JC3A 7m F39 JC7A M12 connector 8 pin 10m F39 JC10A 15m F39 JC15A M F39 JC20A lt o D gt o o o Double end Connector Cable 2 cables per set for emitter and receiver For connection with F3SP B1P control unit and for extension when series connected Appearance Cable length Specifications Model 0 5m F39 JCR5B ou 1m F39 JC1B 28 F39 JC3B D 5m F39 JC5B ps 7m F39 JC7B 338 A M12 connector 8 pin o ES LI 10m F39 JC10B T oz 15m F39 JC15B S o F39 JC20B F39 JC30B I Se To extend the cable length under series connection use F39 JJR3W and F39 JCLIB in combination Also the cable length 20 to 40 m cannot be used E oO o Power Cable Included with the main unit 2 cab
79. F3SJ A2405N20 160 2405 po e ru ee m F3SJ A2495P20 F3SJ A2495N20 166 2495 po F3SJ A2300P25 1 The suffix TS is attached to the model number of models with fixed auto reset Only for PNP output 2 Protective Height mm Total sensor length F3SJ A2340P25 F3SJ A2380P25 F3SJ A2420P25 EX A2300N25 ns 2300 119 2880 F3SJ A2420N25 121 2420 F3SJ A2500P25 F3SJ A2500N25 A2500N25 2500 1 The suffix TS is EUM to the model number of models with fixed auto reset Only for PNP output 2 Protective Height mm Total sensor length omnon oo a D 72 oz o UOI 99 9S onpo4d SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 sdg SS J F3SJ Ver 2 F3SJ A30 Series 25 mm gap F3SJ A55 Series 50 mm gap Model PNP Output F3SJ A0270P55 NPN Output F3SJ A0270N55 No of Beams 6 Protective Height mm 2 0 F3SJ A0320P55 F3SJ A0370P55 F3SJ A0420P55 F3SJ A0470P55 F3SJ A0320N55 F3SJ A0370N55 F3SJ A0420N55 F3SJ A0470N55 7 8 9 10 320 370 420 470 F3SJ A0520P55 F3SJ A0520N55 11 520 F3SJ A0570P55 F3SJ A0570N55 12 570 F3SJ A0620P55 F3SJ A0670P55 F3SJ A0720P55 F3SJ A0770P55 F3SJ A0620N55 F3SJ A0670N55 F3SJ A0720N55 F3SJ A0770N55 13 14 15
80. FB 1549 R117 16 14 134 12 410 i 12 24 34 Tl E1 e 24 V KM1 KM2 2 L gt N E o External indicator oO P ol esis 3 esse amp A 223 B5 sb 2332 oO Is BP soz eL 2 yan a 2 18 52 8 amp 6 Brig Bee o aw ero S jss 3 g 9 l s 52s J 222 9 3 1 Emergency stop switch A165E A22E 7 Jf pue X KM1 amp 9 us s mie 2 s S2 Reset switch O x lec 5 2 v el HL al 5j8 KM1 KM2 Relay with forcibly guided contacts or magnetic contactor 3 LA NE X KN2 2 RS 485 B M Three phase motor pink E1 24 VDC power supply S82K prec External indicator Filament type indicator H When an external indicator is not necessary connect C9 C9 C EL 3 resistance of 1 4 W 4 7 kQ ooo IZZ gt Soe eae DUD 5 Note 1 The above circuit diagram conforms to Category 4 N 2 In this connection example the auxiliary output is set to the standard setting Dark ON operation da ci ca To operate using non standard settings refer to the catalog or zu Emitter FSSN ALISS Receiver Instruction Manual for the F3SN ALISS Timing Chart Use the optional F39 MC1 1 Setting Console to disable the EDM O yt Emergency stop ON switch S Fe G F3SN ALISS ON mm mm control outputs OFF X e 1 and 2 i i F3SX N L2R ON ro pu Sa oo R output OFF i l l l ON e External indicator xte Indi OFF ON I KM1 KM2 3 OFF l i l l 0 00 wo mee o p epu Stop F3SN Emergency light F3
81. For details see Response Time on page 301 Startup waiting time ON to OFF OFF to ON 1 set 0245 to 1 205 10 ms to 15 ms max 1 set 0260 to 1 600 10 ms to 15 ms max 1 220 or higher 17 5 ms to 22 5 ms max 1 620 or higher 17 5 ms to 20 0 ms max 3 sets 240 beams 45 5 ms 3 sets 240 beams 45 5 ms 1 set 0245 to 1 205 40 ms to 60 ms max 1 set 0260 to 1 600 40 ms to 60 ms max 1 620 or higher 70 ms to 80 ms max 3 sets 240 beams 200 ms 1 220 or higher 70 ms to 90 ms max 3 sets 240 beams 200 ms 2 s max 2 2 s max for series connection Power supply voltage Vs 24 VDC 20 ripple p p10 max Emitter Up to 50 beams 76 mA max 51 to 100 beams 106 mA max 101 to 150 beams 130 mA max Current 151 to 166 beams 153 mA max consumption no load Receiver Up to 50 beams 68 mA max 51 to 100 beams 90 mA max 101 to 150 beams 111 mA max Light source emitted wavelength 151 to 166 beams 128 mA max Infrared LED 870 nm Effective aperture angle EAA Control outputs OS SD Based on IEC61496 2 Within 2 5 for both emitter and receiver when the detection distance is 3 m or over Two PNP transistor outputs load current 300 mA max residual voltage 2 V max except for voltage drop due to cable extension allowable capacity load 2 2 uF leak current 1 mA max This can be different from traditional logic ON OFF because safety circuit is used Auxiliar
82. Machine Directive compliance from DEMKO USA UL compliance for applications for the USA or Canada Protective height equals the Sensor length to perfectly meet user needs Protective height 189 to 1 822 mm Operating range 7 or 10 m Setting Console enabling setting parameters for any model LED bar for beam alignment or easy confirmation in error mode eA complete lineup of accessories oo a D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpo4d OSD Be sure to read the Safety Precautions on page 405 and 2 DO A the Precautions for All Safety Sensors on page 242 ES Features g Two Forms of Safety from OMRON s Safety Light Curtains and Multibeam Safety Sensors 3 Safety Light Curtains for Safety Light Curtains for Finger Protection Hand Protection it 6 F3SN ALI ILL P14 F3SN A I I IP25 e Operating range 7 m F3SN BLILILILIP25 d e Smallest detectable object e Operating range 10 m Lt 14 mm dia beam gap 9 mm e Smallest detectable object Q e Protective height 189 to 1 125 mm 25 mm dia beam gap 15 mm e Protective height 217 to 1 822 mm x o Presence Detection in Danger Zones Multi beam Safety Sensor for Body Protection 3 Horizontal Installation F3SN A09P03 F3SN A I I IPA0 P70 e Operating range 10 m F3SN Bi I 1 1 P40 P70 e Number of beams 4 beam gap 300 mm e Operating range 10 m e Smallest de
83. OC OCOO oD wy ee ea 3 Ly 12 Le 6 2 24 V DC KM1 R S T o S1 External test switch z KM2 KM1 KM2 Magnet contactor OFI M 3 phase motor g ZS F1 F2 Fuse o e a ess S 23 lt Note If a lockout reset is required connect a switch between RST and V KM2 yoy l z O A Co e e TI C2 o c lt The following example is for when no muting sensors are connected in the auto rest mode and the x external device monitoring function is disabled M x E a Sg Q gt B E cc l T oO On M S gt gt af a EaI E esl zzl 3 Ja E8 asla E AS ale 8528 iz9 ES 5E mmm xls 5 212 5121s 18 2 S S Si slate DDH Bid d cl api dd d ed d oun d Vae acd d o O OW 9 9 L OO O O 69 pue 00 692 069 000 0 0 9 Q A A Q z oO N OOGOGOOOOO0 amp Z Dien EE E a ee el Mu c A eg es gt L1 L2 L3 D 24 V DC R S T N S1 External test switch KM1 KM2 Magnet contactor mm M 3 phase motor go F1 F2 Fuse UXU Note If a lockout reset is required connect a switch between RST and V oO N N omron 74 F3SP TO1 The following example is for when two muting sensors are connected in the manual reset mode and the external device monitoring function is enabled Ll a E gt E E c c o D z 2 2 E 5 2 2 ui e 5 cc 3 3 1 l els lalala 15
84. Output holding time must be 20 ms or longer e Must satisfy output characteristic requirements for class 2 circuit or limited voltage current circuit defined by UL508 e Must comply with the EMC laws and regulations of the country or region where the MS MSF4800 is used For example in the EU the power supply must comply with the EMC Low Voltage Directive Double or enhanced insulation from hazardous voltage must be applied to all input and output lines Failure to do so may result in electric shock The cable extension length must be no greater than the specified length Otherwise the safety functions may fail to work properly resulting in danger PDM Navigation Buttons Name Shape Description F orward Scroll forward and backward to Backward review the previous and next Scroll But menu or to move within the tons Same screen eo AM LN Scroll up and down to review the selection of the current menu tons oe Enter But When pressed the selected func ton tion will be accessed Note For information on the operating method refer to the Mini Safe 4800 Series Safety Light Curtains Installation and Operating Manual In the interest of product improvement specifications are subject to change without notice omnon MEMO Safety Light Curtain Type 4 F3SJ Ver 2 The updated F3SJ is even easier to use he lineup also includes models with S mark certification New models for body protection or
85. Philips driver slot 0 i Int diat val s O Ol 4 c bs 13 5 ty d Y i J rod Fon m 11 D T o dad Four mounting holes i oo00 zl 16 9 IZZ 55 MI 0 20 M12 waterproof connector Two mounting hole 0 30 __ 6 5 dia m C3 z Mounting Precautions gt Note 1 The mounting bracket 3 see Mounting Brackets Intermediate is shown on the left hand side of the Sensor as an example If the y mounting bracket 3 is on the right hand side of the Sensor then the mounting holes must also be on the right hand side 2 When using the cable bent use a minimum bending radius of R 2 36 mm Fig A shows an example when using a Cable with a Straight Connector Fig B shows the dimensions when using a Cable with a Right angle Connector e OO Fig A Connector Cable Fig B R36mm 80 mm min SS D T s MIL 43 mm max ME TII mI DEM EE c Ont T 80 mm min R36 mm Connector Cable Connector Cable omnon Ayayes o D gt o o o uonoogjes onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 SS J F3SN AL SS F3SN A I I IP25SS 01 Connector cap 209 i73 M12 Waterproof Connector co Fer 4 i E Tat e 400 M12 waterproof connector
86. Plug ga to connect to the and communications lines For details refer to the F39 MC21 Instruction Manual T F39 GWUM SD Manager Setting eo h i Support Software for the F3SJ e i i Accessory sold separately di F39 MC21 Setting Console qme B ID o H Accessory sold separately a O v e0 D T I I wo I I P l 3 EE mu l l LJ l I EMI i D I l Q I l I V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 i C2 o o omnon F3SJ Ver 2 Applications Supported by the Setting Tools Fixed Blanking Function Summary Disables specific F3SJ light beams When the fixed blanking function is used to disable detection in an area install blocking structures or shielding to prevent passage into the entire hazardous area where detection has been disabled Failure to do so may prevent detection of people and result in serious injury When an allowable range of light beams has been set for fixed blanking the size of the smallest detectable object will be larger in the vicinity of interrupting objects Calculate the safety distance to match the settings After setting the fixed blanking function you must verify that the F3SJ detects a test rod at any position in the entire area where intrusion must be detected Failure to do so may prevent detection of people and result in serious injury Example Application In this example there is always
87. Power supply voltage 54 VDC 10 ripple p p 5 max Vs Current consumption Emitter 170 mA max no load Receiver 800 mA max Light source emitted wavelength Effective aperture Infrared LED 880 nm angle EAA ML Control outputs Two PNP transistor outputs load current 250 mA or less residual voltage 1 V or less excluding voltage drop due to OSSD cable extension Output operation M mode Light ON Emitter Power indicator orange error mode indicator red Indicators Receiver Light intensity level indicator orange OF F state indicator red ON state indicator green interlock indicator yellow Mutual interference prevention function Safety functions Connection method Emitter Frequency S witch Auto start mode start interlock mode and start restart interlock mode can all be selected using a switch in the receiver Connected to the terminal block on the internal board Protective circuits Output load short and power supply reverse connection protection Ambient temperature Operating Storage 0 to 55 C with no icing or condensation Ambient humidity Degree of protection Vibration resistance Shock resistance IEC Standard IP 65 Operating Storage 3596 to 9596 with no icing or condensation Malfunction destruction 10 to 55 Hz amplitude 0 7 mm 20 sweeps each in X Y and Z directions Malfunction destruction 100 m s 1 000 times each in X Y and Z direction
88. Resource Module MS4800 RM6 Status indicator omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaJd 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o MS4800 Series Safety Precautions This document is intended as a guide for product selection Be sure to read the nstruction Manual provided with the product for actual operation Regulations and Standards 1 Ayayes o D o o o uonoojes onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J SOL 6E4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 4n oO o o 2 2 Application of an MS MSF4800 series Safety Light Curtain alone cannot receive type certification provided by Article 44 2 of the Industrial Safety and Health Law of apan Itis necessary to apply the Curtain in a system Therefore when using the MS MSF 4800 series Safety Light Curtain in J apan as a safety device for presses or shearing machines prescribed in Article 42 of that law the system must receive type certification The MS MSF4800 series Safety Light Curtain is electro sensitive protective equipment ESP E in accordance with European Union EU Machinery Directive Index Annex IV B
89. Safety Controllers Type Specification Model Remarks e No of contacts 4 e Contact output 2NO 2NC G7SA lt lt Rated switch load Mir EE Refer to G7SA on page 538 for other Relays with a i 6 A at 250 VAC 6A at 30 VDC Jal A i ul Forcibly Guided E Pa e No of contacts 4 aa Gan d Contacts QE e Contact output 3NO 1NC OTHASATE l e Rated switch load 6 A at250 VAC 6A at 30 VDC id A e No of contacts 6 os di e Contact output 4NO 2 NC G7S AA2B E T i d A e Rated switch load G7S LI E A Ref 7S LI E f h Relays with 10 A at 250 VAC 10 A at 30 VDC aoe G i i a er Forcibly Guided No of contacts 6 cc ene eet Contacts e Contact output 3NO 3NC s Rated switch load GS MASEE 10 A at 250 VAC 10 A at 30 VDC e Quick connection disconnection to uonoojes onpoJd l the F3SN ALISS with a Cable with Use an F39 J CUIB Cable with 97 T da enn Connectors on Both Ends F3SP B1P Connectors on Both Ends to connect to BE e Contact output 3NO 1NC the F3SN ALISS 2o e Connects up to two F3SN ALISS UseanF39 J COA orF39 J CHEL Cable SEE rrr rer sets and provides muting with Connector on One End to connect Muting Controller vy WU capability F3SP U2P to the F3SN ALISS D Li onl Ask your OMRON representative for functions and other details e OMRON offers many Safety Application Controllers to help you build safety circuits 3 Refer to Safety Application Controller Pro
90. Start input ON voltage 11 to 28 8 V OFF voltage 0 to 1 2 V For the MS4800B use NC contacts for the start input switch For the MS4800A refer to Start Input Methods MS MSF4800A Only on page 266 Transmitter Indicator Y ellow Indicator is ON when transmitting Blanking Indicator Orange Indicator is ON in Blanking Active State Interlock or Alarm Lockout Indicator Indicator is ON in Interlock State and indicator flashes in Alarm Lockout State Machine Run Stop Indicator Green R ed Green indicator is ON when Control Output is ON and red indicator is ON when Control Output is OFF Mutual interference prevention function The scan code A B can be switched with the P rogramming and Diagnostics Module Series connection MSF 4800 only e Connectable segments 4 max e Total number of beams 256 max e Maximum cable length between segments 10 m e Response time when connected Refer to page 257 Test functions 1 Use of the Spatter Protection Cover causes a 10 maximum sensing distance attenuation e Self test when power is turned ON and while power is supplied e External test light emission stop function by test input 2 The consumption current must not exceed 1 35 A for both the control outputs and auxiliary output The rated current is the sum of the Transmitter 285 mA Receiver 450 mA control output 1 625 mA control output 2 625 mA and auxiliary output 100 mA 3 The 24 VDC value is
91. Total 4pcs set eo S Free location bracket Materials Zinc die cast zinc plating _ z F39 L19 Minimum order quantity 1 pc 7 Note Not provided with an angle deflection c mechanism for beam control N Free location bracket Materials di Sensor fixing element f Zinc die cast zinc plating F39 L20 Minimum order quantity 1pc Q Mounting bracket Iron zinc plating Note P rovided with an angle deflection mechanism for beam control y Use these brackets for sensors having an operating range where no intermediate bracket is required with an operating range of less than 640 mm i e Test Rods Optional Appearance Applicable sensor Specification Model 14 mm dia provided with the sensor F39 TR14 V HS 4 a NSe4 V NS 4 Used for checking the setting condition of F39 TR23 F3SN ALILILILIP 14 01 single beam floating blanking Used for checking the setting condition of o two beam floating blanking pestis ig 25 mm dia provided with the sensor F39 TR25 1 D F3SN ALTLILILIP 25 01 Used for checking the setting condition of single beam floating blanking SSMO m m 1 Also provided with the F3SN BLILILILIP 25 Be 2 Also provided with the F3SN ACILILILIP 40 and F3SN BUILILILP 40 VR o o 7 omnon nw 2 D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpo4d SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud LOL dS 4 SOL 6E4 c 49A PSEA 008v SIN V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4
92. V HS 4 g8 NS J V NS 4 SSL IV NS 4 szed sdg F3SJ Ver 2 Selecting a device is as easy as 1 2 3 The F3SJ Safety Light Curtain is a Type 4 safety sensor that can be used to configure a Category 4 safety circuit This means that there is no need to worry about the safety of the resulting circuit Use the following three easy steps to select the best model for your system design Step The F3SJ incorporates the perfect fit concept that is a feature of OMRON s other Safety Light Curtains With a line up of products in 1 beam increments you can find the sensor that fits your setup perfectly Refer to the list of sensor models on pages 288 289 and 290 to select the minimum sensor length required to cover the area you want to protect Select the required sensor length Note We can also manufacture sensors with lengths not included in the list of models For details please consult your OMRON sales representative Sensor length Protective height 2 500 mm Maximum 245 mm Minimum eoooc0 Protective height 0245 to 2 500 mm omnon Output type Step 22 Select the output transistor Choose the PNP type when installing in safety system configurations that comply with the Machinery Directive or when using with a dedicated controller FSSP B1P or F3SX NPN types are also available as standard products when replacing existing area sensors Step Select the application
93. a nominal value The actual voltage depends on the supply voltage Actual voltage Supply voltage 1 V omnon Series Advanced Series MS4800 Series Basic Series Model Individual use MS4800A 30 L MS4800A 40 L MS4800B 30 MS4800B 40 L Item Safety functions Connection method Protective circuit Series connection MSF4800A 30 e Selection of auto start mode and interlock mode MSF4800A 40 e External device monitoring e Muting MSF4800A only MS4800 RM6 sold separately is required e Fixed blanking e Floating blanking e Monitored blanking e Reduced resolution blanking Power supply connectors M12 Transmitter 5 pin Receiver 8 pin Series connection connectors M12 Transmitter 4 pin Receiver 4 pin Output short circuit protection reverse polarity protection MSF4800B 30 MSF4800B 40 e Selection of auto start mode and interlock mode e External device monitoring Ambient temperature Operating 10 to 55 C with no icing storage 25 to 70 C Ambient humidity 95 max with no condensation Insulation resistance Dielectric strength Degree of protection 20 MO min at500 VDC Transmitter 350 VAC 60 Hz 1 min Receiver 500 VDC 1 min IP65 IEC 60529 nw Du D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd Vibration resistance Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz 0 35 mm doub
94. an object such as a conveyor belt in the detection area and we want to ignore the conveyor belt Description of Functions Fixed Blanking Function This function disables part of the F3SJ s detection area and maintains the control output s ON status even if there is an object in the disabled area The light beams set for fixed blanking must be one area of consecutive light beams and up to five areas can be set areas 1 to 5 Fixed blanking cannot be set for all of the light beams Setting the Fixed Blanking Area Set the area that will be subject to fixed blanking An interrupting object can be placed in the detection area to perform teaching and specify light beams for manual settings Higher Higher Light beam 10 Fixed blanking area Light beam 5 Lower Lower Note 1 When the Setting Console is being used only one area can be set as a fixed blanking area 2 When the SD Manager Setting Support Software is being used up to five areas can be set as fixed blanking areas Floating Blanking Function Summary Increases the diameter of the F3SJ s smallest detectable object and turns OFF the control output when multiple objects are detected When the floating blanking function is used it increases the diameter of the F3SJ s smallest detectable object Always use the larger diameter when calculating the safety distance If the incorrect diameter is used in the calculation the machinery may fail to stop before an operator r
95. beam Safety Sensor is used alone when the risk assessment indicates that a single beam is sufficient K 21 600 mm s C 21 200 mm Height of the beam from the ground or from a reference surface 750 mm EN999 recommendation 2 When multiple Single beam Safety Sensors are installed at Measure the actual maximum stop time for the machine and the periodically check itto see if the time changes different heights K 21 600 mm s C 2850 mm The beam heights in the following table are the EN999 recommendations Height from the reference surface No of beams example the floor 2 400 mm 900 mm 3 300 mm 700 mm 1100 mm 4 300 mm 600 mm 900 mm 1200 mm omnon oo Dm D 7 o lt o 7 uonoo es onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaJd 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 SS J nw Dum D o lt o 7 uonoogjes jonpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaJd 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S01 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 4n oO o o Precautions for All Safety Sensors Distance from Glossy Surface Install the sensor system so that itis not affected by reflection from a glossy surface Failure to do so may hinder detection resulting in serious injury Installation Preventio
96. by American Standard ANSI B11 19 Reference If a person approaches the detection zone of the MS MSF4800 perpendicularly calculate the safety distance as shown below Ds K x Ts Tc Tr Tbm Dpf Where Ds Safety distance in inches K Approach speed to the detection zone in inches Assuming that the operator is beginning to perform a manual task the ANSI standard value for K is 63 inches second ANSI B11 19 2003 requires that the following factors be considered in determining the K value a Movement of hands or arms b Twisting of the body or shoulder or bending of the waist c Walking or running Use the above described factors to determine the approach speed for the actual application Ts The time in seconds required to stop the machine Tc The maximum response time in seconds of the machine s control circuit required to activate the braking device of the machine Note Ts Tc are normally measured simultaneously by a device for 23 measuring the time required for stopping ae Tr The response time in seconds for the MS MSF 4800 29 This is given in the Response Time on page 257 z Tbm The stopping time in seconds added by a brake monitor before determining degradation in the machine stopping time If a machine has a brake monitor Tom Brake monitor setting time co Ts Tc If ithas no brake monitor it is necessary to increase the e value added to the machine s stopping time somewhat to ac
97. can be used with other systems possessing different scan codes The MS MSF 4800 is equipped with two scan codes MS4800 Series Setting the Scan Codes When Installing Multiple Safety Light Curtains Receiver Receiver Y E o D E E D D z Machine 1 Machine 2 Code A Code B Sensing Area The sensing area of the MS MSF4800 can be delineated by drawing lines from the inside edges of the End Caps on the Transmitter and Receiver The area outside these lines is not sensed Install the MS MSF4800 so thatitis not possible to enter the hazardous area without passing through the sensing area Installation Adjustment The installation adjustment for the Transmitter and Receiver is easiest when the system is in Auto Start Mode with the fixed blanking function disabled Install the Transmitter and Receiver atthe same height on the same flat surface The individual beam indicators IBI will turn ON when the beams are not aligned For details refer to Individual Beam Indicators IBI on page 264 Input Power Supply Requirements The MS MSF 4800 operates at 24 VDC 20 The power supply for the MS MSF4800 mustsatisfy the momentary power interruption and voltage drop requirements of IEC 61496 1 4 3 2 2 5 4 3 2 and IEC 60204 1 4 3 3 Use the OMRON power supply with STI Parts No 42992 or equivalent Peripheral Protection Requirements For peripheral protection install the MS MSF4800 so that its sensing area is outside
98. e co uu ET Four IBls indicating the ones digit Alarm Lock 6 CF of the error code are ON out state O LA A i Yellow Red cy Fourth IBI from the end cap is OFF C Three IBls indicating the tens digit S of the error code are ON Blanking Ac Q ere T Error code 34 ave stale page Ju This shows that control output 1 End cap has been shorted to ground Operating Condition Interlock indicator flashes condition indication Note For details on error codes refer to the Mini Safe 4800 Series Safety Light Curtains Installation and Operating Manual Transmitting SE state E a Yellow Error state PDM Pro gramming X state Yellow omnon Transmitter LED Indicators Operating with blanking enabled Flashing ON Description When the Transmitter receives power and enters the Transmitting State the indicator turns ON When the Machine Test Signal MTS is enabled the Transmitter enters the Transmitting Stop state and the indicator turns OFF When an error occurs due to the Transmitter or when the Program ming and Diagnostics Module is being used to change a Setting the indicator flashes Safety Functions Operation Modes Auto Start If no objects are detected in the sensing area when the power is turned ON in Auto Start Mode the system enters the Machine Run State If an objectis then detected the system changes from the Machine Run State to the Machine Stop State and rema
99. e ud gx M8 S ea C S 4 ls os y ol EJ 4 p 8 95 773 P f i 37 2 E t S Front surface view Rear surface view with a 195 0 mounting bracket reversed nmm TYP RAD C zz2 gt 3 1 ep Right side view Rear surface view a 7 N Left side view Left side view Bottom surface view Z with PDM cable z attached o mm C3 C9 N TI oo TI C2 o o omnon MS4800 Series MSF4800 30 Transmitter and Receiver Dimensions MSF4800 40 Transmitter and Receiver Dimensions Dimen Dimen reed A Bi B2 c1 C2 E1 E2 Seren E1 E2 area area 240 341 9 323 3 400 2 327 9 381 6 360 482 0 461 8 520 1 447 8 501 5 280 381 7 363 1 440 0 367 7 421 4 480 639 9 567 6 621 3 320 422 1 403 5 480 4 408 1 461 8 600 721 6 701 4 759 7 687 4 7411 360 461 8 443 2 520 1 447 8 501 5 720 841 5 821 3 879 6 807 3 861 0 400 404 2 540 2 521 7 501 5 487 5 541 2 840 927 1 980 8 T 440 527 2 580 9 960 963 6 1099 6 1081 1 1060 9 1042 3 1119 2 1046 9 1100 6 3 T 480 581 6 563 0 639 9 567 6 621 3 1080 1219 9 1201 4 1181 2 1162 6 1239 5 1167 2 1220 9 im 520 620 7 602 1 679 0 606 7 660 4 1200 1
100. ensure the correct usage of this function the MPCEs must be safety certified types with forcibly guided contacts When the EDM is not used In the case the EDM input is not used connect the auxiliary output in the Dark ON output mode to the EDM input line or disable the EDM with the F 39 MC11 setting console The value can be changed by the F39 MC11 Itis impossible to connect the F39 MC11 to the F3SN B Non safety Output Auxiliary Output The default of this output is the reverse signal of the safety outputs Dark ON output This output can be used for monitoring purposes by connecting it to a device such as a PLC The auxiliary output can be selected to give one of the following output operation modes by the F39 MC11 F39 MC11 cannot be connected to the F3SN B e Dark ON output mode fixed for the F3SN B e Light ON output mode e Light diagnosis mode e Lockout mode e Outermost beam monitoring mode e Specified beam mode e Blanking monitoring mode F3SN A only F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A External Indicator Output Series connection type only This output can be connected to an external indicator to display one of the operation modes as selected by the F 39 MC11 The default of this output is Light ON output A desired output operation mode can be selected by using the F39 MC11 F39 MC11 cannot be connected to the F3SN B Beam Center line The beam center line is the line going through all of the beams See
101. entire hazardous area and where it cannot be activated from within the hazardous area The Safety Light Curtain cannot protecta person from an object flying from a hazardous area Install protective cover s or fence s machine may not stop before a person reaches the Make sure to secure the safety distance S between the S afety Sensor and the hazardous part Otherwise the hazardous part resulting in serious injury Safety Distance The safety distance is the distance that must be set between the S afety Sensor and a machine s hazardous part to stop the hazardous part before a person or object reaches it The safety distance varies according to the standards of each country and the individual specifications of each machine In addition the calculation of the safety distance differs if the direction of approach is not perpendicular to the detection zone of the Safety Sensor Always refer to relevant standards Safety distance S Hazardous area omnon Note The response time of a machine is the time period from when the machine receives a stop signal to when the machine s hazardous part stops Measure the response time on the actual system Also periodically check that the response time of the machine has not changed Safety Distance for a Safety Light Curtain gt How to calculate the safety distance specified by International standard ISO13855 2002 European standard EN999 1999 Refere
102. four digits of the model number T protective height O Weight packed state The optional Mounting Brackets come in a set of two and weigh 120 g This weight is not included in the T above formula E Note 1 Vibration o When using Curtains with a protective height of 605 mm or more the vibration performance of the applicable sensor is reduced Do not use these Curtains in locations that are subject to vibration mm 2 Protective height N TI When using these cases the protective height of the applicable sensor is reduced iid Check the rating and performance prior to use 3 Mounting direction When using Curtains with a protective height of 605 mm or more Mounting direction some slackness occurs due to the weight of the Curtain the cable end and terminating end can be positioned in either direction 5 For this reason mount these Curtains only in the vertical direction Horizontal direction Vertical direction o Terminating end Cable end Terminating end mS 7 Cable end omnon F3SJ Ver 2 Connections Basic Connection for Basic System Basic system refers to the F3SJ with its default factory settings The basic system provides basic safety light curtain functions Most functions can be used without performing additional configuration For PNP output See page 305 for NPN output wiring Wiring when using manual reset mode external device monitoring S1 External test switch connect to 0 V if the switch is not nec
103. green PNP transistor output load current 100 mA max Residual voltage 2 V max except for voltage drop due to cable extension 2 21 5 to 24 VDC Emitter OFF source current 3 mA max Open or 0 to 2 5 V Emitter ON leakage current 0 1 mA max k2 Emitter Emitting orange Receiver Output OFF red Output ON green Test functions External test light emission stop function by test input Connection method Pre wired cable 2 m M12 connector Protective circuits Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Ambient operating light intensity Power supply output reverse connection protection load short circuit protection Operating 10 to 55 C Storage 10 to 70 C with no icing or condensation Output reverse connection protection load short circuited protection Operating 20 to 55 C Storage 30 to 70 C with no icing or condensation Operating 35 to 85 storage 35 to 95 with no icing or condensation Incandescent lamp 3000 Ix max light intensity on the receiver surface Sunlight 10 000 Ix max light intensity on the receiver surface Insulation resistance 20 MQ min at 500 VDC Dielectric strength 1000 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 min Degree of protection IP67 IEC standard reals 10 to 55 Hz double amplitude 0 7 mm 50 min each in the X Y and Z directions Vibration CSI ance Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz double amplitude
104. green error mode indicator 3 red light intensity level indicator green 5 levels Time shared beam projection system by series connection e Number of series connected light curtains Up to 3 sets Number of beams Up to 240 beams Length of the series connection cable 3 m max Self test when power is ON and period is 1 s or less External test light emission stop function by test input Auto reset manual reset start restart interlock e EDM External Device Monitor Connection method Protective circuits Ambient temperature M 12 connector 8 pins Output short circuit protection reverse polarity protection Operating 10 to 55 C storage 30 to 70 C with no icing or condensation Ambient humidity Ambient operating light intensity Operating storage 3596 to 9596 with no condensation Incandescent lamp 3000 Ix max light intensity on the receiver surface Sunlight 10000 Ix max light intensity on the receiver surface Insulation resistance Dielectric strength Degree of protection 20 MQ min at500 VDC 1000 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 min IEC Standard IP 65 Vibration resistance Shock resistance Materials Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz 0 7 mm double amplitude 20 sweeps in X Y and Z directions Malfunction 100 m s 1000 times in X Y and Z directions Case Aluminum end cap Zinc die cast optical cover PMMA Acrylic resin Weight packed state Accessories Weight g Detection width
105. intensity on the receiver surface Insulation resistance 20 MQ min at 500 VDC Dielectric strength Degree of protection Vibration resistance Shock resistance 1 000 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 min IP65 IEC60529 Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz 0 7 mm double amplitude 20 sweeps in X Y and Z directions Malfunction 100 m s 1 000 times each in X Y and Z directions Materials Casing including metal parts on both ends Aluminum zinc die cast Cap ABS resin Optical cover PMMA resin acrylic Cable Oil resistant PVC Weight packed state Accessories Calculate using the following equations 1 For F8SJ A I JL J14 weight g protective height x 1 7 a 2 For F8SJ ALTILILIL IL I20 F3SJ ALIL TEL 125 F3SJ AL TL TL TEL 1L 80 weight g protective height x 1 5 a 3 For F8SJ ALILILIL IL 155 weight g protective height x 1 4 a The values for a are as follows Protected height 245 to 596 mm a 1 100 protected height 1 660 to 2 180 mm a 2 400 Protected height 600 to 1 130 mm a 1 500 protected height 2 195 to 2 500 mm a 2 600 Protected height 1 136 to 1 658 mm a 2 000 Test rod 1 instruction manual mounting brackets top and bottom mounting brackets intermediate 2 error mode label User s Manual CD ROM 1 The F3SJ ALILILIL TL 155 is not included x2 Number of intermediate mounting brackets depends on protective height of F3SJ e For protective height from 600 to 1 130 mm 1 set fo
106. key to eliminating mutual interference external light interference and other similar causes of unwanted line stoppages Conventional Models F3SN A SS Series Conventional models had an operating range that was too long This meant that IN they picked up light from sensors in unexpected locations and they interfered The operating range for the F3SN A SS Series is limited to 3 5 m as opposed to 10 m for conventional models This dramatically reduces the negative impact on adjacent light curtains and surrounding photoelectric sensors even in applications where parallel light with other sensors curtains are installed for multiple devices It also eliminates additional Conventional F3SN A Series 3 5 m F3SN AL SS Series work such as installing special wiring to prevent interference Excessive light from Emitter 1 is picked up by Receiver 2 This light caused interference in some cases 10 m The amount of light from the Emitter was reduced and the rated operating range was shortened to 3 5 m This way light from Emitter 1 does not reach Receiver 2 omnon F3SN AL SS Setting Console Optimizes Light Sensitivity for Specific Ranges Even Light Reflected from Walls 3 5m Reflected light Amount of light Amount of light picked up by Receiver 2 picked up by Ayayes o D o0
107. l x 22 S388 2 8 lozrzzs s 9 pean 6 a2 S i I l 8 5 26 gt l l l n 2 Sex l l I E 9 l l oo Hw 28 S zr 1 lg s v 9 Dm 2 O 3 ls 8 2 5 9 D Test oO 2 l l c 2 s ls I8 5 5 dc 0 switch T I o0 S A5 Balzal als QS l I 5S2 e S 2e z s 7 Oo l amp 8 8 zeg alo i l 2 PEDE PE l E 9 8 3g g l ol 3 l zi SIS OO E l 9 2 e J p LE PO d 23 O D e i F A Fuses 24 V OSD pz E1 5 D RE vto ara 29 0 COCG CGOCGOCO 60978 S DE Bo i i ES em Control circuits K1 FS zo E1 24 VDC i Mor F3SX N L2R ac p 2 7 o rs Co e e E1 24V KM1 KM2 Qo c lt Q9 x m M 7 N External indicator oO Le 3 _ co i 3 3 z ab D 24 V 52 So Fog cls S SX c EE 2 8 52888 Slesia ele s Eg z 3 c lals gt Sele 2 2 S1 Emergency stop switch A165E A22E ae I UR KM1 95 9 ES Sq0 9 S2 R itch 7 GP us s 922 5 9 2 eset switc aly Y tg E E i i o 85 8 KM1 KM2 Relay with forcibly guided contacts or magnetic contactor o JL E X KM2 E M Three phase motor 4 E1 24 VDC power supply S82K e External indicator Filament type indicator When an external indicator is not necessary connect resistance of 1 4 W 4 7 kQ
108. lamp to either the external indicator output or auxiliary output 1 for the emitter or the receiver When d connecting the muting lamp to auxiliary output 1 the parameter must be changed with a setting tool e 5 Two wire sensors cannot be used 3 Wiring when the external device monitoring function will not be used o e Use a setting tool to set the external device monitoring function to Disabled d e When using an auxiliary output 1 that has not been changed output operation mode is control output data and inverse of control output signals is Enabled the external device monitoring function will be disabled when auxiliary output 1 and the external device monitoring input are connected as shown below V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 Receiver C2 D z Gray Communication line D VM Pink Communication line mm EH Pd 2 2 K1 K2 Relay or other device that controls mo a hazardous parts of the machine c5 K3 Load PLC etc for monitoring a 9 gz S olg The F3SJ operates even when K3 is not z g connected L When K3 is not necessary connect auxiliary output 1 only to the external device monitoring input OV supply omnon F3SJ Ver 2 For NPN output See page 306 for PNP output wiring Wiring when using muting and external device monitoring functions 4 Receiver Gray Communication line V N o a3 5 Pink o
109. ms max 1 set 40 ms to 52 ms max Startup waiting time 2 s max 2 2 s max for series connection Power supply voltage Vs 24 VDC 20 ripple p p10 max Up to 50 beams 76 mA max 51 to 100 beams 106 mA max 101 to 150 beams 130 mA max Current _ Emitter 151 to 180 beams 153 mA max 201 to 234 beams 165 mA max GODS ImpHonring U beams 68 mA 51 to 100 beams 90 mA 101 to 150 beams 111 mA load Receiver UP to 50 beams 68 mA max 51 to eams 90 mA max to eams mA max 151 to 180 beams 128 mA max 201 to 234 beams 142 mA max Light source emitted wavelength Infrared LED 870 nm Effective aperture angle Based on IEC61496 2 Within 2 5 for both emitter and receiver when the detection distance is 3 m or over EAA PNP Two PNP transistor outputs load current 300 mA max residual voltage 2 V max except for voltage drop due to cable extension DUTDUES allowable capacity load 2 2 uF leak current 1 mA max Control outputs P This can be different from traditional logic ON OFF because safety circuit is used OSSD NPN Two NPN transistor outputs load current 300 mA max residual voltage 2 V max except for voltage drop due to cable extension SUPUES allowable capacity load 2 2 uF leak current 2 mA max p This can be different from traditional logic ON OFF because safety circuit is used u PNP One PNP transistor output load current 300 mA max residual voltage 2 V m
110. on Both Ends for Emitter and Receiver Set Q Appearance Cable length Specification Model Application d 0 2m F39 JCR2B 0 5m F39 JCR5B Series connection or 227 1m F39 JC1B connection with F3SP B1P DDD 3m F39 JC3B dba 5m F39 JC5B Si M12 connector Q2 7m 8 pins F39 JC7B g _ 10m F39 JC10B gt c m 15m F39 JC15B Connection with F3SP B1P 1 p A E 20 m F39 JC20B m 4 30m F39 JC30B a m 40 m F39 JC40B OO 0 2m F39 JCR2C 1m F39 JC1C 3m F39 JC3C d E Connection with G9SA 300 SC 1 2 P 7m 8 pins F39 JC7C 10m F39 JC10C 15m F39 JC15C 1 Cannot be used for series connection purpose 2 When two or more cables have to be used for connection with the G9SA 300 SC connect the necessary number of F 39 J CL JB cables to one F39 J CLIC cable Example When a 35 m long cable is required connect two F 39 J C10B cables to one F39 J C15C omnon F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A External Indicators Separate Models for Emitters and Receivers Appearance Specification Indicator Type Model E mitter F39 A01PR L rz Red ile M12 connector for Receiver F39 A01PR D pau One E mitter F39 A01PG L Green Receiver F39 A01PG D Note These indicators are used for connecting with series connection type emitters receivers models ending in 01 The Indicator must be secured separately for models ending in 04 or 05 The desired turn ON timing type of signal can be selected on setting console
111. p 10 max Up to 50 beams 140 mA max 51 to 85 beams 155 mA max 86 beams and more 170 mA max Up to 50 beams 100 mA max 51 to 85 beams 110 mA max 86 beams and more 120 mA max Infrared LED 870 nm Effective aperture angle EAA Control outputs OSSD 1 Within 5 for the emitter and receiver at a detection distance of at least 3 m according to IEC 61496 2 Two PNP transistor outputs load current 300 mA max residual voltage 2 V max except for voltage drop due to cable extension allowable capacity load 0 075 u F leak current 2 mA max Auxiliary output non safety output Output operation mode 1 One PNP transistor output load current 50 mA max residual voltage 2 V max except for voltage drop due to cable extension Control output Light ON Auxiliary output Dark ON Input voltage Emitter Indicators Receiver Mutual interference prevention function Series connections Test functions Safety functions 2 3 For test input interlock selection input reset input and external relay monitor input voltages ON voltage 9 to 24 V sink current 3 mA max OFF voltage 0 to 1 5 V or open Power indicator green interlock indicator yellow lockout indicator red test indicator orange error mode indicator 3 red light intensity level indicator green 5 levels OFF state indicator red O N state indicator green lockout indicator red O ptional function indicator
112. receiver lens are equipped with heaters for worry free operation even in environments where condensation easily forms Optional glass and stainless steel mirrors are available A Be sure to read the Safety Precautions on page 455 and the Precautions for All Safety Sensors on page 242 Ordering Information Sensors Sensor type Case material bei Sensing distance Output Connected to Through beam E Aluminum Hie tenia PNP output block on the internal board Note F3SS AT60P L Emitter and F3SS AT60P D Receiver can also be ordered individually Accessories Order Separately Item Model Laser Alignment Kit for beam alignment F39 LLK Glass Mirror F39 MSG Stainless Steel Mirror F39 MSS 45 Mirror Clamp F39 LM45 Mirror Clamp for Wall Mounting F39 LA Sensor Clamp for 42 mm diameter Pipe Stand F39 LSP Note Wiring is based on a built in terminal block Please purchase a 4 mm to 7 mm dia cable separately muti omron A C Bus TUV Rhe i inland Infrared Model F3SS AT60P Specifications Item Model Sensor type Through beam models F3SS AT60P F3SS Safety category Detection capability Lens diameter Category 4 3 2 1 or B Diameter 36 mm Opaque objects 31 mm in diameter or greater Sensing distance 0 3 to 60m Response time under stable light 35 ms max incident condition Startup waiting time 4s or less
113. set series connection Response time of the 1st unit Response time of the 2nd unit 1 ms Response time calculated by the above x 4 ms Response time of the 1st unit Response time of the 2nd unit Response time of 3rd unit 5 ms Response time calculated by the above x 5 ms For models with the TS suffix multiply the response time obtained by the above x 5 ms or use 200 ms whichever is less Response time of the 1st unit Response time of the 2nd unit Response time of the 3rd unit Response time of the 4th unit 8 ms Response time calculated by the above x 5 ms omnon nw oa D 72 o lt o 7 uonoos es onpo4d SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suoineoaud 008Tt SIN 6 49A SEd S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 sz SJ 3 7 C2 o o F3SJ Ver 2 Cable Extension Length Total cable extension length must be no greater than the lengths described below When the F3SJ and an external power supply are directly connected or when the F3SJ is connected to a G9SA 300 SC Condition 1 set 2 sets 3 sets 4 sets Using incandescent lamp for auxiliary output and external indicator output di TOU POM enm Not using incandescent lamp 100m 60m 45m 30m When connected to the F3SP B1P D o Condition 1 set 2 sets 3 sets 4 sets 3 arse me 3 E Mu o lamp for external indicator 40 m 30 m o5 m
114. sets X 1660 to 1840 6 12 3 sets ur O Ol Tl C2 o U uF V HS 4 g8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 4n oO o o omnon F3SJ Ver 2 Guide to Replacing F3SN Models with F3SJ Models F3SN replacement correspondence table F3SN mounting holes can be used without modification When replacing F3SN CI L1 JP N 14 with F3SJ ACICILIDIP N 14 1 For F3SN models with a protective height of 225 mm max F3SN Replacement F3SJ Replacement method using Model Protective height Model Protective height F39 LJ5 F3SN L10180P N 14 180 Inward facing mounting F3SN L10189P N 14 189 Inward facing mounting Y F3SN L10198P N 14 198 F3SJ A0245P N 14 245 Inward outward facing mounting 5 T F3SN L10207P N 14 207 F3SJ A0245P N 14 245 Inward outward facing mounting 7 E FSSN LJ0216P N 14 216 F3SJ A0245P N 14 245 Outward facing mounting F3SN LIO225P N 14 225 F3SJ A0245P N 14 245 Outward facing mounting 2 For F3SN models with a protective height of 234 mm min Add 11 to the F3SN s 4 digit number and apply it as the F3SJ s 4 digit number and then replace with the standard brackets included with the product Selection example F3SN A0315P N 14 becomes F3SJ A0326P N 14 replace with standard brackets Note 1 The protective height becomes 11 mm longer uonoog es onpo4d 2 Replace with outward facing mounting of F39 LJ5 when you want to set the detection
115. standard brackets included with the product Selection example F3SN A0322P N 25 becomes F3SJ A0305P N 20 replace with standard brackets Note 1 The protective height becomes 17 mm shorter 2 Replace with outward facing mounting of F39 LJ5 when you want to set the detection surface height to be same as the F3SN However the F39 LJ5 and intermediate mounting brackets cannot be mounted simultaneously so set the protective height to 600 mm or less Using Space saving Mounting Bracket F39 LJ8 Backside mounting F39 LJ8 Material Stainless steel Use standard brackets pt C Protective height 115 Dimensions A to C A C 4 23 B C 10 3 C 4 digit number of the model name protective height F3SJ Ver 2 Mounting screw holes Note Because the F39 LJ8 cannot be mounted together with an intermediate bracket keep the protective height at 600 mm max Mounting Bracket F39 LJ9 Used when Replacing an F3W C Backside mounting F39 LJ9 Material Stainless steel Use standard brackets aer fo n So Protective height Dimensions A to C 69 3 A C 102 3 B C 77 3 C 4 digit number of the model name protective height Mounting screw holes A Note Refer to the User s Manual Cat No SCHG 718 and SCHG 719 for the dimensions for side mounting omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt
116. sure to use the instruction manual provided with the product for actual operation Regulations and Standards F3SN A F3SH A 1 Type Certification specified in the Chapter 44 2 of the Industrial Safety and Health Law in J apan does not apply to independent F3SN A F 3SH A Sensors This law applies to systems incorporating the Sensor When using the F 35 N A F 3SH A Sensor in J apan as a safety device for presses or Shearing machines as specified in the Chapter 42 of the same law apply for certification for the overall system 2 1 The F3SN A F 3SH A is electro sensitive protective equipment ESPE in accordance with European Union EU Machinery Directive Annex IV B Safety Components Item 1 2 The F3SN A F 3SH A complies with the following regulations and standards 1 EU Regulations e Machinery Directive Directive 98 37 EC e EMC Directive Directive 2004 108 EC 2 European standards EN61496 1 TYPE 4 ESPE prEN61496 2 TYPE 4 AOPD 3 International standards IEC61496 1 TYPE 4 ESPE IEC61496 2 TYPE 4 AOPD 4 American standards UL61496 1 TYPE 4 ESPE UL61496 2 TYPE 4 AOPD UL508 UL1998 CAN CSA22 2 No 14 CAN CSA22 2 No 0 8 5 J IS standards JIS B9704 1 TYPE 4 ESPE JIS B9704 2 TYPE 4 AOPD 3 The F3SN A F 3SH A received the following certification from the EU accredited body DEMKO A S e EC Type Examination in accordance with the EU Machinery Directive TYPE 4 ESPE e DEMKO Type Certifica
117. surface height to be same as the F3SN oom However the F39 LJ5 and intermediate mounting brackets cannot be mounted simultaneously so set the protective height to 600 mm or less p ES on Os D O When replacing F3SN P N 25 with F3SJ ALLLLP N 20 o 1 For F3SN models with a protective height of 247 mm max F3SN Replacement F3SJ Replacement method using Model Protective height Model Protective height F39 LJ5 F3SN L10187P N 25 187 F3SN L10217P N 25 217 F3SJ A0260P N 20 260 Inward facing mounting 3 F3SN L10232P N 25 232 F3SJ A0260P N 20 260 Inward outward facing mounting F3SN L10247P N 25 247 F3SJ A0245P N 20 Outward facing mounting x 2 For F3SN models with a protective height of 262 mm min Subtract 17 from the F3SN s 4 digit number and apply it as the F3Su s 4 digit number and then replace with the standard brackets included with a the product Selection example F3SN A0322P N 25 becomes F3SJ A0305P N 20 replace with standard brackets o Note 1 The protective height gets 17 mm shorter 2 Replace with outward facing mounting of F39 LJ5 when you want to set the detection surface height to be same as the F3SN y However the F39 LJ5 and intermediate mounting brackets cannot be mounted simultaneously so set the protective height to 600 mm or less 7 e When using intermediate mounting brackets to replace a rear mounted F3SN with an F3SJ Because the pitch of the mounting holes for the intermediate mounting
118. t Green c Tr Md L tr i Ii Test inp m Emitter 2 d 1 Shie Q p Sz e lS amp ce a iC o co ol Si 1 210 e e e 2 2 s 2 S12 2 5 2 S al s 5 Slol 8 amp S z 8 5 8 q S 5 8 6 S Sial 2 lt 2 2 23 s 21 SI E SIEIZIEISIE EISIE elglsi xio gloli c cis o acjojlj wjoljojsdjoljoljo The following example is for when no muting sensors are connected in the manual rest mode and the S1 External test switch S2 Interlock lockout reset switch KM1 KM2 Magnet contactor M 3 phase motor F1 F2 Fuse external device monitoring function is disabled Emitter pue c Receiver T AA JAE S s 2 5 S z 5 S 5 E z o Oo o a 216 oj jo ex gt l ol 2 SIZ s e EI S e z 2 t 5 2 s alal 2 g 5 s 3 2 S 2 2e o 2 Ss Ss S z 2 2 S 5 2 Q 0 S o 5 ols j c S a Oo oO S S a 29 3 2 2 2 gt lt S g S 1S 3 5 3 5 sl 5 E al E gt E T 0 EEE o E 5 gt 5 S z 3 6 ol 4 O1m 9 S 5 35 5 o rc ojwJjoljo 1 Ex C rS iC LA 16 OOG GGG OO GGG S1 External test switch S2 Interlock lockout reset switch KM1 KM2 Magnet contactor M 3 phase motor F1 F2 Fuse omnon Ayayes o it o o o uonoojes onpoJd sJosua
119. t uu Emitter Receiver Instruction Manual for the F3SN ALISS Timing Chart Use the optional F39 MC11 Setting Console to disable the EDM o Reset switch S2 EN OFF mm Emergency stop ON SAL switch S1 OFF NT oo F3SN ALISS ON control outputs 1 and2 one F3SX EL2 ON SS 5S2 Orr _ lt _ _ i a l l I D OFF 1 I I ec 7 a Stop d l F3SN i Emergency i __ light F3SN stop switch Emergency interrupted ign OFF stop switch incident ON Note This timing chart does not allow for I O device response delays omnon F3SN AL SS F3SX N L2R Manual Reset For category 4 rating 7 Emitter F3SN ACISS Receiver Wiring for use of the test function of the Light Curtain _ S PR D F39 JCLIA L or F39 JCLIA D or F39 JCLIELT L i i F39 JCLIELT D Cable with gt Cable with Connector on One Connector on One End for Emitter End for Receiver l l l l l l l l l l l l
120. the Long Range Mode is 20 m default This function is useful when there are many S afety Light Curtains operating within a small space and the possibility of mutual interference is likely Response Time Adjustment MS MSF4800A Only The MS4800 allows the user to slow down the scan rate of the Safety Light Curtain for maximum immunity against environmental interference This function may be used in harsh environmental conditions where electrical noise ambient smoke or dust and flying debris interfere with the Safety Light Curtain For details refer to Response Time on page 257 N WARNING Recalculate the safety distance whenever the response time has been changed omnon Start Input Methods MS MSF4800A Only For the MS MSF 4800A select one ofthe following four combinations of switch and ON OFF logic for connection to the Start Input line The default is the 0 V connection with NC contacts As the following timing chart shows the switch is reset by pressing it once then returning it NO1 Normally Open with 0 VDC Connection Start 24 VDC MS4800 NO1 5 C ig a a contacts gy OV Reset NO2 Normally Open with 24 VDC Connection Start 24 VDC MS4800 NO2 zng 24VD0 Pr NO contacts OV Reset NC1 Normally Closed with 0 VDC Connection Default Start Go gt 24 VDC MS4800 NC1 5 1c NC V contacts o y OV Reset NC2 Normally Closed with 24 VDC Connection Default 24 VDC MS4800 NOO 28 fos cape
121. the manual reset mode is for both Start and Restart interlocks Use the F 39 MC11 to select start interlock only or restart interlock only 6 The function is not factory set It can be set with the F 39 MC11 7 Intermediate mounting brackets are supplied with the following models When the overall Light Curtain length is 640 to 1280 mm or less 1 set included When the overall Light Curtain length is over 1280 mm 2 sets included omnon F3SN A SS Connections Basic Connection Wiring for the manual reset mode and the EDM function Sdsebsrmal testeWiteh S2 Interlock lockout reset switch S3 Lockout reset switch Emitter Receiver If the switch is notnecessary connect between the reset input and 24 VDC ni K1 K2 Relay that controls the dangerous parts of machines etc K3 Load PLC etc used for monitoring Wiring for the Auto reset When the EDM is Not Used daa Mode When the EDM is not necessary F39 JCOEO D 1 Use the F39 MC11 to disable the Cable sheath EDM color black a Se nen Emitter Cable F39 JCLIA L or F39 JCLIELI L Cable sheath color gray TTI o 2 Disable the EDM by changing the wiring as shown in the figure below when the auxiliary output is set to the Dark ON mode RS 485 A Gray Shield Lj Receiver U White RS 485 B Pink Interlock selection T D D g 5 2
122. the output and 24 V line Connecting the load between the 24 V and 0 V lines results in a dangerous condition because the operation mode is reversed to ON when light is interrupted For PNP output Do not short circuit an output line to 24 V line Otherwise the output is always ON creating a dangerous situation Also 0 V of the power supply must be grounded so that output should not turn ON due to grounding of the output line For NPN output Do not short circuit an output line to O V line Otherwise the output is always ON creating a dangerous situation Also the 24 V line of the power supply must be grounded so that output does not turn ON due to grounding of the output line omnon nw Dm D 7 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud LOL dS 4 SOL 6E4 c 49A PSEA 008v SIN V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 SS J 347 F3SJ Ver 2 Configure the system by using the optimal number of control outputs For series connection that satisfy the requirements of the necessary safety category Series connections can prevent mutual interference when multiple Do not connect each line of F3SJ to a DC power supply higher than sensors are used Up to 4 sets 400 beams can be connected 24 V 20 Also do not connect to an AC power supply except for the F3SJ AL_I TS Series for which up to 3 sets Failure to do so may result in elect
123. the periphery of the guarded machine or robot This installation method can be used to provide space for the operator to stand between the sensing area and the hazardous area In this configuration the guarded machine must be restartable only by using a key switch and the key switch must be outside the hazardous operation area in a location where the entire hazardous area is visible Start R estart Interlock Mode is well suited to peripheral protection applications Minimum Detectable Object Diameter Indication The serial number labels on the Transmitter and Receiver have marks for four minimum detectable object diameters When installing the MS MSF 4800 use an oil based marking pen to cross out the minimum detectable object diameters that were notset The minimum detectable object diameter differs when floating blanking is not used and when floating blanking is set for one or two beams For details refer to the Mini Safe 4800 Series Light Curtains Installation and Operating Manual omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 uonoo os onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaJd 008v SIN 6 49A l S J SOL 6E4 LOL dS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o 279 Ayayes o D o fe o uonoogjes onpo4d SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008Tt SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4
124. 0 EN 2195 to 2500 Use E 530 or less when none of the E values shown above oo are used oO 0 o omnon F3SJ Ver 2 Side mounting 2 Top bottom 30 Mounting screw holes mounting brackets aes 2 Mounting holes i 5 5 13 75 35 zu SUI FT i 20 QC 165 Den ERE 49 4 3 75 ej Je i 6 25 r 24 INT OW 5 5 D m d oS H o o lt 15 Mi i B A B o Y H ji BEI Tl TU DM fi oO C Protective height 36 T INI 43 I MI 93 O i 2 og 5 h I ge 4 Mounting 71 y He e holes l 0 300 SS y 37 o Bo ee 1 A mm TS Be 6 5 dia zo h 2 Mounting holes 43 EN 9 dia TL i M12 Waterproof connector 5 C protective height 4 digit number in the table e A C 74 B C 46 5 D C 20 E See table below o Protective e height 0245 to 0596 x 0600 to 1130 E 1136 to 1658 1660 to 2180 Q 2195 to 2500 Use E 530 or less when none of the E values shown above di o are used V F39 LJ1 Detailed Dimensions of Bracket nm C3 C9 C9 13 5 nnn A 11 5 Tf ES EE gt UD 9 dia 12 dia A 4 AL A A 7 o o It Material Brass 2 C9 C NT N NN a f J o o 30 oS 19 6 Material Stainless steel Material Stainless steel omron jfi nw a D 7 o lt o
125. 0 Series uses a thick aluminum case 3 mm at its thinnest parts This makes it ideal for applications with considerable vibration or impacts Long Maximum Sensing Distance of 20 m The long 20 m maximum sensing distance of the MS4800 Series marks the highest level in the industry E ven in applications where large complicated machines are guarded the use of mirrors can reduce the number of Safety Light Curtains required Rus C uus A NEW A Wide Lineup for a Variety of Applications Two series are available to meet your needs the Advanced Series with sophisticated functions and the Basic Series with specialized basic functions Minimum Protective detectable Beam gap heiaht object g 30 mm 20mm 280 to 2 120 mm Advanced Series diameter MS MSF4800A 40 mm diameter 30 mm 360 to 2 040 mm 30 mm 20mm 280 to 2 120 mm Basic Series diameter 30 mm 360 to 2 040 mm diameter MS4800 Series Series Connection of Up to Four Systems with No Controller Necessary Allowing a total of 256 beams max MSF4800 only Up to four systems can be connected in series for a total of 256 beams without having to connect a controller Models for which the smallest detectable object is different can even be connected to respond flexibly to virtually any application Series Connection Cables for Transmitter MS4800 CBLTXIC LIM Transmitter Receiver gt a MSF
126. 00 MSF4800B 40 0600 20 600 dd MSF4800A 40 0720 24 720 MSF4800B 40 0720 24 720 MSF4800A 40 0840 28 840 MSF4800B 40 0840 28 840 MSF4800A 40 0960 32 960 MSF4800B 40 0960 32 960 T MSF4800A 40 1080 1080 MSF4800B 40 1080 36 1080 D MSF4800A 40 1200 40 1200 MSF4800B 40 1200 40 1200 MSF4800A 40 1320 44 1320 MSF4800B 40 1320 44 1320 MSF4800A 40 1440 48 1440 MSF4800B 40 1440 48 1440 MSF4800A 40 1560 52 1560 MSF4800B 40 1560 52 1560 MSF4800A 40 1680 56 1680 MSF4800B 40 1680 56 1680 MSF4800A 40 1800 60 1800 MSF4800B 40 1800 60 1800 MSF4800A 40 1920 64 1920 MSF4800B 40 1920 64 1920 MSF4800A 40 2040 68 2040 MSF4800B 40 2040 68 2040 MS4800 Series Advanced Series Basic series Curtains Connected in Advanced Series Basic series Curtains Connected in Series Series Minimum detectable object 30 mm dia Beam gap Minimum detectable object 40 mm dia Beam gap 20 mm 30 mm Slaves Slaves Model Protective height mm Model Number of beams Protective height mm MSF4800 30 0280 XR2 280 MSF4800 40 0360 XR2 12 360 MSF4800 30 0320 XR2 320 MSF4800 40 0480 XR2 16 480 MSF4800 30 0360 XR2 360 MSF4800 40 0600 XR2 20 600 MSF4800 30 0400 XR2 20 400 MSF4800 40 0720 XR2 24 720 MSF4800 30 0440 XR2 22 440 MSF4800 40 0840 XR2 28 840 D D MSF4800 30 0480 XR2 24 480 MSF4800 40 0960 XR2 32 960 T E MSF4800 30 0520 XR2 26 520 MSF4800 40 1080 XR2 36 1080 a MSF
127. 06s If Tr 20 01 s and Dpf 2 900 mm S 1 600 x 0 06 0 01 900 2 1 012 mm Height of the lowest beam 300 mm or less Height of the highest beam 1 200 mm or greater Dpf 900mm Height of the lowest beam 300 mm or less Height of the highest beam 900 mm or greater Dpf 1 200mm lt Safety Distance for a Single beam Safety Sensor gt How to calculate the safety distance specified by International standard ISO13855 2002 European standard EN999 1999 Reference With Intrusion Perpendicular to the Detection Zone Safety distance S 2 Intrusion speed into the detection zone K x Total response time for the machine and Sensor T Additional distance calculated based on the detection capability of the Sensor C The safety distance varies with national standards and individual machine standards The equation is also different if the direction of intrusion is not perpendicular to the detection zone of the Sensor Be sure to refer to related standards Here T T1 1T2 T3 Where T1 Maximum machine stop time s T2 Sensor response time s From ON to OFF 2 0 ms for the E3FS 1 0 ms for the E3ZS 35 ms for the F3SS T3 F3SX response time s From ON to OFF Refer to Response Time on page 659 The maximum stop time for a machine is the time it takes to actually stop dangerous parts after the machine receives a stop signal from the F3SX e K and C are as follows for Single beam Safety Sensors 1 When a Single
128. 1 Lightincdent jp pp e Light interrupted a Auto reset mode Using external device monitoring function S1 External test switch connect to 0 V if the switch is not necessary S2 Lockout reset switch connect to 24 V if the switch is not necessary KM1 KM2 Safety relay with forcibly guided contacts G7SA or magnetic contactor Receiver KM3 Solid state contactor G3J M 3 phase motor E1 24 VDC power supply S82K PLC Programmable controller Used for monitoring not related to safety system A1 B1 A2 B2 Muting sensor Retro reflective photoelectric sensor E3Z R81 Control output 2 White Timing Chart A1 Control output 24 ub B1 Control output An OV l l i i A2 Control output i l i l I l l B2 Control output H Muting input 1 371 37 Muting input 2 i uU F3SJ Control output KM1 KM2 N O contact KM1 KM2 N C contact U i PLC input sk E PLC output The output operation mode for auxiliary output 1 is control output data inverse of control output signals enabled default setting Note Start interlock and restart interlock can be used with a setting tool omnon For NPN output F3SJ Ver 2 Wiring for muting function with single F3SJ application category 4 When two muting sensors are connected e Attaching a keycap for muting F39 CN6 enables the muting function to be used Muting lamp external indicator
129. 1 KM2 Magnetic contactors KM3 Solid state contactor G3J M 3 phase motor E1 24 VDC power supply PLC Programmable Controller Used for monitoring This is not a part of a safety system co on Ss rmm g O e 4 5 o E 5 S O 65 ab D pum 2 op 1 2 X3 X4 X5 D 2 Cw Z 5 5 9p e o oO ab zi oO Q 2 2 o ab D 5 o1 Make sure that both external devices have been suitably suppressed For the MS MSF4800B use an NC contacts for the start input switch For the MS MSF4800A referto Start Input Methods MS MSF4800A Only on page 266 When using Auto Start Mode use the PDM to check that the operation mode is setto Auto Start Mode default and connect the start input to 0 V With the default setting the external relay monitor input EDM is set so thatthe EDM is enabled and disabled with the start input This will prevent accessing the normal functionality of the start input To use both the start input and the EDM as shown in the example safety circuits on this page connectthe PDM to the Receiverand use the PDM to enable the EDM If the EDM is not necessary use the PDM to disable the EDM and then connectthe EDM red wire to 0 V For details refer to Mini Safe 4800 Series Light Curtains Installation and Operating Manual Fuse provided by the customer The test input is disabled with the default setting To use the test input connec
130. 1 shown mis SSLIV NS 4 e With Right angle Connectors n SZ 3 SE pE t 4 en ie AEG E3FS 10B4 M1 M SS J e With Right angle Connectors omnon E3ZS E3FS Application Examples For gaps in small sized equipment Protect personnel from the hazards of gaps in small sized equipment or of semi automated machinery The E3ZS is a Human Body Detection Sensor Type 2 for production equipment Make sure to use it in combination with an F3SX Safety Controller When used by itself the E3ZS conforms to EN954 1 Category 1 No particular safety restrictions apply to the E3ZS when used by itself except the inability to use in human detection safety applications We recommend using it in Light ON mode and using it with error detection via test input Ayayes o it o o o Note Test Input Use this function to enable the emitter of E3ZS to be turned ON OFF from outside It is possible to detect a number of E3ZS errors by monitoring the status of the test input and the E3ZS output signal uonoo os onpoJd OSD SIs For gaps in small to medium sized equipment SER o D Use as a safety measure for protection from Sz hazardous gaps or as guards for medium sized equipment D S The E3FS is a Human Body Detection Sensor Type 2 for S production equipment Make sure to use it in combination with a F3SX Safety Controller A comb
131. 1479 2 1406 9 1460 6 Ts 1360 1498 0 1479 5 1459 3 1440 7 1517 6 1445 3 1499 0 O 1400 1401 7 1537 7 1519 2 1499 0 1480 4 1557 3 1485 0 1538 7 1440 1443 4 1579 4 1560 9 1540 7 1522 1 1599 0 1526 7 1580 4 x 1480 1617 8 1599 3 1579 1 1560 5 1637 4 1565 1 1618 8 Q 1520 1657 5 1639 0 1618 8 1600 2 1677 1 1604 8 1658 5 4 1560 1699 3 1680 8 1660 6 1642 0 1718 9 1646 6 1700 3 1600 1736 9 1718 4 1698 2 1679 6 1756 5 1684 2 1737 9 1640 1641 3 1777 3 1758 8 1738 6 1724 6 1778 3 99 1680 1683 1 1819 1 1800 6 1780 4 1761 8 1838 7 1766 4 1820 1 caosa 1720 1856 8 1838 3 1818 1 1799 5 1876 4 1804 1 1857 8 1760 1896 5 1878 0 1857 8 1839 2 1916 1 1843 8 1897 5 z 1800 1938 9 1920 4 1900 2 1881 6 1958 5 1886 2 1939 9 g 1840 1976 6 1958 1 1937 9 1919 3 1996 2 1923 9 1977 6 gt 1880 1880 3 2016 3 1997 8 1977 6 1963 6 2017 3 A 1920 1922 8 2058 8 2040 3 2020 1 2006 1 2059 8 1960 2096 4 2077 9 2057 7 2039 1 2116 0 2043 7 2097 4 mm 2000 2136 1 2117 6 2097 4 2078 8 2155 7 2083 4 2137 1 Na 2040 2178 6 2160 1 2139 9 2121 3 2198 2 2125 9 2179 6 2080 2215 6 2197 1 2176 9 2158 3 2235 2 2162 9 2216 6 2120 2275 6 2203 3 2257 0 d A 2 0 omnon MS4800 Series Accessories Cables with Connector on One End for Transmitter MS4800 CBLTX 10M L 10 m MS4800 CBLTX 15M L 15 m MS4800 CBLTX 30M L 30 m L i 40 7
132. 16 620 670 720 770 F3SJ A0820P55 F3SJ A0820N55 17 820 F3SJ A0870P55 F3SJ A0870N55 18 870 F3SJ A0920P55 F3SJ A0970P55 F3SJ A1020P55 F3SJ A0920N55 F3SJ A0970N55 F3SJ A1020N55 19 20 21 920 970 1020 F3SJ A1070P55 F3SJ A1070N55 22 1070 F3SJ A1120P55 F3SJ A1120N55 23 1120 F3SJ A1170P55 F3SJ A1220P55 F3SJ A1270P55 F3SJ A1320P55 F3SJ A1170N55 F3SJ A1220N55 F3SJ A1270N55 F3SJ A1320N55 24 25 26 27 1170 1220 1270 1320 F3SJ A1370P55 F3SJ A1370N55 28 1370 F3SJ A1420P55 F3SJ A1420N55 29 1420 F3SJ A1470P55 F3SJ A1520P55 F3SJ A1570P55 F3SJ A1620P55 F3SJ A1470N55 F3SJ A1520N55 F3SJ A1570N55 F3SJ A1620N55 30 31 32 33 1470 1520 1570 1620 F3SJ A1670P55 F3SJ A1670N55 34 1670 F3SJ A1720P55 F3SJ A1720N55 35 1720 F3SJ A1770P55 F3SJ A1820P55 F3SJ A1870P55 F3SJ A1920P55 F3SJ A1770N55 F3SJ A1820N55 F3SJ A1870N55 F3SJ A1920N55 36 37 38 39 1770 1820 1870 1920 F3SJ A1970P55 F3SJ A1970N55 40 1970 F3SJ A2020P55 F3SJ A2020N55 41 2020 F3SJ A2070P55 F3SJ A2120P55 F3SJ A2170P55 F3SJ A2220P55 F3SJ A2070N55 F3SJ A2120N55 F3SJ A2170N55 F3SJ A2220N55 42 43 44 45 2070 2120 2170 2220 F3SJ A2270P55 F3SJ A2270N55 46 2270 F3SJ A2320P55 F3SJ A2320N55 47 2320
133. 1PR L D F39 MLG 9 F39 AO1PG L D 3 9 ced o D T T e mm Can be fitted to the F39 ST1 cylindrical a AE T mounting rod 42 dia 1 accessory l lil il e Cu MM inem Lighting part V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 d 96 C2 T 104 3 z gt a N Y Miil 9 2 SZ 3 SJ 3 f Waterproof connector Model M mm F39 MLG0406 F39 MLG0610 F39 MLGO711 749 F39 MLG0914 953 F39 MLG1067 1105 1148 F39 MLG1219 1257 1300 F39 MLG1422 1461 1503 487 690 192 995 SS J F39 MLG1626 1664 1706 F39 MLG 1830 1867 1910 F39 MLG2134 2172 2214 omnon Spatter Protection Covers F39 HN I I 14 F39 HN I I 1 25 F39 HH09 03 Spatter Protection Slit Covers F39 HS J 1 1 JA B 14 F39 HS J 1 1 JA B 25 F39 HS09A B 03 Water resistant Case F39 HPL 1 1 17 14 F39 HP I 1 25 F39 HPH09 03 Mounting dimensions depends on the length of housing of each model F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Protection cover l 10 xL is as follows F39 HNULILILI 14 F39 HS LILILILIA B 14 F 39 HNLILIL IL 25 F39 HSLILIL IL IA B 25 F 39 HH09 03 F 39 HS 09A B 03 Materials PC transparent area L OOO mm ABS non transparent area L O 22mm L 915mm Fixing bracket 37 3 lL Materials SUS 9 87 14 Multi beam Sensor Support Stand Mirror Sta
134. 2 1 219 F39 MLG1219 e 1 422 F39 MLG1422 OW 1 626 F39 MLG1626 _ 1 830 F39 MLG1830 2 134 F39 MLG2134 o o omnon MS4800 Series MS4800 RM6 Connection Cables Appearance Cable length Model Application 10m MS4800 CBLMT 10M For connecting an MSF4800A Receiver eal a ea and an MS4800 RM6 Resource Module 30m MS4800 CBLMT 30M Resource Module Ow Appearance Model Application 2 Ec 0 MS4800 RM6 A special terminal module for using muting d 38 og 3 Water resistant IP67 Cases for Both Transmitters and Receivers 2 Cases Per Set 10 Maximum Sensing Distance OSD Attenuation Per Case 3 229 m Type Appearance Modi Remarks FE 2 For individual use MS4800 IP67 L o Co e Accessories Two mounting brackets one m top one bottom Material Acryl d L For series connection use MSF4800 IP67 L E Ro X A 4 digit number indicating the protective height of the Light Curtain must be included in place of the box L1 in the model number g Spatter Protection Covers for Both Transmitters and Receivers 2 Covers Per Set 10 Maximum Sensing Distance T Attenuation Per Cover Type Appearance Model Remarks y U d MS4800 Cover MS4800WS _ Material Acryl nm DOD Tee 0 A 4 digit number indicating the protective height of the Light Curtain must be included in place of the box LI in the model number SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o
135. 2 F3SN ALISS 04 Cable color Black Ni V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 More Compact Machines 9 The F3SN ALPP 14 finger protection model is ideal for the more compact z machines available today It has a safe distance that can be as short as 88 mm d color P s 5 i o Refer to FSSN A F3SN B F3SH A on page 378 for details TPEITTENUT eT TUERI UNE TI 5 Conforms to International Safety Standards The F3SN ALISS is a Type 4 sensor with a category 4 rating This means that it conforms to the highest standards of safety for a Safety Light e Curtain The F3SN ALISS conforms to all the following standards o0 International standard IEC61496 1 IEC61496 2 EU regulations EN standard Machinery Directive EMC Directive EN61496 1 EN61496 2 T JIS standards JIS B9704 1 B9704 2 y North American Standards UL61496 1 UL61496 2 UL508 UL1998 CAN CSA22 2 No 14 CAN CSA22 2 No 0 8 Korean Standard S mark certification only S Models Application is also possible in devices covered by the OSHA standards 29 CFR 1910 212 of the USA The requirements of the USA Industrial Robot Standard ANSI RIA R 15 06 1999 have also been satisfied Ds ic OSHA ANsvRA Js S omnon nw Dn D 72 oz o UOI 99 9S jonpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 V HS 4 SSLIV NSe4 8 NS 4 LOl dS 4 SOL 6 4 Z eAfS J OO08tSN V NS 3 suonne2aJd SZ 3 SJ 3 i C2 o o F3SN AL SS Ordering Information Main Un
136. 2 5 mm Approx 0 6 kg The F3SX series Safety Controller is a multiple input single output Controller This is useful for individual control over the safety output when using multiple safety input devices Custom models are also available Refer to the F3SX on page 652 and consult with your OMRON representative Accessories Branch Connector Appearance Dummy Plug Appearance N F39 CN3 F39 CN4 Model Model Cables with Connectors on Both Ends for Branch Connector Appearance Model Cable length P a F39 JF1S 1m I F39 JFOS 2m T F39JF5S 5m 4 F39 JF10S 10m Mutual Interference Prevention Filter for E3ZS Model Quantity Dimensions 4 9 E39 E11 2 per Emitter and Appearance Model Y92E B18 Sensor Mounting Bracket for E3FS Sensor Mounting Bracket for E3ZS Appearance Model E39 L104 Remarks For use with E3ZS T81A This filter prevents mutual interference by changing the direction of polarized light of the 2 adjacent Emitter Heceiver 4 total Receivers However when the filter is attached the maximum sensing distance of the E3ZS is reduced to 1 5 m omnon nw Dm D 7 o lt o 7 uonoojes onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaJd 008t SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LO L dS J V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3
137. 24 VDC power supply S82K z gt Single beam Light incident o Safety Sensor 1 Light interrupted o icc ye CY bris Note 1 The above circuit diagram example conforms to Category 2 AA Light in ident a 2 The EN60204 1 stop function category is 0 zero for the example in mm Safety Sensor 3 Light interrupted oo INEEENN the above circuit diagram poen Single beam Light incident 3 When the FB feedback input function of the F3SX is not used make Saroy Sensors Light imterrupten BEE setting changes with the F3SX function setup software DC Solid state Safety Output F3SX CD1 00 E1 SS1 SS2 m gm gm Hg aa Xeon de uL co 1 The black wire is used when the Cable with Connector Socket on One da KM1 KM2 N C contacts mm um um uz End XS2F D4201 180 is connected to an E3FS 10B4 M1 M o Connector 2 The white wire is used when the Cable with Connector Socket on One End XS2F D42L L180 L is connected to an E3FS 10B4 M1 M Connector For connections refer to the F3SX operation manual KM1 KM2 N O contacts omnon nw Dum D 7 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaJd 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 szed SE pE SS J E3ZS E3FS I O Circuit Diagrams E3ZS Circuit Diagrams E3ZS T81A with PNP Output Output mode ON when light is incident Light ON I O circu
138. 339 4 1320 9 1300 7 1282 1 1359 0 1286 7 1340 4 560 661 0 642 4 719 3 647 0 700 7 1320 1459 6 1441 1 1420 9 1402 3 1479 2 1406 9 1460 6 600 701 4 682 8 759 7 687 4 741 1 1440 1579 4 1560 9 1540 7 1522 1 1599 0 1526 7 1580 4 640 643 9 779 9 7614 7412 727 2 780 9 1560 1646 6 1700 3 93 680 683 6 819 6 801 1 780 9 766 9 820 6 1680 1764 6 1818 3 22 720 860 0 841 5 821 3 802 7 879 6 807 3 861 0 1800 1938 9 1920 4 1900 2 1881 6 1958 5 1886 2 1939 9 o2 760 899 0 880 5 860 3 841 7 846 3 900 0 1920 2058 8 2040 3 2020 1 2001 5 2078 4 2006 1 2059 8 223 800 939 5 921 0 900 8 8822 886 8 940 5 2040 2178 6 2160 1 2139 9 2121 3 2198 2 2125 9 2179 6 RE 840 979 8 961 3 941 1 922 5 927 1 980 8 Ss 880 1018 8 1000 3 980 1 961 5 966 1 1019 8 TS 920 922 5 1058 5 1040 0 1019 8 1001 2 1078 1 1005 8 1059 5 960 963 6 1099 6 1081 1 1060 9 1042 3 1119 2 1046 9 1100 6 1000 1138 6 1120 1 1099 9 1081 3 1158 2 1085 9 1139 6 o 1040 1178 9 1160 4 1140 2 1121 6 1198 5 1126 2 1179 9 S 1080 1219 9 1201 4 1181 2 1162 6 1239 5 1167 2 1220 9 1120 1258 3 1239 8 1219 6 1201 0 1277 9 1205 6 1259 3 T 1160 1162 7 1298 7 1280 2 1260 0 1246 0 1299 7 1240 1378 1 1359 6 1339 4 1320 8 1397 7 1325 4 1379 1 a 1280 1417 8 1399 3 1379 1 1360 5 1437 4 1365 1 1418 8 x 1320 1459 6 1441 1 1420 9 1402 3
139. 39 JC7E2 L 7 m F39 JC10E1 L 10 m F39 JC10E2 L 10 m F39 JC15E1 L 15 m F39 JC15E2 L 15 m uonoojes onpoJd Og U zl L I 3 x 2 ENS S nS 28 3 Spay So S o T Waterproof Vinyl insulated round cable 6 6 mm dia E Connector 8 cores 4 twisted pairs conductor cross sectional area 0 3 mm insulation outside diameter 1 15 mm dia Standard length L o E Color Emitter gray Receiver black Cable with Connectors on Both Ends with Straight Connectors F39 JCR2B L 0 2 m F39 JC7B L 7 m x F39 JCR5B L 0 5m F39 JC10B L 10 m F39 JC3B L 3 m F39 JC15B L 15 m F39 JC5B L 5 m F39 JC20B L 20 m 8 9 c o bs Waterproof Connector Vinyl insulated round cable 6 6 mm dia Waterproof Connector e 8 cores 4 twisted pairs conductor cross sectional area 0 3 mm insulation outside diameter 1 15 mm dia Standard length L Color Emitter gray Receiver black V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSL V NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 Sse Refer to F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A on page 378 for information not provided in the model number omnon F3SN AL SS Connection Circuit Examples An Example of Safety Circuits Where No Controller is Used For category 4 rating Applicable operation mode Manual reset mode Using the external relay monitor function Emitter Receiver S1 External test swit
140. 3SN A0472P25 01 472 30 F3SN A1012P25 01 2 F3SN A1552P25 01 1552 102 T F3SN A0487P25 01 487 31 F3SN A1027P25 01 1027 67 F3SN A1567P25 01 1567 103 o F3SN A0502P25 01 502 32 F3SN A1042P25 01 1042 68 F3SN A1582P25 01 1582 104 F3SN A0517P25 01 517 33 F3SN A1057P25 01 w ls F3SN A1597P25 01 1597 105 D F3SN A0532P25 01 532 34 F3SN A1072P25 01 1072 70 F3SN A1612P25 01 1612 106 F3SN A0547P25 01 547 35 F3SN A1087P25 01 dl F3SN A1627P25 01 1627 107 i F3SN A0562P25 01 562 36 F 3SN A1102P 25 01 ee F3SN A1642P 25 01 1642 108 Mm F3SN A0577P25 01 577 37 F3SN A1117P25 01 1117 73 F3SN A1657P25 01 1657 109 F3SN A0592P25 01 592 38 F3SN A1132P25 01 1132 74 F3SN A1672P25 01 1672 110 F3SN A0607P25 01 607 39 F3SN A1147P25 01 EE F3SN A1687P25 01 1687 111 1 F3SN A0622P 25 01 622 40 F3SN A1162P25 01 1162 76 F3SN A1702P25 01 1702 112 o F3SN A0637P25 01 637 41 F3SN A1177P25 01 FEE F3SN A1717P25 01 1717 113 i F3SN A0652P25 01 652 42 F3SN A1192P25 01 1192 78 F3SN A1732P25 01 1732 114 F3SN A0667P25 01 667 43 F 3SN A1207P 25 01 FEE F3SN A1747P25 01 1747 115 F3SN A0682P25 01 682 44 F3SN A1222P25 01 1222 80 F3SN A1762P25 01 1762 116 F3SN A0697P25 01 697 45 F3SN A1237P25 01 la F3SN A1777P25 01 1777 117 F3SN A0712P25 01 712 46 F3SN A1252P25 01 1252 82 F3SN A1792P25 01 1792 118 F3SN A0727P25 01 727 47 F3S
141. 40 1579 4 1540 7 1466 3 1530 3 z 1480 1617 8 1579 1 1504 7 1568 7 or 1520 1657 5 1618 8 1544 4 1608 4 1560 1699 3 1660 6 1586 2 1650 2 y 1600 1736 9 1698 2 1623 8 1687 8 ty 1640 1777 3 1738 6 1664 2 1728 2 1680 1817 3 1778 6 1704 2 1768 2 1720 1856 8 1818 1 1743 7 1807 7 223 1760 1896 5 1857 8 17834 1847 4 oe 1800 1938 9 1900 2 1825 8 1889 8 gt U D 1840 1976 6 1937 9 1863 5 1927 5 2 1880 2016 3 1977 6 1903 2 1967 2 a 1920 2058 8 2020 1 1945 7 2009 7 T 1960 2096 4 2057 7 1983 3 2047 3 o 2000 2136 1 2097 4 2023 0 2087 0 2 2040 2178 6 2139 9 2065 5 2129 5 m 2080 2215 6 2176 9 2102 5 2166 5 RS 2120 2256 0 2217 3 2142 9 2206 9 d A omnon MS4800 Series Safety Light Curtains in Series Connection MSF4800 30 1 Top surface view Reversing the mounting bracket Le 50 0 GR Sealing Cap M12 23 2 i E t ea o x A R 47 43 ls C ET cr ex e 38 0 C i El QU E2 o 3 C ono A E G2 oc o9 C 3 C ex C Qo o U c Dx C 5 D oF 0 PO E o o e GOS d 18 5 9o o2 58 8 Y zo 113 0 TYP P CERES o I i e Y e 58 8 37 2 1 CY EE Tl z 9 c o c e lt C o C z i C Z A S B1 C1 TI PDM c 67 8 E d L Sealing Cap
142. 4800 30 0560 XR2 560 MSF4800 40 1200 XR2 40 1200 MSF4800 30 0600 XR2 600 MSF4800 40 1320 XR2 44 1320 MSF4800 30 0640 XR2 32 640 MSF4800 40 1440 XR2 48 1440 MSF4800 30 0680 XR2 34 680 MSF4800 40 1560 XR2 52 1560 MSF4800 30 0720 XR2 36 720 MSF4800 40 1680 XR2 56 1680 ed MSF4800 30 0760 XR2 38 760 MSF4800 40 1800 XR2 60 1800 og MSF4800 30 0800 XR2 140 800 MSF4800 40 1920 XR2 64 1920 oz MSF4800 30 0840 XR2 840 MSF4800 40 2040 XR2 68 2040 MSF4800 30 0880 XR2 44 880 Ps 2 MSF4800 30 0920 XR2 46 920 22g MSF4800 30 0960 XR2 48 960 a I MSF4800 30 1000 XR2 1000 g 3 MSF4800 30 1040 XR2 1040 MSF4800 30 1080 XR2 54 1080 MSF4800 30 1120 XR2 56 1120 MSF4800 30 1160 XR2 58 1160 co MSF4800 30 1200 XR2 60 1200 o MSF4800 30 1240 XR2 1240 MSF4800 30 1280 XR2 64 1280 T MSF4800 30 1320 XR2 66 1320 D MSF4800 30 1360 XR2 68 1360 lt MSF4800 30 1400 XR2 70 1400 Y MSF4800 30 1440 XR2 72 1440 MSF4800 30 1480 XR2 1480 MSF4800 30 1520 XR2 1520 T MSF4800 30 1560 XR2 78 1560 d MSF4800 30 1600 XR2 80 1600 on MSF4800 30 1640 XR2 82 1640 MSF4800 30 1680 XR2 84 1680 T MSF4800 30 1720 XR2 86 1720 E MSF4800 30 1760 XR2 1760 LF MSF4800 30 1800 XR2 90 1800 MSF4800 30 1840 XR2 92 1840 MSF4800 30 1880 XR2 94 1880 E MSF4800 30 1920 XR2 96 1920 O00 MSF4800 30 1960 XR2 98 1960 TCU MSF4800 30 2000 XR2 2000 gt gt MSF4800 30 2040 XR2 102 2040 MSF4800 30 2080 XR2 104 2080 e MSF4800 30 2120 XR2 106 2120 T gt O Co CD Qo o o omnon Ac
143. 4800 or connectors while caps are removed omnon Do not use the sensor system with mirrors in a retro reflective configuration as shown in the following diagram Doing so may hinder detection It is possible to use mirrors to bend the detection zone to a 90 degree angle Reflector Reflector Position with detection zone bent at 90 Inspect all MS MSF4800 systems as instructed in the Mini Safe 4800 Series Light Curtains Installation and Operating Manual When using series connections perform inspection of all connected MS MSF4800 Curtains as instructed in the Manual Recalculate the safety distance whenever the response time has been changed Conduct all tests and repairs with the procedures given in the Mini Safe 4800 Series Light Curtains Installation and Operating Manual Conduct the test procedures given in the Mini Safe 4800 Series Light Curtains Installation and Operating Manual according to the periodic inspection system established by the employer These test procedures must be conducted after performing maintenance changing tools setting up the system making adjustments or otherwise making changes to the MS MSF4800 or the guarded machine When more than one operator uses the guarded machine or when the guarded machine is used in shifts it is recommended that these test procedures be conducted after each operation change or shift change It is necessary to confirm that the MS MSF4800 and the safety sys
144. 4800A B Master Series Connection Cables for R eceiver MS4800 CBLRXIC LIM MSF 4800 Slave nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 Intuitive Operation with the Programming and Diagnostics Module PDM Complete with an LCD that displays in either English or J apanese the PDM makes it easy and intuitive to program change settings and troubleshoot the MS 4800 Series e Easy operation with five function buttons e Allows setting changes and status monitoring uonoog es onpoJd e IP65 protection OSD e Safety outputs operate while the PDM is connected making it possible to monitor during operation z 29 o e oooz 2 0 MAIN VIEW EDIT CONFIG P SAVE CONFIG E PROGRAM BLANKING Connect to the PDM SY STEM connection port at the bottom of the Safety Q2 Edd Light Curtain Power is e The interactive menu supplied from the simplifies operation Safety Light Curtain is The Safety Light Curtain settings must be loaded in advance o j Ql l m m m rn Ti TI Easy to understand Individual Beam Indicators IBI 2389 IZZ The MS 4800 series Receiver is equipped with OMRON STI s unique Individual Beam Indicator IBI function When a beam is interrupted or when pop itis out of alignment an individual LED lights at each corresponding Receiver beam position to notify the operator This makes it easy to align beams even from a d
145. 5 48 mm2 Cylindrical l EeHUles Dimension C 0 8 dia to 2 3 dia e Recommended Ferrule and Crimping Tool Type of Recommended ferrule Manufacturer ZG MGE crimping tool AWG24 Al0 25 8YE AWG22 AI0 34 8TQ Phoenix AWG20 492 wy UDE Contact ZA3 A10 75 10GY AWG 18 10 75 8GY Square AWGI16 AI1 5 10BK Ferrules AWG24 H0 25 12 AWG22 H0 34 12 H0 5 16 Weidmuller WG20 o sr4 P Z6 roto H0 75 16 AWG18 40 75 14 AWG16 H1 5 16 AWG22 Cylindrical N ichifu TGV TC 1 25 11T 1135 Ferrules AWG18 TGN TC 1 25 11T NH65 AWG16 omnon nw Dm D 7 o lt o 7 uonoogjes onpo4d sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaJd 008t SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 EELE SS J Ayayes o D o o o uonoogjes onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 19A l S J SOL 6E4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 4n GO o o 376 F3SP TO1 e Apply the specified voltages to the input terminals Applying an inappropriate voltage may prevent specified functions from operating properly which may cause damage to the product or burning e Disconnect the power supply before wiring e Check the condition of the emitter and receiver before connecting t
146. 5 z l 5 jo l ei2lg Ja lal lele g Z ls 2 S sel 32 o aka 3 2 5 3 S al 3 5 S 8 oo 2 2 2 5 a 5 8 2 2 g 2 5 5 5 DE 5 S 3 2 8 Els 3 gt SIBI 2 5 SIE 7S S v S S A S ol o o 8 2 8 i a E E R E EAE E de hae et et Sy TEENETE Co E E e m Eee P I o lt 92 is 4 01 ps 04 Connecting Computer Tool 08 Cable for F3SJ E39 Z12 1 F39 GWUM L3 Connecting Four Muting Sensors S1 External test switch KM2 S2 Interlock lockout reset switch KM1 KM2 Magnet contactor UOI 99 9S onpoJd Muting Sensor 3 Muting Sensor 4 y N pes o o o o c c o 0 ie o D D Es E 5 5 z 93 M 3 phase motor i ZS F1 F2 Fuse nNOS 5 E Note 1 To use the muting function a is Keycap for Muting F39 CN6 8 must be mounted to the F3SJ 2 To use the manual reset mode i gt while using the muting function the F3SJ setting must be changed using the Support Software o 3 VA recommended that you use Note If you are connecting four muting sensors c e E39 Z12 1 as the modular gt cale to connect he SUDDUITE connect the sensor outputs to MA1 MA2 9 SEPA PP MB1 and MB2 Also short circuit MAO to N L1 and MBO to L8 a The following example is for when two muting sensors are connected in manual reset mode and the external device monitoring function is disabled
147. 7 C2 o o nw De D 72 oz o UOI 99 9S jonpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 4n oO o o 278 MS4800 Series Basic Installation Precautions N WARNING Install a protective structure so that the hazardous part of a machine can only be reached by passing through the sensor s detection zone Install the sensors so that part of the person is always present in the detection zone when working in a machine s hazardous areas If a person is able to step into the hazardous area of a machine and remain behind the MS MSF4800 s detection zone configure the system with an interlock function that prevents the machine from being restarted Otherwise it may result in heavy injury Do not use this sensor for machines that cannot possibly be quickly stopped by electrical controls For example do not use it for a pressing machine that uses a full rotation clutch Otherwise the machine may not stop before a person reaches the hazardous part resulting in serious injury Using the MS MSF4800 in Presence Sensing Device Initiation PSDI Mode which is used to restart machine cycle operation requires that an appropriate control circuit be configured between the MS MSF4800 and the guarded machine For details on PSDI refer to related standards and regulations
148. 70 01 937 16 amp F3SN A0577P40 01 577 19 F3SN A1387P40 01 1387 46 F3SN A0997P 70 01 997 17 O 9 F3SN A0607P40 01 607 20 F3SN A1417P40 01 47 F3SN A1057P70 01 1057 18 F3SN A0637P 40 01 637 21 F 3SN A1447P 40 01 48 F3SN A1117P70 01 1117 19 23 F3SN A0667P 40 01 667 20 F3SN A1477P 40 01 49 F3SN A1177P70 01 1177 20 9 E F3SN A0697PA40 01 697 23 F 3SN A1507P 40 01 50 F3SN A1237P70 01 1237 21 TS F3SN A0727P40 01 727 24 F3SN A1537P40 01 1537 51 F3SN A1297P70 01 1297 22 C F3SN A0757P40 01 757 25 F3SN A1567P40 01 1567 52 F3SN A1357P 70 01 1357 23 F3SN A0787P 40 01 787 26 F 3SN A1597P 40 01 53 F3SN A1417P70 01 1417 24 O F3SN A0817P40 01 817 27 F 3S N A1627P40 01 54 F3SN A1477P70 01 1477 25 F3SN A0847P40 01 847 28 F 3SN A1657P 40 01 55 F3SN A1537P70 01 1537 26 F3SN A0877P40 01 877 29 F 3SN A1687P 40 01 56 F3SN A1597P70 01 1597 27 m F3SN A0907P40 01 907 30 F3SN A1717P40 01 1717 57 F3SN A1657P70 01 1657 28 F3SN A0937P40 01 937 31 F3SN A1747P40 01 1747 58 F3SN A1717P70 01 1717 29 S F3SN A0967P40 01 967 32 F3SN A1777P40 01 1777 59 F3SN A1777P70 01 1777 30 M F3SN A0997P40 01 997 33 F 3SN A1807P 40 01 a g a Accessories Optional A Control Unit 3 Appearance Output Model Remarks E i For connection with the F3SN A F3SN B HOC Relay 3NO 1NC F3SP B1P and F3SH A use F39 J CLIB ca
149. 70 mA max 140 mA max consumption no load Receiver Up to 50 beams 100 mA max 51 to 85 beams 110 mA max 86 beams and more 120 mA max 100 mA max Light source emitted wavelength Effective aperture angle EAA Infrared LED 870 nm Within 2 5 for the emitter and receiver at a detection distance of at least 3 m according to IEC 61496 2 Control outputs OSSD Auxiliary output non safety output Two PNP transistor outputs load current 300 mA max residual voltage 2 V max except for voltage drop due to cable extension allowable capacity load 0 075 u F leak current 2 mA max One PNP transistor output load current 50 mA max residual voltage 2 V max except for voltage drop due to cable extension External indicator output non safety output 3 Output operation mode Input voltage One PNP transistor output load current 40 mA max residual voltage 2 V max except for voltage drop due to cable extension Control output Light ON Auxiliary output Dark ON can be changed by the F39 MC11 External indicator output Light ON can be changed by the F39 MC11 3 Test input interlock selection input reset input and external relay monitor input voltages ON voltage 9 to 24 V with a sink current 3 mA max OFF voltage 0 to 1 5 V or open Emitter Indicators Power indicator green interlock indicator yellow lockout indicator red test indicator orange error mode indicator 3 red
150. 80 284 4 420 4 3817 3073 3713 360 364 5 500 5 4618 3874 4514 320 460 8 4221 3477 4117 480 581 6 507 2 5712 360 500 5 461 8 387 4 4514 600 7014 627 0 6910 400 540 2 501 5 4271 4911 720 nre rne oie 440 579 9 541 2 466 8 530 8 m TEE EPI 480 620 3 581 6 5072 5712 an T TENET EET 520 659 4 620 7 546 3 610 3 eg EN XE Cee 1080 1181 2 1106 8 1170 8 de 600 740 1 701 4 627 0 691 0 1200 1301 1 1226 7 1290 7 640 779 9 741 2 666 8 730 8 Bese suus Mere eee 680 8196 780 9 7065 770 5 1440 1540 7 1466 3 1530 3 720 860 0 821 3 746 9 810 9 1560 1660 6 1586 2 1650 2 760 899 0 860 3 785 9 849 9 1680 1780 4 1706 0 1770 0 T9 800 939 5 900 8 8264 890 4 1800 1900 2 1825 8 1889 8 8 Sm 979 8 941 1 866 7 930 7 1920 2020 1 1945 7 2009 7 i 80 iore SBO OOE aOR 2040 2139 9 2065 5 2129 5 OSD 920 1058 5 1019 8 945 4 1009 4 2 2 960 1099 6 1060 9 986 5 1050 5 BOS 1000 1138 6 1099 9 1025 5 1089 5 ET 1040 1178 9 1140 2 1065 8 1129 8 1080 1219 9 11812 1106 8 1170 8 1120 1258 3 1219 6 1145 2 1209 2 co 1160 1298 7 1260 0 1185 6 1249 6 E 1200 1339 8 1301 1 1226 7 1290 7 7 1240 1378 1 1339 4 1265 0 1329 0 o 1280 1417 8 1379 1 1304 7 1368 7 lt 1320 1459 6 1420 9 1346 5 1410 5 x 1360 1498 0 1459 3 1384 9 1448 9 1400 1537 7 1499 0 1424 6 1488 6 a 14
151. 9 MSS 49 40 33 27 E TE 0 PQ 45 Mirror Clamp for F39 MSG MSS Sas oz F39 LM45 2 Use the F39 LM45 Mirror Clamp when mounting the F39 MSG MSS Mirror to a wall or pipe dia 42 1 This Clamp enables mounting the Mirror ata 45 angle and bending the beam ata 90 angle Q a e F39 MSS MSG lt l 2 C9 X c eb A S 7 on c b NUS x amp P Base ro KD o G pd 36 d EN Flat washers 4 Mounting bracket Spring washers 4 PP 1 4 20 x 1 2 hexagonal bolts 2 F39 LM45 IZZ U SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 ur oo Assembled State P omnon nw Dn D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S jonpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J SOL 6E4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 a oO o o F3SS Sensor Clamp for 42 mm dia Pipe Stand F39 LSP This Clamp is used to mount the F3SS Sensor to a pipe with a diameter of 42 1 mm F39 LSP Two Sets of Following Parts a So es ee Ss a a SS es a a a as a Ss SS es SS a a se Ss Se a a ee as a SS eS as Se Se ss SS a Spring Y washers uo 8 1 4 20 x 1 2 hexagonal bolts 2 X l l l l l l l l l l l l l i l Flat washers 4 l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l omnon Mirror Clamp for Wall Mounting F39 LA This Clamp is us
152. A LL L M OSSD ml K3 N C contact Ell ee K3 N O contact i ff p K1 K2 N C contact EH EE NH PO p O w Aq K1 K2 N O contact lum nm nume X KM1 KM2 N C contact OOO HN i es KM1 KM2 N O contact ee 2 Safety light curtain connected with two channel emergency stop switch inputs in manual reset mode For category 4 rating F3SN A F3SH A category 2 rating F3SN B Emitter F39 JC Q z I i I F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Series F39 JC omnon G9SA 300 SC Receiver TL stop switch _ _ E1 24 V one I Reset switch 1 S2 I I External test Rs d o5 01 d o 1 s S1 S2 SI Emergency stop switch C9 S2 Reset switch momentary action switch S3 External test switch KM1 KM2 Magnetic contactor M 3 phase motor E1 24 VDC power supply S82K Note 1 F3SN A s EDM function and auxiliary output cannot be used 2 Normal operation is performed when the switch S3 is released and external diagnosis is performed when it is short circuited 3 Donotconnectanything to the C1 D1 D2 E1 andE2 terminals E j ning Chart I T ptt osso ree l K3 N C contact Bum Sea e ee K3 N O contact l KM1 KM2 N O contact _ IOo Safety Precautions F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A This catalog is intended as a guide for product selection Be
153. A0217P25 01 217 13 F3SN A0757P25 01 757 49 F3SN A1297P25 01 1297 85 F3SN A0232P25 01 232 14 F3SN A0772P25 01 772 50 F3SN A1312P25 01 1312 86 o F3SN A0247P25 01 247 15 F3SN A0787P25 01 787 51 F3SN A1327P25 01 1327 87 lt F 3SN A0262P 25 01 262 16 F3SN A0802P25 01 802 52 F3SN A1342P25 01 1342 88 RD F3SN A0277P25 01 277 17 F3SN A0817P25 01 817 53 F3SN A1357P25 01 1357 89 F3SN A0292P25 01 292 18 F3SN A0832P25 01 832 54 F3SN A1372P25 01 1372 90 T F3SN A0307P25 01 307 19 F3SN A0847P25 01 847 55 F3SN A1387P25 01 1387 91 T F3SN A0322P25 01 322 20 F3SN A0862P25 01 862 56 F3SN A1402P25 01 1402 92 T F3SN A0337P25 01 337 21 F3SN A0877P25 01 877 57 F3SN A1417P25 01 1417 93 F3SN A0352P25 01 352 22 F3SN A0892P25 01 892 58 F3SN A1432P25 01 1432 94 T F3SN A0367P25 01 367 23 F3SN A0907P25 01 907 59 F3SN A1447P25 01 1447 95 A F3SN A0382P25 01 382 24 F3SN A0922P25 01 922 60 F3SN A1462P25 01 1462 96 z F3SN A0397P25 01 397 25 F3SN A0937P25 01 937 61 F3SN A1477P25 01 1477 97 F3SN A0412P25 01 412 26 F3SN A0952P25 01 952 62 F3SN A1492P25 01 1492 98 De F3SN A0427P25 01 427 2 F3SN A0967P25 01 967 63 F3SN A1507P25 01 1507 99 REF F3SN A0442P25 01 442 28 F 3SN A0982P 25 01 982 64 F3SN A1522P25 01 1522 100 pun F3SN A0457P25 01 457 29 F3SN A0997P25 01 997 65 F3SN A1537P25 01 1537 101 F
154. B 30 0840 42 840 oz MS4800A 30 0880 44 880 MS4800B 30 0880 44 880 MS4800A 30 0920 46 920 MS4800B 30 0920 46 920 eo MS4800A 30 0960 48 960 MS4800B 30 0960 48 960 9 28 MS4800A 30 1000 50 1000 MS4800B 30 1000 50 1000 GOs MS4800A 30 1040 52 1040 MS4800B 30 1040 52 1040 3 MS4800A 30 1080 54 1080 MS4800B 30 1080 54 1080 MS4800A 30 1120 56 1120 MS4800B 30 1120 56 1120 MS4800A 30 1160 58 1160 MS4800B 30 1160 58 1160 m MS4800A 30 1200 60 1200 MS4800B 30 1200 60 1200 co MS4800A 30 1240 62 1240 MS4800B 30 1240 62 1240 e MS4800A 30 1280 64 1280 MS4800B 30 1280 64 1280 MS4800A 30 1320 66 1320 MS4800B 30 1320 66 1320 T MS4800A 30 1360 68 1360 MS4800B 30 1360 68 1360 yy MS4800A 30 1400 70 1400 MS4800B 30 1400 70 1400 lt MS4800A 30 1440 72 1440 MS4800B 30 1440 72 1440 a MS4800A 30 1480 74 1480 MS4800B 30 1480 74 1480 MS4800A 30 1520 76 1520 MS4800B 30 1520 76 1520 MS4800A 30 1560 78 1560 MS4800B 30 1560 78 1560 MS4800A 30 1600 80 1600 MS4800B 30 1600 80 1600 MS4800A 30 1640 82 1640 MS4800B 30 1640 82 1640 e MS4800A 30 1680 84 1680 MS4800B 30 1680 84 1680 MS4800A 30 1720 86 1720 MS4800B 30 1720 86 1720 T MS4800A 30 1760 88 1760 MS4800B 30 1760 88 1760 o MS4800A 30 1800 90 1800 MS4800B 30 1800 90 1800 E MS4800A 30 1840 92 1840 MS4800B 30 1840 92 1840 MS4800A 30 1880 94 1880 MS4800B 30 1880 94 1880 MS4800A 30 1920 96 1920 MS4800B 30 1920 96 1920 MS4800A 30 1960 98 1960 MS4800B 30 1960 98 1960 600 MS4800A 30 2000 100 2000 MS4800B 30 2000 100 2000 i
155. B2 HELLE LELL V i Brown Power supply Tu HERR 24vDC Iis PREE Sr jk ee FEET SELECTAE white Safety aetpa White Safety output 2 ELICIT ICE LE iace Safety output 1 ri ea Red External device Sm I L2 L l pp LL T l nt EP 6006 badd CN7 MSA1 CN8 MSB1 Muting Sensor Al Muting Sensor B1 Use the following connecting cable to connect the Muting Sensors M 12 4 pin connector Pin 1 24 V Pin 2 Not used Pin 3 0 V Pin 4 Output When using a Through beam Photoelectric Sensor use an XS2R D426 I11 F Y joint with Socket and Plug or similar product to connect the transmitter and receiver Model with Override Mode F39 TC5N02 CN2 COMM Setting Console F39 MC21 CN4 D or CN1 F3SJ A Receiver PC Tool forF3S F39 GWUM I O auxiliary terminals 65699999 o999 90999 TIL ILLI ao EENEE EN UNE EN E A E EN CN3 L F 3S A Emitter OOOOOOO I I I Brown Power supply 24 VDC I I Pink Test input Purple Reset input White Safety output 2 Black Safety output 1 Gray Auxiliary output 1 Red External device monitoring input aH ee Blue Power supply 0 V tobe ab e abt CN7 MSA1 CN8 MSB1 CN5 MSA2 CN6 MSB2 amp Muting Sensor Al Muting Sensor B1 Muting Sensor A2 Muting Sensor B2 Use the following connecting cable to connect the Muting Sensors M12 4 pin connector Pi
156. Cable Extension Length a The maximum length and wire gauge for input and output signals are given in the following table BEEN Type Rated maximum length z Control outputs 1 and 2 22 AWG 0 32 mm 300 mA load 45 m 625 mA load 22 m D 50m Receiver Start input 24 AWG 0 20 mm 50 m External device monitoring EDM input 24 AWG 0 20 mm 50m 24V 0V 20 AWG 0 52 mm 1 8 A load 12 5 m 1 A load 22 m l 24V 0V 22 AWG 0 32 mm 0 3 A load 47 m Transmitter Machine test signal MTS 22 AWG 0 32 mm 50m Note Keep the cable length within the rated length Failure to do so is dangerous because it may prevent safety functions from operating normally omnon 257 MS4800 Series Accessories Resource Module Item Model MS4800 RM6 Input power supply 24 VDC 20 30 mA max Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Ambient humidity 95 max with no condensation Storage temperature 25 to 75 C Vibration resistance Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz 0 35 mm double amplitude 20 sweeps in X Y and Z directions er Shock resistance Malfunction 10G 1 000 times in X Y and Z directions T Degree of protection IP20 IEC 60529 S B Muting sensor 1 PNP 24 VDC power consumption 20 mA Dark ON Light ON or NO NC combination Muting indicator output 2 10 to 100 mA NPN 30 VDC max Applicable safety category IEC 61496 1 Type 4 1 For details refer to Mini Safe 4800 Series Light Curtains Installation and Operating Manual 2 T
157. Cable to Right mounted on the leftside and the R eceiver o 9 is mounted on the right side F39 JC10E2 o F39 JC15E2 2 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SS V NS J SZ 3 SJ 3 i C2 o o omnon F3SN AL SS Cable with Connectors on Both Ends For Emitter and Receiver 1 Set of 2 Cables For Series Connection or Connection with the F3SP B1P Safety Relay Unit Appearance Cable length Specification Application Model 0 2m F39 JCR2B 0 5 m F39 JCR5B Series connection or connection with the F3SP B1P Safety Relay Unit 1 1m F39 JC1B 3m F39 JC3B 5m F39 JC5B M12 Straight zm Connectors 8 pin F39 uGTB 10 m F39 JC10B Connection with the F3SP B1P Safety 15 m Relay Unit 2 F39 JC15B i 20m F39 JC20B 30m F39 JC30B 40 m F39 JC40B 1 The F3SN ALISS 04 Series is equipped with a 0 2 m series connection cable and does not require a Cable with Connectors on Both Ends for series connections Purchase additional cables to extend cables that are too short x2 The maximum length of series connection cables is 3 m Longer cables cannot be used for series connections omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 uonoojes onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaJd 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LO L dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o F3SN AL SS Relays with Forcibly Guided Contacts and
158. Emitter F39 JCLIA D F39 JCLIA L Communication line Gray Communication line Pink Shield c D D a 2 2 m D rr Reset input Yellow Muting input 1 White Muting input 2 Red Control output 1 Green Muting sensor iH y 24 VDC NPN output E1 ov Reflector 34 Timing Chart Light incident mmm m Light interrupted 3 i W P E Muting input 2 Rerum Control output 1 1 KM1 KM2N O contat T KM1 KM2N C contact L PLC input x i pea A EEM Auto reset mode Using external device monitoring function Receiver monitoring input Red Auxiliary output 1 Yellow External device OUT S1 External test switch connect to 24 V if the switch is not necessary S2 Lockout reset switch connect to 0 V if the switch is not necessary KM1 KM2 Safety relay with forcibly guided contacts G7SA or magnetic contactor KM3 Solid state contactor G3J M 3 phase motor E1 24 VDC power supply 882K PLC Programmable controller Used for monitoring not related to safety system Muting sensor Retro reflective photoelectric sensor E3Z R61 The output operation mode for auxiliary output 1 is control output data inverse of control output signals enabled default setting Note Start interlock and restart interlock can be used with a setting tool omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt
159. F 4800 The following calculation is given as an example S 2000 mm s x T 8 d 14 mm This calculation applies to all shortest distance S values to 500 mm max The S value must be 100 mm min If the above described calculation results in an S value greater than 500 mm use the following calculation For this calculation the S value must be 500 mm min S 1600 mm s x T 8 d 14 mm omnon nw Dm D 7 o lt o 7 uonoog os onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suoineoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 sz sdg SS J 2795 MS4800 Series Systems with a Detection Capability Greater Than 40 mm Use the following calculation for a system that detects objects with a minimum detectable diameter greater than 40 mm S KxT C Where S The shortest distance in mm between the hazardous partand the detection point edge surface or area K 1600 mm s T The time in seconds required to stop the entire system T tt b t The response time in seconds of the Safety Light Curtain This is given in the Response Time on page 257 t Maximum time in seconds required to stop the machine C 850 mm The following calculation is given as an example S 1600 mm s x T 850 mm nw Dn D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd How to Calculate the Safety Distance Specified
160. F39 JC15A L 15 m e F39 JC7A L 7 m F39 JC20A L 20 m nn D Waterproof connector Insulated vinyl round cable 6 6 dia with braided shield o 8 wire 4 pair Cross section of conductor 0 3 mm insulator diameter 1 15 mm Standard length L Cables with L 3 7 10 15 and 20 m are available Color Emitter gray Receiver black omnon F3SJ Ver 2 Cables with Connectors on Both Ends F39 JCR5B L 0 5 m F39 JC10B L 10 m F39 JC1B L 1 m F39 JC15B L 15 m F39 JC3B L 3 m F39 JC20B L 20 m F39 JC5B L 5 m F39 JC30B L 30 m F39 JC7B L 7 m F39 JC40B L 40 m Waterproof connector Waterproof connector Vinyl insulated round cable 6 6 dia with braided shield 8 wire 4 pair Cross section of conductor 0 3 mm Insulator diameter 1 15 mm Standard length L U h D lt o it o o o Color Emitter gray Receiver black Control Unit o v Emitter m O F3SP B1P ds p Receiver o zu Sg 0 PO o 2 pS o Bo E D 24 M3 o A S Mounting screw holes 2 4 2 dia or M4 E 13 on 9 j p T E D odcood KS ISP P eb eb eb a N 76 max 63 4 84 0 3 C3 v PAAP o oO dede 58 111 max F 32 Material Stainless steel Po C2 I I C1 e SH 1 LOL dS 4 Dedicated External Indicator Set F39 A01 PAC V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4
161. F3SJ A0815N20 54 815 SAW NET ar E yn F3SJ A0845P20 F3SJ A0845N20 56 845 FBSJ ATI0P25 F3SJ ATTBON2S Wen F3SJ A0875P20 F3SJ A0875N20 58 875 F3SJ A1220P25 Fosse 1220 M F3SJ A0905P20 F3SJ A0905N20 60 905 F3SJ A1260P25 F3SJ A1260N25 63 1260 is F3SJ A0935P20 F3SJ A0935N20 62 935 F3SJ A1300P25 1300 x F3SJ A0965P20 F3SJ A0965N20 64 965 F3SJ A1340P25 F3SJ A1340N25 67 1340 F3SJ A0995P20 F3SJ A0995N20 66 995 F3SJ A1380P25 1380 T F3SJ A1025P20 F3SJ A1025N20 68 1025 EA Ex rm M NE A u E o Ro I E m F3SJ A1540P25 1540 7 F3SJ A1115P20 F3SJ A1115N20 74 1115 a a e a E Ize TT Z F3SJ A1145P20 F3SJ A1145N20 76 1145 F3SJ A1620P25 1620 3 F3SJ A1175P20 F3SJ A1175N20 78 1175 F3SJ A1660P25 1660 F3SJ A1205P20 F3SJ A1205N20 80 1205 F3SJ A1700P25 F3SJ A1700N25 85 1700 F3SJ A1235P20 F3SJ A1235N20 82 1235 F3SJ A1740P25 1740 oo F3SJ A1265P20 F3SJ A1265N20 84 1265 F3SJ A1780P25 F3SJ A1780N25 89 1780 Lot F3SJ A1325P20 F3SJ A1325N20 88 1325 rl SUEDE n e Z Tl CERT A Gs eem es me F3SJ A1505P20 F3SJ A1505N20 100 1505 rl a oe ag a F3SJ A1655P20 F3SJ A1655N20 110 1655 F3SJ A2020P25 F3SJ A2020N25 A2020N25 2020 F3SJ A1805P20 F3SJ A1805N20 120 1805 F3SJ A2060P25 SERES A2060N25 B 2060 F3SJ A1955P20 F3SJ A1955N20 130 1955 F3SJ A2100P25 2100 Mm F3SJ A2105P20 F3SJ A2105N20 140 2105 F3SJ A2140P25 107 2140 F3SJ A2255P20 F3SJ A2255N20 150 2255 F3SJ A2180P25 2180 F3SJ A2405P20
162. F3SN B sensor This law applies to systems incorporated with the sensors When using the F3SN B sensor in J apan as a safety device for presses or shearing machines as specified in the Chapter 42 of the same law apply for certification as a system 1 The F3SN B is electro sensitive protective equipment ESPE in accordance with European Union EU Machinery Directive Annex IV B Safety Components Item 1 2 The F3SN B complies with the following regulations and standards 1 EU Regulations e Machinery Directive Directive 98 37 EC e EMC Directive Directive 2004 108 EC 2 European standards EN61496 1 TYPE 2 ESPE prEN61496 2 TYPE 2 AOPD 3 International standards IEC61496 1 TYPE 2 ESPE IEC61496 2 TYPE 2 AOPD 4 American standards UL61496 1 TYPE 2 ESPE UL61496 2 TYPE 2 AOPD UL508 UL1998 CAN CSA22 2 No 14 CAN CSA22 2 No 0 8 5 JIS standards JIS B9704 1 TYPE 2 ESPE JIS B9704 2 TYPE 2 AOPD 3 The F3SN B received the following certification from the EU accredited body DEMKO A S e EC Type Examination in accordance with the EU Machinery Directive TYPE 2 ESPE e DEMKO Type Certification Type 2 ESPE EN61496 1 Type 2 AOPD prEN61496 2 Use EN954 1 Category B 1 2 4 The F3SN B received the following certification from the Third Party Assessment Body UL e Certificate of UL listing for US and Canadian safety standards Both of which are Type 2 ESPE UL61496 1 Type 2 AOPD UL61496 2 5
163. FP 100N End Plate PFP M Selecting the Power Supply e Use the rated power supply voltage Do not use power supplies with large ripple component or intermittent irregular voltages e To meetIEC 61496 1 and UL 508 safety standards and to prevent electrical shock make sure that the power supply and load satisfy the requirements outlined in the sensor s user manual Periodic Checks and Maintenance e Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify the product e Make sure that the power supply is turned OFF before replacing parts Disposal e Exercise caution to prevent injury when disassembling the F3SP TOL Precautions for Correct Use Durability of Contact Outputs The durability of the contact outputs on Safety Terminal Relays varies considerably depending on switching conditions Always confirm the usage conditions by testing the Safety Terminal Relay in an actual application and use the Safety Terminal Relay only for the number of Switching operations that its performance allows Restarting may not be possible if the switching capacity is exceeded If this occurs replace the relevant relays immediately If a Safety Terminal Relay is used after performance has deteriorated it may result in reduced safety MEMO omnon Safety Light Curtain Multi beam Safety Sensor F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A e Lineup includes Type 4 Sensors F3SN A F 3SH A and Type 2 Sensors F3SN B with IEC EN and J IS standard certification EC
164. GV and installed equipment Also the Setting Tool can be used to adjust the emitted light intensity to minimize the effect of light on other devices Maximum protective height of 2 500 mm Series connection is more convenient than ever Sensors with protective heights of up to nearly 2 5 meters are available for applications that involve large sized workpieces And if you happen to make changes in the future you can always extend the protective height with series connections Up to four sets or 400 beams can be series connected and with series connection cables up to 15 meters in length applications can cover a wide area Series connection cable up to 15 m long 2A Total length Approx 10 m 400 beams No bottlenecks in workflow Free location brackets make I Side by side Series F39 LJ3 free location mounting brackets can vertical installation easy Connection Cable be mounted in any location without getting F39 JJRO6L in the way of the adjacent sensor To create perfect fit installations with no dead zones or extra space when making series connections in L or U shaped configurations use the F39 LJ3 free location mounting brackets sold separately and F39 JJRO6L Side by side Series Connection Cable In addition to the F39 JJRO6L mentioned above the F39 JJR15L and F39 JJR3W etc can also be used with series connection cables Application example Keep a 25 mm beam
165. Green Control output 1 Test input yt Yellow Auxiliary output Reset input Gray RS 485 A RS 485 A mm Pink RS 485 B RS 485 B EDM input NC C2 5 o omnon Dimensions Main Unit F3SN A J IP25SS LI Dimensions can be calculated for each model by using the following equations Dimension C1 protective height 4 digits in the model name F3SN AL SS Unit mm Dimension A C1 64 Protective height Number of intermediate Dimension F Dimension B 2C1 32 C1 mounting brackets See note Dimension D 18 5 to 0640 0 Dimension E C1 37 0641 to 1280 1 F B 2 Dimension F R efer to the table right 1281 to 1822 5 F B 3 Note If value F obtained from the above equation is not used set F to 670 mm or less EA Mounting screw holes 5 5 Two mounting brackets 20 o lt j 0 6 5 dia 16 Four M5 11 p 2 8 i Two mounting holes ov d E 30 92 o 2 3 28 93 27 ES 22 o Sz o gt 5 5 zo 9 25 22 fe 11 Two M5 Two M5 o ey B 41 8 383 1 a p 5 p i S iss ur C1 0 Protective height di Two mounting holes 0 o 0 lt 0 o M5 up set hexagon bolt 0 e with
166. I l l o K1 K2 N O contact m ii 3 JN KM1 KM2 i N O contact m E E K1 K2 N C contact Dn M KM1 KM2 SS N C contact EN A ESSO SC PLC input 1 Depends on the operation mode of the auxiliary output l l l l l l PLC input 2 Aa EE E PLC output SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 o i o fe o uonoogjes jonpoJd SZ 3 6 49A l S J 008vt SIN S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 SSLIV NS 4 i C2 o o o h it p lt suonneoaud SJ 3 F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Examples of Safety Circuits Where G9SA 300 SC Safety Relay Unit is Connected 1 For only safety light curtain in auto reset mode For category 4 rating F3SN A F3SH A category 2 rating F3SN B Ty Emitter l V F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Series G9SA 300 SC E CJ Receiver fom HE LH Ll S1 External test switch KM1 KM2 Magnetic contactor M El Note 1 2 3 3 phase motor 24 VDC power supply S82K F3SN A s EDM function and auxiliary output cannot be used Normal operation is performed when the switch S1 is released and external diagnosis is performed when it is short circuited Do not connect anything to the C1 D1 D2 E1 and E2 terminals Timing Chart E1 24 V OV Light incident lt Light interrupted External test switch i i F3SN A B F3SH
167. In addition to finger protection hand protection and hand arm protection models new models have been added that detects a leg or the presence of a person For areas where there is only a short distance to the source of danger select a finger protection model For areas where there is some distance to the hazardous point and where the machinery stops with sufficient time to spare choose an economical hand arm body protection model Hand arm protection Finger protection Detection Detection Capability 14 mm diameter Beam gap 9 mm Hand protection Detection Capability 20 mm diameter Beam gap 15 mm Capability 30 mm diameter Beam gap 25 mm Capability 25 mm diameter Beam gap 20 mm Leg body protection and Presence Detection Capability 55 mm diameter Beam gap 50 mm 30 Hand arm 55 lt Leglbody protection and Presence Detection Detection type Easier to install easier to use The thin sensor saves valuable space The sensor is 6 mm thinner than our previous models When you include the newly designed mounting brackets which also enable beams to be aligned after the sensor is mounted the total thickness is 26 mm a reduction of 19 mm compared to previous models The low profile means the sensor will not get in the way when adding safety applications to existing equipment Previous model 30 mm 24 mm F3SJ 15 mm 2 mm i
168. J A0911N14 100 911 F3SJ A0983P 14 F3SJ A0983N14 108 983 F3SJ A1055P 14 F3SJ A1055N14 116 1055 F3SJ A0479P 14 F3SJ A0479N14 F3SJ A0263P 14 263 F3SJ A0281P14 F3SJ A0281N14 30 281 q F3SJ A0299P14 F3SJ A0299N14 32 299 9 F3SJ A0317P14 F3SJ A0317N14 34 317 gt F3SJ A0335P14 335 P F3SJ A0353P14 353 F3SJ A0371P14 F3SJ A0371N14 3 RE F3SJ A0389P14 F3SJ A0389N14 3 OM F3SJ A0407P14 F3SJ A0407N14 4 ______ F3SJ A0425P14 F3SJ A0425N14 4 F3SJ A0443P14 4 F3SJ A0461P14 F3SJ A0461N14 4 E 4 4 F3SJ A0497P 14 F3SJ A0497N14 F3SJ A0515P 14 F3SJ A0533P 14 F3SJ A0551P14 F3SJ A0569P 14 F3SJ A0515N14 F3SJ A0533N14 F3SJ A0551N14 515 F3SJ A1127P14 F3SJ A1127N14 1127 F3SJ A1199P14 F3SJ A1199N14 1199 F3SJ A1271P14 F3SJ A1271N14 1271 F3SJ A1343P14 F3SJ A1343N14 1343 F3SJ A1415P14 F3SJ A1487P14 F3SJ A1559P 14 F3SJ A1415N14 156 1415 F3SJ A1487N14 164 1487 F3SJ A1559N14 172 1559 F3SJ A0587P 14 288 40 71 42 89 44 07 46 25 ia 50 61 52 19 54 97 56 62 569 F3SJ A0569N14 F3SJ A0587N14 omnon F3SJ A1631P14 F3SJ A1631N14 180 1631 Protective Height mm Total sensor length F3SJ Ver 2 F3SJ A20 Series 15 mm gap F3SJ A20 TS Series 15 mm gap 1 F3SJ A25 Series 20 mm gap F3SJ A25 TS Series 20 mm gap 1
169. L d P 8 l os xc gt a CO amp a x 2 c sc 5 cm ESI Bo al 2 sels Z E 2 c S 9 olL 3 a a SoM el 9 gjo 3 5 gt v Q zje o o s g E gloS 5 5 Tle Sclox E 5 dg 5 5 z aE O oe F3SJ settings Auto reset mode External device monitoring function disabled F3SX E L2R settings e Manual reset mode Using feedback time monitoring function R Module Fuse T o wv g sos g 2 on Sol 8 o c e 0 co D e o ec us 239 S lN3 a8 amp 3 bat E Na g 8 o 5 o o5 gt 2 2 False 9 2 S E Scice S CO g Ssljoz Z gt lt aj ox o o lt x ul 6 Oo Communication line Pink Communication line Gray Model F39 JCLIA L t4 Model F39 JCLIA D cable for emitter T U cable for receiver l l 1i ie So _ wo l Emitter Receiver L F3SJ 2nd unit m KM2 Wiring when F3SJ s testing function is used Test SW Reset input Yellow Test input Green Interlock selection input White F3SJ Ver 2 Wiring for connection with a controller G9SA 301 category 4 PNP models only Emitter SS Receiver o F3SJ settings e Auto reset mode pue External device monit
170. N 14 Inward Outward F3SN L10207P N 14 207 igcnet curing F3SJ A0245P N 14 Outward facing F3SN L10216P N 14 216 cunt F3SJ A0245P N 14 F3SJ A0245P N Outward facing F3SN 10225P N 44 225 aun Inward facing mounting Inward Outward facing mounting When replacing F3SN IP N 25 with F3SJ A I J IP N 20 F3SN Model F3SN L10187P N 25 Replacement F3SJ Protective height Replacement method Protective using F39 LJ5 height Inward facing mounting Inward Outward m F3SJ A0245P N B Outward facing mounting F3SN C20217P N 25 F3SN 10232P N 25 F3SN C20247P N 25 omnon For F3SN models with a protective height of 234 mm min Add 11 to the F3SN s 4 digit number and apply it as the F3SJ s 4 digit number and then replace with the standard brackets included with the product Selection example F3SN A0315P N 14 becomes F3SJ A0326P N 14 replace with standard brackets Note 1 The protective height becomes 11 mm longer 2 Replace with outward facing mounting of F39 LJ5 when you want to set the detection surface height to be same as the F3SN However the F39 LJ5 and intermediate mounting brackets cannot be mounted simultaneously so set the protective height to 600 mm or less For F3SN models with a protective height of 262 mm min Subtract 17 from the F3SN s 4 digit number and apply it as the F3SJ s 4 digit number and then replace with the
171. N A Forcibly Guided Contacts Qe F3SH A a6 F3SN B S gt e Reduced Wiring and Easy Maintenance OSD One touch connection with connectors on both end to prevent wiring mistakes a D o i Connectors D oz LI o gt T P OOOO Oam ae E 7 F39 COB T Safety Light HIT i i Note Use models with the following a Special Relay Unit g 4 model number suffixes for series pd FERES S connection 01 03 04 and 05 LED Bars for Easier Application oo Align Beams with the LED Bar for Easier Installation Qo Beam Alignment Indicators Green Only lt il y bo Test LocKout Interlock POWER ERROR A ss oO Test LocKout Interlock POWER ERROR A T a t Test LocKout Interlock POWER ERROR A 3 4 5 LEVEL ep ap GED aD C3 o I Easily Discern Error Mode Displays to Back Up Many Connector Variations nnm Safety DD S elect the type of connector that best suits the machine Consult your E E OMRON representative Error Indication Example gt 0 Red Only oO o Confirmation from gt two directions o o Test LocKout Interlock POWER ERROR A 5 LEVEL m m GD C3 C9 Interlock input line or reset input line oo Standard wiring mistake or broken line No model Model No Model No Model No Model No Model No Test LocKout Interlock POWER ERROR A B C 1 2 3 4 5 LEVEL No suffix suffix 01 suffix 02 suffix 03 suffix 04 su
172. N A1267P25 01 FEE F3SN A1807P25 01 1807 119 F3SN A0742P25 01 742 48 F3SN A1282P25 01 1282 84 F3SN A1822P25 01 1822 120 omnon F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A F3SN A I I IPA0 01 F3SN A I I IP70 01 F3SN B P40 01 F3SN B P70 01 Model IM eec Model BEN Ses Model P eC F3SN A0217P40 01 217 7 F 3SN A1027P 40 01 34 F3SN A0277P 70 01 277 5 F3SN A0247P 40 01 247 8 F 3SN A1057P 40 01 35 F3SN A0337P 70 01 337 6 F3SN A0277P40 01 277 9 F 3SN A1087P 40 01 36 F3SN A0397P 70 01 397 7 F3SN A0307P 40 01 307 10 F 3SN A1117P40 01 37 F3SN A0457P 70 01 457 8 F3SN A0337P40 01 337 11 F3SN A1147P40 01 1147 38 F3SN A0517P 70 01 517 9 NE 3SN A0367P 40 01 367 12 F3SN A1177P40 01 1177 39 F3SN A0577P 70 01 577 10 Ei F3SN A0397P40 01 397 13 F 3SN A1207P 40 01 40 F3SN A0637P 70 01 637 11 Ball F35N A0427P40 01 427 14 F 3SN A1237P40 01 41 F3SN A0697P 70 01 697 12 F3SN A0457P40 01 457 15 F 3SN A1267P 40 01 42 F3SN A0757P70 01 757 13 F3SN A0487P 40 01 487 16 F 3SN A1297P40 01 43 F3SN A0817P 70 01 817 14 F3SN A0517P40 01 517 17 F3SN A1327P40 01 1327 44 F3SN A0877P 70 01 877 15 QP F3SN A0547P40 01 547 18 F3SN A1357P40 01 1357 45 F3SN A0937P
173. N A1627P25SS 118 F3SN A1792P25SS 217 13 F3SN A0217P25SS 01 16 F3SN A0262P25SS 01 352 22 F3SN A0352P25SS 01 27 F3SN A0427P25SS 01 32 F3SN A0502P25SS 01 592 38 F3SN A0592P25SS 01 43 F3SN A0667P25SS 01 742 48 F3SN A0742P25SS 01 54 F3SN A0832P25SS 01 907 59 F3SN A0907P25SS 01 982 64 F3SN A0982P25SS 01 70 F3SN A1072P25SS 01 75 F3SN A1147P25SS 01 1222 80 F3SN A1222P25SS 01 1312 86 F3SN A1312P25SS 01 1462 96 F3SN A1462P25SS 01 107 F3SN A1627P25SS 01 118 F3SN A1792P25SS 01 13 F3SN A0217P25SS 02 16 F3SN A0262P25SS 02 22 F3SN A0352P25SS 02 427 27 F3SN A0427P25SS 02 502 32 F3SN A0502P25SS 02 592 38 F3SN A0592P25SS 02 667 43 F3SN A0667P25SS 02 48 F3SN A0742P25SS 02 832 54 F3SN A0832P25SS 02 907 59 F3SN A0907P25SS 02 982 64 F3SN A0982P25SS 02 70 F3SN A1072P25SS 02 1147 75 F3SN A1147P25SS 02 1222 80 F3SN A1222P25SS 02 1312 86 F3SN A1312P25SS 02 96 F3SN A1462P25SS 02 107 F3SN A1627P25SS 02 118 F3SN A1792P25SS 02 Sensor bottom Back connector with 0 4 m cable F3SN AL SS S S Mark Type 4 Safety Light Curtain Connection method Sensor top Back connector with 0 2 m cable Application e Notthe lastset in a series connection first of 2 sets connected in series or first or second of 3 Sets connected in series Min detectable object Appearance Operating range 0 2 to 3 5 m A Connector Cable is not supplied with the Main Unit and must be purchased separately Connection method Min S
174. No of contacts 6 G7SCLE Rel e Contact type 4NO 2NC G7S 4A2B E Forother models and E orib aided e Rated switch load 250 VAC 10 A 30 VDC 10 A PR sie cH with Forci uide i E Contacts e No of contacts 6 G7SLI E on page 554 2 e Contact type 3NO 3NC G7S 3A3B E and Socket models e Rated switch load 250 VAC 10 A 30 VDC 10A Control unit Can not be used as a muting system Dedicated PNP output type UOI 99 9S 1ONpOld Appearance Output Model Remarks Og UV ac ogs TET 2 9 ine For connection with F3SJ A use an F39 JCLIB double end z ES s Relay 3NO 1NC F3SP B1P onedd Cable o S a D LLL F3SJ for NPN output type cannot be connected Wire saving Devices S Type Appearance Specifications Modi Remarks Model with PNP Muting Sensor Output F39 TC5P01 S Ps 3 sale i s 2 etween Safety Lig lt Connector Terminal Model with PNP Override Input F39 TC5P02 Curtains and Mufting Box Muting E Sensors N Terminals x1 Model with NPN Muting Sensor Output F39 TC5NO1 IP67 model for mounting at Sensor installation site Model with NPN Override Input F39 TC5NO2 Refer to F39 TC5 on d page 360 e Significantly reduces amount of wiring ursi 7 between Safety Light 7 y Res PNP output relay SPDT NO F3SP TO1 Curtains and Muting Y Relays 2 Sarco S Refer to F3SP T01 on page 368 1 For the F3SJ A 2 For the F3SJ AL IPL V HS 4 8 NS J V NS
175. Response time OFF to ON Response time of Light curtain 1 Response time of Light curtain 2 12 ms For 3 sets Response time ON to OFF Response time of Light curtain 1 Response time of Light curtain 2 Response time of Light curtain 3 4 ms Response time OFF to ON Response time of Light curtain 1 Response time of Light curtain 2 Response time of Light curtain 3 16 ms e Response time of F3SP B1P is 10 ms operation time is 100 ms Note When using the F3SP B1P determine the safety distance by adding the response time of the F3SP B1P to that of the F3SN given in the table above F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Precautions for Correct Use Do not use the product in atmospheres or environments that exceed product ratings Installation How to attach Mounting Bracket F39 L19 L20 Installation To fully utilize the performance of j How to Prevent Mutual Interference sensors locate the F 39 L19 L20 A 2 mounting brackets in the number if Series connection Up to 3 sets 240 beams sensor satisfying the dimensions A and models ending in 01 03 04 and 05 are required for B in the Sensor longitudinal series connection direction Two or more pairs of the F3SN A can be connected in series When e Forthe F39 L19 T connected in series the F3SN A sen
176. Retro reflective photoelectric sensor E3Z R61 monitoring input Red A2 Control output OUT Timing Chart Light I l 1d l l l Itt incident i L ee interrupted gg EMEN A1 Control output EMEN 24 VDC Li m EE E41 B1 Control output ia Reflector I I I Le Workpiece gt Muting sensor NPN output KM1 KM2 N C contact KM1 KM2 N O contact B2 Control output Muting input 1 Muting input 2 F3SJ Control output PLC input PLC output The output operation mode for auxiliary output 1 is control output data inverse of control output signals enabled default setting Note Start interlock and restart interlock can be used with a setting tool omnon F3SJ Ver 2 Setting Bi directional Muting e Connect the outer muting sensors A1 and A2 to muting input 1 and the inner muting sensors B1 and B2 to muting input 2 e When muting sensors A1 and then B1 or A2 and then B2 turn ON in that order the F3SJ will enter the muting state Connected to muting input 1 A1 A2 B1 B2 Retro reflective Connected to muting input 2 Photoelectric Sensors nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 F3SJ Reflector b D e Muting from the opposite direction is also possible MLB JE uonoojes onpoJd 0 Os VU ME l 4e Workpiece S E 9o i8 g F3SJ eo Note 1 This example arrangement uses E3Z Hl Il Retro reflective Ph
177. S 4 a NSe4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o omnon F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A I O Circuit Diagrams Internal Circuit Diagram Display 3 24 V I External indicator output Emitter main circuit Ps 7 OV OV nw on D o lt o UOI 998 9S onpoJd OSD o eceiver main D 29 circuit 2 GO se D O EE I Connector Pins Arrangement o I z OO i Receiver main D External indicator iin output 7 d Yellow Auxiliary N output Blue Q d Note The numbers in O indicate pin numbers of the connectors o The numbers in indicate pin numbers of the series connection connectors 3 1 Open normal light emission short to the 24 VDC stops light emission T x2 Refer to Connections Wiring for Sensor Only Configuration on page 390 3 The section encircled with the dashed line is applied for models ending in 01 03 04 or 05 only 2 Cables with Connector on One End s 1 Wire Signal name Tm Model Internal wirin Pin No 995 color Receiver Emitter PU Interlock selection White OSSD2 input Wire color y e Brown 24V 24 V Brown Green OSSD1 Test input gt Green o Yellow Yellow Auxiliary output Reset input S Sed Gray RS 485 A RS 485 A E Pink RS 485 B RS 485 B mm ed RS Blue 0 V 0 V OW l Red EDM input N C in oO N o omnon F3
178. SN A F3SN B F3SH A Output waveform of the OSSD outputs The OSSD outputs will be OFF as shown in the following figure in connected in series See the chart at left order to perform the OSSD circuit self test when the light curtain is in In the same way the OSSD outputs will be ON as shown in the the ON state following figure to perform the OSSD circuit self test when the light The OSSD circuit diagnosis is correct when this OFF signal is fed curtain is in the OF F state See the chart below back If the output signal does not contain an OFF signal the receiver Check the input response time of a machine connected to the determines thatthere is an output circuit or wiring failure and goes into F3SN A carefully to ensure the machine will not malfunction due to the lockout condition the OFF signal The number of OFF signals depends on the number of light curtains Response time t Response time ON ON oo OSSD1 2 OSSD1 2 D a OFF OFF o lt OFF signal OFF signal xij uonoogjos onpoJd Approx 25 us ES a Approx 130 us 2 E t 160 to 200 us 228 ac o So Note This chart indicates the instance of 2 light curtains series connection 2o No of light curtains No of OFF signals within the No of light curtains No of ON signals within the gt connected in series response time connected in series response time Q eo No No e 2 light curtains 2 light curtains 3 light curtains 3 light cur
179. SN stop switch Emergency interrupted light OFF stop switch incident ON Note This timing chart does not allow for I O device response delay omnon F3SN AL SS Safety Precautions Refer to Regulations and Standards and Safety Precautions for F 3SN A F3SN B F3SH A on page 378 Type Certification specified in the Chapter 44 2 of the Industrial Safety and Health Law in J apan does not apply to independent F3SS Sensors This law applies to systems incorporating the Sensor When using the F3SL Sensor in apan as a safety device for presses or shearing machines as specified in the Chapter 42 of the same law apply for certification for the overall system NWARNING Precautions for Correct Use Detection Zone and Intrusion Path Do not used the product in atmospheres or environments that exceed Refer to Precautions for All Safety Sensors on page 242 for the product ratings installation conditions of Safety Light Curtains l l Installation Use of the Fixed Blanking Function How to Prevent Mutual Interference zone where detection is disabled by the fixed blanking models ndina Ins f and d are reaulred for series function so no one can pass through the detection zone g q to reach the hazardous part of the machine Failure to do connection so may result in seri
180. SP TOL Safety Terminal Relay Simplifies the wiring from the Safety Light Curtain to the Safety Relay outputs oo Du o L o lt o D Use the Safety Terminal Relay to a TNF 4 Reduce clear up messy wiring and inside p P internal panel Simplifying the connections also helps prevent incorrect wiring UO0I 99 9S onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 il ae 2 suonneoaJd 6 49A l S J SO 1 6 5 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 oO i z i Terminals are numbered Replacement of relays n to make it easy to check is easy improving the terminal connections maintainability i m m F39 GWUM SD Manager PC Setting Support Software m ITI C3 C9 NTI nw Screw less clamp The Setting Software can be T terminals eliminate the connected enabling on site H need for extra tightening adjustment of the Light Curtain Setting Console cmon EE Muting Sensor nw Dn D 72 oz o UOI 99 9S onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008t SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 szegd sdg SS J Connector Terminal Box Muting Terminals for F3SJ A F39 TC5 Significantly reduces amount of wiring As of August 2008 between Safety Light Curtains and Muting Sensors Provides IP 67 protection against water a
181. SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SE pE SS J E3ZS E3FS Specifications Item Sensor type Safety category Standard sensing object Model E3ZS T81A E3FS 10B4 2M Through beam models See Applicable standards Opaque object 18 mm in diameter or greater ESFS 10B4 M1 M Opaque object 11 mm in diameter or greater Lens diameter Diameter 6 7 mm diameter 9 mm Sensing distance 0 2to3m Oto 10m Response time under stable light incident condition Startup waiting time Power supply voltage Vs Current consumption no load 1 0 ms E3ZS only 1 100 ms 12 to 24 VDC 10 ripple p p 10 max 2 Emitter 15 mA max Receiver 20 mA max 2 0 ms E3FS only 1 24 VDC 10 ripple p p 10 max 2 Emitter 50 mA max Receiver 25 mA max Light source emitted wavelength Red LED 660 nm Infrared LED 870 nm Effective aperture angle EAA 5 at 3 m Control output OSSD Output operation mode Input voltage Indicators PNP transistor output load current 100 mA max Residual voltage 1 V max when load current is less than 10 mA Residual voltage 2 V max when load current is between 10 mA and 100 mA except for voltage drop due to cable extension 2 Light ON 3 22 5 to 24 VDC Emitter OFF source current 3 mA max Open or O to 2 5 V Emitter ON leakage current 0 1 mA max 2 Emitter Emitting orange Receiver Operation orange Stable
182. SW T 5 M5 up set hexagon bolt 7 _ 37 M5 up set hexagon bolt F39 L20 with Philips driver slot with Philips 4 7 15 5 driver slot Free location Bracket 43 M4 up set hexagon bolt with Philips driver slot e 6 5 dia M5 up set hexagon bolt with Philips driver slot 4 7 Side mounting 59 30 5 ia 30 M5 up set 15 hexagon bolt with Philips driver slot Back mounting M4 up set hexagon bolt with Philips driver slot E 44 La 23 M4 up set hexagon bolt with Philips driver slot Emitter Cover or Receiver Cover Emitter Cover or Receiver Cover M5 up set hexagon bolt with Philips driver slot omnon F3SN AL SS Cable with Connector on One End with Straight Connectors F39 JC3A L 3m F39 JC10A L 10 m F39 JC7A L2 7 m F39 JC15A L 15 m Waterproof Connector Vinyl insulated round cable 6 6 mm dia 8 cores 4 twisted pairs conductor cross sectional area 0 3 mm insulation outside diameter 1 15 mm dia Standard length L Color Emitter gray Receiver black nw Dm D 72 o lt o Cable with Connector on One End with Right angle Connectors F39 JC1E1 L 1 m F39 JC1E2 L 1 m F39 JC3E1 L 2 3 m F39 JC3E2 L 2 3 m F39 JC7E1 L 7 m F
183. Safety Components Item 1 The MS MSF4800 series Safety Light Curtain complies with the following legislation and standards 1 EU Regulations Machinery Directive Directive 98 37 EC EMC Directive Directive 89 336 EEC 2 European standards EN 61496 1 TYPE 4 ESPE prEN 61496 2 TYPE 4 AOPD EN 61508 1 to 7 SIL3 EN 954 1 Category B 1 2 3 4 3 International standards IEC 61496 1 TYPE 4 ESPE IEC 61496 2 TYPE 4 AOPD EN 61508 1 to 7 SIL3 4 JIS standards JIS B9704 1 TYPE 4 ESPE JIS B9704 2 TYPE 4 AOPD 5 North American standards UL 61496 1 Type 4 ESPE UL 61496 2 Type 4 AOPD UL 508 UL 1998 CAN CSA 22 2 No 14 CAN CSA 22 2 No 0 8 omnon The MS MSF 4800 received the following certification from T V Rheinland an EU accredited body e EC type test based on Machinery Directive Type 4 ESPE IEC 61496 1 Type 4 AOPD IEC 61496 2 e T V Rheinland type certification Type 4 ESPE IEC 61496 1 Type 4 AOPD IEC 61496 2 e SIL3 IEC 61508 The MS MSF 4800 has received certificates for UL listing for US and Canadian safety standards from UL a third party assessment body e Type 4 ESPE UL 61496 1 Type 4 AOPD UL 61496 2 The MS MSF 4800 is designed according to the standards listed below To make sure that the final system complies with the following standards and regulations you are asked to design and use itin accordance with all other related standards laws and regulations If yo
184. Straight Cable length L DC Model XS2F D421 C80 A XS2F D421 D80 A XS2F D421 G80 A XS2F D421 J80 A XS2F D422 C80 A XS2F D422 D80 A XS2F D422 G80 A XS2F D422 J80 A XS2F D421 C80 R XS2F D421 D80 R XS2F D421 G80 R XS2F D421 J80 R UL standard e eo O Right angle XS2F D422 C80 R XS2F D422 D80 R XS2F D422 G80 R XS2F D422 J80 R aln aln alin aln O e Overall cable length for both an E3FS Receiver connected to an F3SX and the Emitter connected to the F3SX must be within 50 m e Overall cable length for both an E3ZS Receiver connected to an F3SX and the Emitter connected to the F3SX must be within 100 m Connector Plug Assemblies Solder Type Applicable cable diameter mm 3 dia 3 to 4 dia Cable connection direction Straight Right angle Connection method Model XS2G D425 Solder XS2G D426 X Use when connecting an E3ZS T81A or E3FS 10B4 2M to an F39 CN3 Branch Connector Connector Plug Assemblies Screw on Type Applicable cable diameter mm 3 dia 3 to 4 dia Cable connection direction Straight Right angle Connection method Model XS2G D4S5 Screw on XS2G D4S6 Use when connecting an E3ZS T81A or E3FS 10B4 2M to an F39 CN3 Branch Connector omnon E3ZS E3FS Accessory Connection Example Emitter Receiver a_i een H m Branch Connector for the E3FS Cable with Connectors on Both End
185. TU LES cr T 99 09 wee t as t TT a k Hd z E Ile l 2 a I T C2 ap TES eL eee ee Z lea o S bz Teen t dms o The incident light level can be displayed in a bar The incident light level when the light emission of the The cause of the errors and countermeasures are o graph for each beam Safety Light Curtain is stopped is displayed in a bar both displayed graph oo Setting Console NT nw F3SJ TI D When you don t want to carry a personal e computer onto the worksite the Setting F39 JCLIA Singe ena Wi Console is a handy way to set Connector Cable or Branch P parameters and check the system c status F39 JCLIB Double end Connector c Connector Cable y Connection Cable TuS F39 MC 1 Setting Console for the F3SJ Note The range of parameter setting and system status checking capabilities is different for the PC Setting Support Software and the Setting Console omnon F3SJ Ver 2 New functions respond to a variety of safety needs Two new functions have been added to the muting function Partial muting Partial muting raises safety by muting only the beams of the Safety Light Curtain in the area where the workpiece passes through while preventing muting in all other areas The Safety Light Curtain beams in all areas other i d than where the workpiece j passes through are constantly ON Only the beams of the Safety Light
186. V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 sdg 7 C2 o o 207 F3SJ Ver 2 Ordering Information Main Units Safety Light Curtain F3SJ A Type 4 C Infrared light eem Detection Beam Number of Protective Model Application ies Appearance Operating range 3 i capability gap P dbi ci beams height mm PNP Output NPN Output F3SJ Finger F3SJ protection 14 mm dia 26to 180 245 to 1 631 P14 A N14 16to 100 245 to 1 505 F3SJ F3SJ nn A P20 2 A N20 o 9 110 to 166 1 655 to 2 495 x1 o lt d 20 mm dia 16to 100 245 to 1 505 F3SJ A P20 110 to 166 1 655 to 2 495 TS 2 Hand 3 pee CJ o2togm 131082 260to 1 640 F3Su F3Su OE A P25 A N25 S 83 to 125 1 660 to 2 500 x1 25 mm dia oo x 131082 260 to 1 640 F3Su g28 A P25 OF 02107m 8310125 1 660102 500 TS 2 o2 a lt T 10 to 65 245 to 1 620 F3SJ F3SJ protection 90 tmmeola A iud N30 P 70to 100 1 745 to 2 495 1 e Leg body 6t o 33 270 to 1 620 F3SJ l F g tection 55 mma ACTTDPSS TT qas D Detection 34 to 50 1 670 to 2 470 x1 lt 9 Note Connection cables are not included with the products and are to be purchased separately as needed You must purchase optional connector cable N 1 Models with S mark certification have an S at the end of the model number Example F3SJ A0245P14 S 2 Models with fixed auto reset TS Parameters cannot be set using t
187. a gt Control output 1 o o I I Fog n K1 K2 N O contact I I i I I I KM1 KM2 N O contact m m I I I I 1 no K1 K2 N C contat 1 1 E oo I I I i I KM1 KM2N C contact 1 fea EJ I I l I i I I l I I 1 l T PLC input 1 2 E E p 13 Q2 I I Fog o I I 14 o PLC input 2 I i PLC output i 2 The output operation mode for Bilan output 1 is control output data inverse of control output signals enabled default setting omnon F3SJ Ver 2 Wiring for connection with a controller G9SX AD322 T15 category 4 PNP models only e Can be configured for partial control and total control e Can be extended to connect a door switch or a relay unit ES a Emitter Receiver F3SJ settings lt Auto reset mode T External device monitoring function disabled t H E G9SX AD322 T15 settings oS Auto reset mode a E e Using feedback loop F39 JCLJA L F39 JCLIA D Communication line Gray ov gt o 3 8 8 26 5 2 z Communication c Ss o9 S oS s line Pink 9 z Feedback loop 3 al s 3 2 e s o as S 5 E SJJ oa 37 9 Zo 8 8 8 o als 8 228 gt 8 J ajs 3 o 2 S d x i nS ze S Z S34 o pz ZO ag zig Motor controller TS z E X x KM1 poss EAS LLI i FM KM2 KM4 7 24 V es AND e 3 22 62
188. ability Cap and power cable are included The type name can be understood as follows F3SJ ALIL TL JE IPUIL E F3SJ ALILIL JL IPUIL tp eee 1 23 4 or F3SJ AL ILE JE INL IE 1 Protective height mm 2 Output type P PNP output type N NPN output type 3 Diameter of detection capability mm 4 L is emitter D is receiver and a blank is emitter receiver set For models with fixed auto reset the suffix L TS is an emitter D TS is a receiver and TS is an emitter receiver set This extension cable is used to connect to a terminal block controller F39 JCLIA e g F3SX G9SA G9SB G9SX or to a safety processing system e g DeviceNet safety omnon This extension cable is used when the length of the connection cable F39 JCLIB is insufficient or when connecting to an F3SP B1P controller The length can be specified Internal Indicators Total View LEVEL 5 Green LEVEL 4 Green LEVEL 3 1 Light intensity level indicators LEVEL 2 Orange LEVEL 1 Orange ERROR C Red ERROR B Red ERROR A Red 2 Error mode indicators 3 Power indicator Green 4 Interlock indicator Yellow 1 5 External device monitoring indicator Green Muting input 1 indicator 6 Blanking Test indicator Green Muting input 2 indicator 2 Orange F3SJ Ver 2 Receiver Emitter LEVEL 5 Green LEVEL 4 Green LEVEL 3 Orange LEVEL 2 Orange LEVEL 1 Or
189. ames are substituted by I I 1 in the model names 3 C lt Mirrors 12 Sensing Distance Attenuation Q N Mirror material Width mm Thickness mm Length mm Model 406 F39 MLG0406 d 610 F39 MLG0610 O 711 F39 MLG0711 914 F39 MLG0914 z 1 067 F39 MLG1067 A Glass mirror 145 32 E 1 219 F39 MLG1219 1 422 F39 MLG1422 1 626 F39 MLG1626 PP 1 830 F39 MLG1830 Lor 2 134 F39 MLG2134 c o zZ gt o o m m C3 C9 NTI oo c o o omnon nw Dm E 72 o lt o 7 uonoogjes onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 i C2 o o F3SJ Ver 2 Sensor Mounting Bracket Sold separately Appearance th E U o Standard mounting bracket for top bottom Specifications Model Application F39 LJ1 Remarks 2 for emitter 2 for receiver total of 4 per set included in the main unit Use these small sized brackets when performing side mounting with standard 2 for emitter Flat side mounting bracket F39 LJ2 mounting brackets so that they do not due Eua n A protrude from the detection surface P mu bracket also used as Use these brackets for mounting on any et i i F39 LJ3 number of required LZ e standard intermediate place without using standard bracket d brackets refer to page 4 bracket
190. ancelled e T3 Allowable pulse change time for muting input signals This is the maximum time allowed for a change in the waveform pulse of muting inputs 1 and 2 while in the muting status Note The muting status can be released even when the system enters lockout The following values can be changed using the Setting Support Software for the F3SJ e T1 min Muting input time limit min e T1 max Muting input time limit max e T2 Muting time limit The following values can be changed using the Setting Console e T2 Muting time limit Installation Standard for Muting Sensors e Set the muting sensors so that they can detect all of the passing detection objects palettes automobiles etc Do not install in a position so that only the front or rear end of the detection object is detected e Set the muting sensors so that they detect the objects even when they are loaded on palettes or other transport devices e Install the F3SJ and muting sensors so that each object passes through all muting sensors before the next object arrives at the first muting sensor Also install all F38J and muting sensors so that no person is able to accidentally enter the hazardous area while the muting function is enabled e When objects pass through the muting area at different speeds consider limiting the muting time e For a muting sensor installation example see the instruction manual e For details about the override function see the instruc
191. anching connector 2 m cable Light source Red LED Green LED one connector cap instruction manual Supply voltage 24 VDC 10 provided from the sensor Current consumption 50 mA max provided from the sensor D Connection method M12 connector 8 pins 2 For details on the setting console refer to the WEE pm Eo t instruction manual provided with the product NN pprox 909 m x The indicator must be secured separately for models ending in 04 or 05 For the F3SN B only ligh ON mode can be used z te 4 Spatter Protection Slit Covers 9 Model F39 HS I 1 A 14 F39 HS I I B 14 F39 HS I I A 25 F39 HSI I B 25 Item F39 HSH09A 03 F39 HSHO09B 03 z I i F3SN ADOCOCOP OO 01 F3SN BO000P O0 01 2 Applicable sensor F3SN ALILILILIP 14 01 F3SH A09P 03 01 4 When one cover is Bun F cr 35 in Operating range used typical value typ When two coversare 05m Bon jen nang used Env Distancethatdoes When one cover is 65m 4 8m 122m 78m PU not cause mutual used interference When two covers are 7 typical value used 2 4 m 1 2 m 4 4m 2 1m i The maximum distance that can turn ON all of the five light intensity level indicators a Environment resistant Enclosures Model F39 HPLILI_I_ 14 F39 HPI I 25 mm Item F39 HPH09 03 a9 NN F3SN ALILILILIPUILY 01 F3SN BLUILIJLIPLIL 01 Applicable sensor F3SN ALILILILIP 14 01 F3SH A09P 03 01 Operating range characteristics 0 2to6m 0 2to 10
192. ange ERROR C Red ERROR B Red ERROR A Red 1 Light intensity level indicators 2 Error mode indicators 7 OFF state indicator Red a 8 ON state indicator Green 9 Not used Green Muting error indicator 10 Not used Green Blanking Test indicator 2 RECEIVER ES ES m e 2 D The words in brackets represent the indicator name for the muting system Description No Internal Indicators gt For basic system For muting system Light intensity level indicators a f eae 1 LEVEL 1 to 5 refer to page 312 ON Indication status of LEVEL 1 to 5 shows the light intensity level status of the F3SJ Turns ON or blinks only on the sensor where the error occurred when the F3SJ enters Error mode indicators ON lockout The error mode indicators turn OFF on sensors emitters or receivers where an 2 ERROR A to C refer to page Blinkin error did not occur or on other series connected sensors The indication status of 312 9 ERROR A to C shows the cause of the error Affix the error mode label included near the F3SJ to allow for quick troubleshooting when errors occur ON Turns ON while the power is ON 3 Power indicator POWER Blinking Blinks when in maintenance mode A Interlock indicator INTLK s ON Turns ON when FS3SJ is in interlock state nterlock indicator Blinking Blinks when under lockout External device monitoring indicator ON Turn
193. area the Safety Light Curtain can be set so that it does not detect only the wheels of the cart allowing the MS MSF 4800A to be used as a presence sensing device Reduced Resolution Blanking Muting Functions for Temporarily Disabling the Safety Light Curtain MSF4800A only In applications where it is necessary for an object to regularly pass through the sensing area for example to supply workpieces to a machine the output will turn OFF each time the object passes through thus lowering productivity The muting function makes it possible to raise productivity in this kind of application by temporarily disabling the S afety Light Curtain S elect from among four muting modes to match each application with the appropriate number and placement of muting sensors The MS4800 RM6 Resource Module is required when using the muting function Complies with the Newest Global Safety Standards The MS4800 series Safety Light Curtain is a Type 4 safety sensor that can be used to configure a Category 4 safety circuit conforming with IEC 61496 1 and IEC 61496 2 international standards for Safety Light Curtains It also complies with the IEC 61508 SIL3 international standard for function safety These standards ensure safe reliable use virtually anywhere AB us CC Uu A Applications Three sided Guard The durable housing of the MS4800 Series makes it ideal for applications with strong vibration like metal processing systems Its se
194. at are S Mark compliant Attach one ferrite core to the emitter cable and the other to the receiver cable when connecting the Light Curtain with the optional Connector Cable 3 J apanese English and Korean language operation manuals are available on the CD ROM provided with the S Mark Safety Light Curtain omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 V HS J SS_IV NS 4 g NSES LOL dS 4 GO1 6 4 c 49A SES 008t SIN V NS 4J Suoinneo2aJdg SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o F3SN AL SS Accessories Sold Separately Cable with Connector on One End For Emitter and Receiver 1 Set of 2 Cables For Connection with Safety Devices such as Relays with Forcibly Guided Contacts Safety Relay Units and Safety Controllers 0 5m F39 JCR5A F39 JC3A NW F EM Straight Connectors M 12 straight connectors 8 pin F39 JC7A 0 F39 JC10A d F39 JC15A oo Oc o 8 3 OSD F39 JC3E1 t 6 s Rightangle Connectors Emitter M12 right angle connectors 8 pin F39 JC7E1 a Cable to Right and Receiver Cables go to the back when the Emitter is Cable to Left mounted on the leftside and the Receiver is mounted on the right side F39 JC10E1 S F39 JC15E1 7 c F39 JC3E2 S N iaht pi F39 JC7E2 T Right angle Connectors E mitter Eden ande conne od pini e Costo eland Receiver Cables go to the front when the Emitter is uM
195. ate the state of the muting and override functions must be installed where they are clearly visible to workers from all the operating positions on F3SJ for Muting System Remove the caps of the emitter and receiver A screwdriver is included with the key cap for muting 2 Install a muting lamp external indicator on either the emitter or receiver 3 Attach the key cap for muting to the emitter receiver on which the muting lamp external indicator was not installed Muting lamp external indicator External indicator set Model F39 A01 PLJ PAC Commercially available external P e indicator Universal indicator cable 3 Model F39 JJ3N Brown Blue Key Cap for Muting F39 CN6 Case orange em gt E Case black Case black Muting Sensor A muting sensor is the sensor that is the trigger for temporarily disabling the safety functions of F3SJ You can use a through beam or retro reflective photoelectric switch a proximity sensor or a limit switch as the muting sensor OMRON s E3Z series E2E series 3 wire E2VX series and D4N series Sensors are recommended For an F3SJ model with PNP output use a sensor with a 3 wire PNP transistor output or a NO contact output For an F3SJ model with NPN output use a sensor with a 3 wire NPN transistor output or a NO contact output Two wire sensors cannot be used Muting Lamp External indicator
196. ating independently when a series connection cable is accidentally left unconnected such as when equipment is moved Operates as a single sensor when the Key Cap is attached Does not operate without the Key Cap Complies with the latest international safety standards and regulations Like previous Type 4 Safety Light Curtains the F3SJ conforms to the latest required safety standards and regulations Since the F3SJ also complies with IEC61508 the international standard for functional safety safety is ensured regardless of where it is used International standards IEC61496 1 IEC61496 2 IEC61508 1998 SIL3 Machinery Directive EMC Directive EN61496 1 prEN61496 2 EN61508 2001 SIL3 JIS B9704 1 B9704 2 UL61496 1 UL61496 2 UL508 UL1998 CAN CSA22 2 NO 14 CAN CSA22 2 NO 0 8 EU legislation EN standards JIS standards North American standards Can be used with equipment subject to US OSHA standards 29 CFR 1910 212 e Satisfies the requirements of the ANSI RIA R15 06 1999 standards for industrial robots Models are also available which have received S mark certification from the Korea Occupational Safety and Health Agency KOSHA These models have an S at the end of the model number 4331373 E77 E omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt o UO0I 99 9S onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suoinneoaud 008t SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J
197. auxiliary output 2 has a load current of 50 mA 2 he timing when auxiliary output 1 is set as a control output inversion signal is shown in the diagram below SM Light Light incident incident Light interrupted Light interrupted Toff Ton Control ON output OFF X Toff x 2 or less Toff x 2 or less Auxiliary ON output 1 OFF Toff Response time of control output s ON to OFF Ton Response time of control output s OFF to ON When auxiliary output 2 is set as a control output inversion signal the response delay for control output becomes Toff x 3 max Selecting the System Configuration Selection Flowchart The necessary system configuration varies depending on the functions to be used Use the following flowchart to decide what kind of system is required Will the muting function be NO used YES Will the fixed blanking function be used Will the floating blanking function be used Will the detection distance be changed Will other functions be used or changed YES Will the fixed blanking function be used Will the floating blanking function be used Will the detection distance be changed Will other functions be used or changed YES F3SJ Ver 2 Basic system plus a setting tool for setting or changing parameters Muting system Muting system plus a setting tool for setting or Basic system changing parameters X F39 CN6 Key Cap for muting is required Note Refer to t
198. ax except for voltage drop due to cable extension Auxiliary output 1 output leak current 1 mA max non safety output One NPN transistor output load current 300 mA max residual voltage 2 V max except for voltage drop due to cable extension leak current 1 mA max One PNP transistor output load current 50 mA max residual voltage 2 V max except for voltage drop due to cable extension leak current 1 mA max One NPN transistor output load current 50 mA max residual voltage 2 V max except for voltage drop due to cable extension leak current 1 mA max Auxiliary output 2 non safety output basic system functions Available indicators e Incandescent lamp 24 VDC 3 to 7 W e LED lamp Load current 10 mA to 300 mA max leak current 1 mA max To use an external indicator an F39 JJ3N universal indicator cable or an F39 AO1Pl PAC dedicated external indicator kit is required External indicator output non safety output Control outputs 1 2 ON when receiving light Auxiliary output 1 Inverse of control output signals Operating mode can be changed with the setting tool External indicator output 1 Inverse of control output signals for a basic system Operating mode can be changed with the setting tool ON when muting override for a muting system Operating mode can be changed with the setting tool Receiver Output operation mode Auxiliary output 2 Turns ON when the point of 30 000 opera
199. bles fitted E with connectors at both ends OMRON offers many Safety Application Controllers to help you build safety circuits V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 Refer to Safety Application Controller Product Selection on page 568 and specifications on page 574 SSLIV NS 4 szegd sd d TI C2 o o omnon F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Setting Console Appearance Model Accessories Branching Connector 1 Connector Cap 1 GS iid Special Cable 2 m e JD Instruction Manual a Maintenance Tool on o Appearance Model Applicable Sensors Accessories D Branching Connector 1 V j F3SN A series Connector Cap 1 j F39 MT11 F3SN B series Special Cable 2 m F3SH A series S pecial Cable with Plug 0 3 m 2 9 at a4 Instruction Manual os Fu 5 oo Ui 25 aS For detail see the product datasheet Cat No E355 S7 Branching Connector EF o 29 Appearance Model Remarks S E E gt o Sg bh Purchase this connector when needed additionally for installing the EM S F39 CN1 Way F39 MC11 d o eo Cable with Connector on One End for Emitter and Receiver Set Appearance Cable length Specification Model 3 F39 JCR5A 2 lt A a 7m M12 connector 8 pin F39 JC7A 9 Q2 e 10m F39 JC10A i 15m F39 JC15A T m m m TI Cables with Connectors
200. both ends Aluminum zinc die cast Cap ABS resin Optical cover PMMA resin acrylic Cable Oil resistant PVC Calculate using the following equations For F3SJ ALILIL TL PLILI TS weight g protective height x 1 5 a The values for a are as follows Protected height 245 to 590 mm a 1 100 protected height 1 660 to 2 180 mm a 2 400 Protected height 600 to 1 130 mm a 1 500 protected height 2 195 to 2 500 mm a 2 600 Protected height 1 140 to 1 655 mm a 2 000 Accessories Test rod instruction manual mounting brackets top and bottom mounting brackets intermediate error mode label User s Manual CD ROM x Number of intermediate mounting brackets depends on protective height of F3SJ For protective height from 600 to 1 130 mm 1 set for each of the emitter and receiver is included For protective height from 1 140 to 1 655 mm 2 sets for each of the emitter and receiver are included For protective height from 1 660 to 2 180 mm 3 sets for each of the emitter and receiver are included For protective height from 2 195 to 2 500 mm 4 sets for each of the emitter and receiver are included Applicable standards omnon IEC61496 1 EN61496 1 UL61496 1 Type 4 ESPE Electro Sensitive Protective Equipment IEC61496 2 prEN61496 2 UL61496 2 Type 4 AOPD Active Opto electronic Protective Devices IEC61508 EN61508 SIL3 Response Time F3SJ Ver 2 Model Protective Hei
201. brackets are different F3SN 15 mm F3SJ 42 mm use F39 LJ3 SN opacers for F3SN intermediate mounting bracket replacement V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 F39 LJ3 SN Material Stainless steel SSLIV NS 4 SZt3 sdg i C1 SS J SR omnon F3SJ Ver 2 Using Top Bottom Mounting Bracket B F39 LJ4 Backside mounting Mounting screw holes fT Protective height F39 LJ4 Material Stainless steel Use standard brackets o D gt o o o uonoogjes jonpoJd T 19 x ols 7S Using M5 bolt available range for oO oo PITISRSIODSA TO E mounting is 18 to 20 lt z B C 66 r 4 digit number of the model name protective height e B Note Refer to the User s Manual Cat No SCHG 718 and SCHG 719 for the dimensions for side mounting TI a m Using Mounting Bracket for Short length F3SN F39 LJ5 lt 9 nward facing mounting N Use standard F39 LJ5 Mounting screw holes brackets Material Stainless steel e i O co v e 5 Es 8 C Protective height V HS 4 g8 NS J V NS 4 q 11 5 5 c D o o CO B C 10 N TI m Qo C 4 digit number of the model name protective height C2 5 o omnon F3SJ Ver 2 Mounting screw holes 4 M5 Outward facing mounting
202. cessories Sold Separately Connector Cables with a Connector on One End Specifica tions M12 connector 5 pin r M12connector 8 pin Connector Cables with Connectors on Both Ends Transmitter Cables Receiver Cables Specifica Transmitter M12connector Cables 5 pin Receiver M12 connector Cables 8 pin Series Connection Cables Specifica Transmitter M12connector Cables 4 pin Receiver M12connector Cables 4 pin Cable length Cable length MS4800 CBLTX 10M Model MS4800 CBLTXT 05M MS4800 CBLTXT 10M MS4800 CBLTXT 15M MS4800 CBLTXT 25M MS4800 CBLRXT 05M MS4800 CBLRXT 10M MS4800 CBLRXT 15M MS4800 CBLRXT 25M Model MS4800 CBLTXIC 003M MS4800 CBLTXIC 005M MS4800 CBLTXIC 01M MS4800 CBLTXIC 02M MS4800 CBLTXIC 03M MS4800 CBLTXIC 05M MS4800 CBLTXIC 10M MS4800 CBLRXIC 003M MS4800 CBLRXIC 005M MS4800 CBLRXIC 01M MS4800 CBLRXIC 02M MS4800 CBLRXIC 03M MS4800 CBLRXIC 05M MS4800 CBLRXIC 10M MS4800 Series Application For wiring safety circuits contain ing individual relays with forcibly guided contacts safety relay units safety controllers etc Application Extension cables for connector cables with a connector on one end Application For series connection omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 uonoog es onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 SUOIINEIAId 008v SIN 6 49A
203. ch S2 Interlock lockout reset switch KM1 KM2 Relay with forcibly guided contacts G7SA KM3 Solid state contactor G3 M 3 phase motor El 24 VDC power supply S82K Cable with Connector on Cable with Connector on One End for Emitter One End for Receiver PLC Programmable Controller Pe ISCELLE FS EEDD Used for monitoring This is not a part of a safety system o h it p lt Timing Chart Light incident KM3 Light interrupted eee eee o D gt o o o RS 485 A Gray RS 485 B Pink o cl ele 3 5 It o AE 2 3 a a x External test switch EN i 9 3 12 320 21 Rs e Q oO 2 S 5 2 2 S1 T 1 l 1 l 23 TEE aur es im o O S slo sojs e o9 a 22 amp 59 A e t is Control output o 9 A FAS E e KM1 3 oo KM1 KM2 np N O contact 93 C consc NENNEN a INE 2 0 N C contact o 229 I I I I 29 24 VDC WE aum d E1 PLC output E ium E OV The output operation mode of the auxiliary output is the Dark ON output mode e co Ss An Example of Safety Circuits Where the F3SP B1P Controller is Used For category 4 rating Applicable operation mode d Manual reset mode e pui F3SN ALISS pete S1 External test switch S ko S2 Interlock lockout reset switch RS 3 Lockout reset switch If the switch is not neces
204. ch Connector with Connector Cap be changed in the SD Manager Setting Support Software for the o e Special Cable F3SJ e Special Cable with Plug e Error Mode Label e Instruction Manual Connecting the SD Manager Setting Support Software Connect the F3SJ Communications Unit and personal computer as shown in the following diagram The branch connector can be used 3 Connecting the Setting Console on either the emitter side or receiver side After the F3SJ has been 3g Connect the F3SJ to the Setting Console as shown in the following wired turn ON the power and start the Setting Support Software If it g diagram The Branch Connector can be used on either the emitter is not possible to connect a branch connector because the connector side or receiver side After the F3SJ has been wired turn ON the is concealed by equipment or otherwise inaccessible use the Special power and change parameters as required If it is not possible to Cable with Plug to connect to the and communications lines For o connect a branch connector because the connector is concealed by details refer to the SD Manager s Help function T oz equipment or otherwise inaccessible use the Special Cable with
205. count for brake wear For details consult the manufacturer of the machine d The depth penetration factor Dpf is related to the minimum e detectable object diameter of the MS MSF4800 Determine the o minimum detectable object diameter S and the model number ofthe Ro MS MSF 4800 thatis being used then obtain the Dpf directly from the following table Examples of Minimum Detectable Object S d Additional Safety Distance C and Dpf D Examples of Minimum Detectable Object S Additional Safety Distance C and Dpf Additional safety distance ob Total number of beams Minimum detect tained by ISO 13855 2002 Depth penetration factor us o Model disabled by fixed or float able object diame European standard EN 999 ing the ANSI calculation Dpf i ing blanking ter S mm 1999 calculation C mm Dpf 3 4 S 0 276 inches Q C 8 S 14 30 128 3 1 inches 78 mm MS MSF4800 30 1 50 5 76 inches 146 mm 850 for S 40 mm min 2 or more Greater than 64 36 inches 900 mm V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 None 40 4 4 inches 112 mm 850 for S 40 mm min MS MSF4800 40 lormore Greater than 64 36 inches 900 mm SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 4n oO o o N omnon Installation Reflective Surface Interference N WARNING Install the MS MSF4800 where it will not be affected by reflective surfaces Failure to do so may prevent detection and result in seri
206. d Control output 1 Green Control output 2 White Interlock selection input White pp oo Qe o9 3 Og Uu Sg 2 Zg Wiring for auto reset mode Wiring when the external device monitoring function will not 7 E e The auto reset mode will be enabled when the emitter is be used E wired as shown below e Use a setting tool to set the external device monitoring function to Disabled e When using an auxiliary output 1 that has not been changed output Q operation mode is control output data and inverse of control output S i P di Ry eo signals is Enabled the external device monitoring function will be disabled when auxiliary output 1 and the external device monitoring input are connected as shown below 3 C Communication line Gray lt Communication line Pink D N pem DI TD c or 3 2 2 8 amp a E a 2 g 2 5 xs 8 2 2 2 J E c ee d E z z Gray Communication line i S o z 8 al e Pink Communication line T Z amp Lx Pb O 5 E c 2 P o Cl iz zi 8 s 24 VDC S g 2 5 ST S o Oo Q3 C29 C2 Power o x 5 NNV supply TE 2 TZ OV 9 6 O PU oj 9 S1 External test switch connect to 24 V if the switch is kz not necessary 5 e S3 Lockout reset switch connect to 0 V if the switch is ui Z not necessary gt K4 Load or PLC etc for monitoring p 1 Use a switch for micro loads Input
207. d any one of the following three operation modes can be selected for the muting function 1 Standard Muting Mode This is the default operation mode which is set when the F3SJ is shipped from the factory The muting function is enabled by turning ON muting inputs 1 and 2 with a time lag Note Settings such as the muting time limit value can be changed 2 Specialized Exit Muting Mode Can be set with the SD Manager Setting Support Software only The muting function is enabled by turning ON muting inputs 1 and 2 with a time lag Installation of the muting input sensors is simpler than standard mode because the Safety Light Curtain s blocked light status is used to end muting 3 Position Detection Muting Mode Can be set with the SD Manager Setting Support Software only Sensors such as limit switches are used for the muting inputs and the muting function is enabled by turning muting input from OFF to ON and then turning muting input 2 from ON to OFF within time difference T1 max Use hybrid redundant inputs such as a combination of an N O contact input and an N C contact input When using a PNP output photoelectric switch use L ON operation on one side and D ON operation on the other side This mode is useful when you want to disable the F3SJ temporarily such as when a person is placing an object at the conveyor entrance Partial Muting Muting area Settings The light beams controlled by the muting function can be specified wi
208. d4 d SS J ET oes Safety Sensor Product Selection Confirming Worker Safety while Maintaining Optimum Operability e All Safety Sensors conform to international standards IEC61496 Narrow Openings e Our complete lineup provide a product for virtually any safety application including various sensing distances smallest detectable object sizes and safety categories For equipment and machines For work cells and integrated lines Sensing Distance 10 m max Wide Openings Safety Light Curtain TYPE4 MS4800 Sensing Nb Distance di M 10 m min Mirrors VE F39 MLG TYPE4 F3SS Safety Sensor Product Selection Finger Protection TYPE4 F3SJ ADO00014 Single beam Safety Sensor TYPE4 F3SN ADOOOP14 TYPE4 E3ZS CED F3SJ Ver 2 Note Use in combination with the Controller Safety Light Curtain U h it lt Hand Protection o It gt o o o TYPE4 E3FS BU al Mni T a TYPE4 i F3SN ADOCOP25 TE distance is 60 m F3SN BLILILILIP25 Safety Light Curtain E TYPE4 7 F3SN ALILI_I_IP25 SS 2 Safety Light Curtain uu 2 Type2 ortype4 according to risk Hand ArmBody Protection g assessment TYPE4 D 3 F3SJ AUTCIC 11 130 TYPE4 F3SN ALILILILIP40 TYPE2 Special Controllers LOL dS 4 F3SN B J P40 F3SJ Ver 2 Safety Light Curtain V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 S
209. de cannot be allocated to the other output operations 1 A light blockage was detected even though the output is not turned OFF because the blockage occurred at a light beam subject to fixed blanking floating blanking or muting Blockages are also not processed during overrides 2 The fixed blanking light beams or floating blanking light beams must be set 3 The specified light beam must be set x4 The warning zone light beams must be set O Auxiliary output 1 only O Auxiliary output 1 only O Auxiliary output 1 only O Auxiliary output 1 only O Auxiliary output 1 only O Auxiliary output 1 only omnon Ayayes o it o o o uonoojos onpo4d sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LO L dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o oo oo D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 4n oO o o F3SJ Ver 2 Changing the Detection Distance Change detection distance function Summary The F3SJ s detection distance can be shortened Example Application The F3Su s detection distance can be shortened to avoid affecting other photoelectric sensors When devices are
210. dia vinyl insulated round cable black with 5 conductors Conductor Cross Section 0 32 mm Insulation diameter 1 3 mm Standard length L 10 15 or 30 m Cables with Connector on One End for Receiver Conduct acasin Wire cross outside MS4800 CBLRX 10M L 10 m color im diameter mm 0 52 1 6 dia ro MS4800 CBLRX 15M L 15 m MS4800 CBLRX 30M L 30 m 0 52 1 6 dia 0 52 1 6 dia 1 3 dia D 14 5 dia 5 dia O ellow 1 2 dia Ta vinykinsulated round cable black with 8 conductors ic aL ia vinyl insulated round cable black with 8 conductors Standard length L 10 15 or 30 m Pink 0 32 1 3 dia Black 0 32 1 3 dia Series Connection Cables for Receiver MS4800 CBLRXIC 003M L 0 3 m MS4800 CBLRXIC 005M L 0 5 m MS4800 CBLRXIC 01M L 1 m MS4800 CBLRXIC 02M L 2 m MS4800 CBLRXIC 03M L 3 m MS4800 CBLRXIC 05M L 5 m MS4800 CBLRXIC 10M L 10 m 50 5 ii L T 41 1 AS 4 oo us WIE i AL Dill sse N 7 dia vinyl insulated round cable black with 4 conductors 2 twisted pairs Conductor Cross Section 0 2 mm Standard length L 0 3 0 5 1 2 3 5 or 10 m Series Connection Cables for Transmitter MS4800 CBLTXIC 003M L 0 3 m MS4800 CBLTXIC 005M L 0 5 m MS4800 CBLTXIC 01M L 1 m MS4800 CBLTXIC 02M L 2 m MS4800 CBLTXIC 03M L 3 m MS4800 CBLTXIC 05M L 5 m MS4800 CBLTXIC 10M L 10 m
211. direction n or emitter ve direction m m Positive horizontal l Q2 W direction for emitter NT 0 dd 4 6 8 10 2 2 Negative Distance X m Negative direction horizontal direction Negative direction for emitter 100 for emitter uw c Negative vertical oo o 200 direction TE NAM Negative direction o Negative direction for receiver for receiver 9300 Horizontal direction Vertical direction omnon ow ooa D 7 oz o 7 uonoogjes onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 SUOIINEIAId 008v SIN 6 49A l S J SOL 6E4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 a NSe4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Dimensions Unit mm Main Units Referto the Users Manual SCEE 713 forthe dimensions of models with different connector configurations model numbers ending in 02 to 05 F3SN A JL I II JPL 01 F3SN B J JP J 01 Mounting screw holes 2 mounting holes 6 5 dia 2 mounting brackets NC YA ct n ool yn M5 NOEL DEUM 2 nm Y On or nm 9 25 ss az a 418 38 Y E 2 mounting holes 5 a 4 C1 Protective height Intermediate bracket C2 Protective height M5 up set hexagon bolt Al 4 mo
212. dual 14 to 23 ms Individual 14 to 32 ms Individual 14 to 23 ms 320 ms max 3 5 s max for individual use 4 5 s max for series connection Power supply voltage Vs 24 VDC 20 ripple p p 5 max Current consump Transmitter 285 mA max tion 2 no load Receiver Light source emitted wavelength Effective aperture angle EAA Control output OSSD 3 450 mA max Infrared LEDs wavelength 880 nm Within 2 5 for the Transmitter and Receiver at a sensing distance of at least 3 m according to IEC 61496 2 Output transistor PNP x 2 Load current 625 mA max at 24 VDC short circuit protection Auxiliary output 3 non safety output Output transistor PNP x 1orNPN x 1 selectable with the Programming and Diagnostics Module Load current 100 mA max at 24 VDC Output mode Control output synchronizing or alarm is selectable with the Programming and Diagnostics Module Output transistor PNP x 1 Load current 100 mA max at 24 VDC Output mode Control output synchronizing Output operation mode Control output 1 2 Light ON Auxiliary output Control Output Synchronizing Mode Auxiliary output goes ON when control output goes ON Alarm Mode Auxiliary output goes ON when the MS4800 enters alarm lockout condition Input voltage Transmitter Internal indicators Receiver External device monitoring input ON voltage 11 to 28 8 V OFF voltage 0 to 2 6 V
213. duct Selection on page 568 and specifications on page 574 C Setting Console x Type Appearance Model Remarks e Q Accessories Branching Connector 1 Setting Console F39 MC11 x1 2 Connector Cap 1 T S pecial Cable 2 m O Instruction Manual ti e Q amp m One Connector is supplied with the Setting T Ti Tl i P oa ee ening e onnea F I ddl Console Order extras if needed Tee a gt w gt 1 The functions described in this catalog are supported by firmware version 3 or later They are not supported by products shipped prior to August co 2003 2 2 Functions not described in this catalog such as blanking and output selection are equivalent to those of the F3SN A Safety Light Curtain P Refer to F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A on page 378 for details D m ITI C3 C9 N T noun o 5 o omnon F3SN AL SS Maintenance Tool Appearance Model Accessories Branching Connector 1 j Connector Cap 1 F39 MT11 S pecial Cable 2 m ms S pecial Cable with Plug 0 3 m 9 LM d Instruction Manual For detail see the product datasheet Cat No E355 Mounting Brackets Optional Appearance Specification Model Remarks nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 For Emitter 2 pcs For Receiver 2 pcs Total 4 pcs set Wall mounting bracket Material Iron zinc plating F39 L18 Minimum order quantity 1 pc uonoogjes onpoJd
214. e detection capability of the Safety Light Curtain unit mm Calculation example When K 21 600 mm s Ts 4 Tc 20 06 s brake monitor setting time 0 1s Trz0 01s d 2 14 mm Tbm 0 1 0 06 20 04 s Dpf 23 4 x 14 7 0 223 8 mm S 1 600 x 0 06 0 01 0 04 23 8 2199 8 mm Method for Calculating the Safety Distance as Provided by ANSI RIA R15 06 USA Reference S ystems with a Smallest Detectable Object Size Diameter Greater than 64 mm and Less than 600mm The safety distance is calculated based on the following concepts when the human body intrudes perpendicular to the detection zone of the Safety Light Curtain K x Ts Tc Tr Dpf e S Safety distance e K Intrusion speed into detection zone 1 600 mm s min recommended by OSHA e TS Stop time of machine equipment s e Tr Light curtain ON to OFF response time s e Tc Maximum response time of the machine equipment braking circuit required to operate the brake s e Dpf Additional distance mm If the Sensor is installed with the lowest beam height above the floor at 300 mm or lower and the highest beam height above the floor at 1 200 mm or higher the Dpf will be 900 mm If the Sensor is installed with the lowest beam height above the floor at 300 mm or lower and the highest beam height above the floor at 900 mm or higher the Dpf will be 1 200 mm Precautions for All Safety Sensors Calculation example K 21 600 mm s Ts Tc 0
215. e fewer than the set number 1 2 or 3 beams When an object whose size exceeds the set number of beams intrudes the output is turned OFF For example in an application where a conveyor cart approaches a robot work area the Safety Light Curtain can be set so that it does not detect only the wheels of the cart allowing the MS MSF48004A to be used as a presence sensing device Muting Functions MSF4800A Only Use of the MS4800 RM6 Resource Module sold separately makes it possible to temporarily disable the S afety Light Curtain S elect from among four muting modes to match each application with the appropriate number and placement of muting sensors Note For details on blanking and muting refer to the Mini Safe 4800 Series Safety Light Curtains Installation and Operating Manual omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpo4d sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaJd 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o oo Dn D 72 oz o UOI 998 9S jonpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IIV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 4n oO o o MS4800 Series Diagnostic Functions External Device Monitoring EDM MPCE Monitoring This function detec
216. ea Obstacle Transmitter Reflection Receiver Reflective surface Hazardous area borderline MS4800 Series Fig 4 Worst Placement Example This example shows the minimum distance d from the reflective surface to one of the beam centerlines 9 Receiver E Sensing distance R A Transmitter Z NE Directional angle a Reflective surface Hazardous area borderline Fig 5 Sensing Distance vs Minimum Distance from the Reflective Surface Minimum distance d mm Sensing distance m Prevention of Mutual Interference N WARNING Do not use the sensor system with mirrors in a retro reflective configuration Doing so may hinder detection It is possible to use mirrors to change the route of the light When using more than 1 set of MS MSF4800 install them so that mutual interference does not occur such as by configuring a series connection or using physical barriers between adjacent sets The MS MSF4800 is equipped with two scan codes A and B to reduce mutual interference from other Safety Light Curtains The Transmitter and Receiver must both be setto the same scan code to enable the Receiver to change to Machine Run State omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suoinneoaud LOL dS 4 SOL 6E4 c 49A PSEA 008v SIN V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3
217. eaches the hazardous area resulting in serious injury After setting the floating blanking function always verify that the F3SJ system operates as expected Serious injury may result if an individual is not detected Example Application When there is a moving object with a fixed width in the detection area that we do not want to detect the detection function can be disabled Description of Functions Floating Blanking Function This function increases the diameter of the smallest detectable object to allow passage of objects of a certain size or allow interrupting objects in multiple locations Setting the Floating Blanking Area When the Setting Console is being used all of the light beams are set as the floating blanking area When the SD Manager Setting Support Software is being used just one area can be set but the range of the area can be specified In the following example the floating blanking area is set from the 5th light beam to the 10th light beam counting from the bottom An interrupting object can be placed in the detection area to perform teaching and specify light beams for manual settings Higher Higher Light beam 10 Floating blanking area OS Light beam 5 Lower Lower Floating Light Beams The following charts show the relationship between the number of floating light beams and the safety output operation safety output not going OFF Measure the size of the interrupting object maximum d
218. eam Safety Sensors or Safety Light Curtains connected to the same or different Control Units before finalizing placement and starting normal operation When installing multiple Safety Light Curtains Multi beam Safety Sensors and Single beam Safety Sensors take necessary steps to prevent mutual interference Otherwise detection may fail and serious injury may result omnon MEMO omnon nw a D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S jonpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS J V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 SS J Single beam Safety Sensor for Long Distance Detection F3SS 60 m long distance detection This transmissive type photoelectric sensor for human body detection Type 4 is ideal for integrated protection of an entire line or multi sided detection of intrusion into large machines e Mutual interference protection function for up to four sets eComplies with IEC standards and North American standards received IEC61496 1 2 and UL CSA certification Can be used as a safety guard for satisfaction of OSHA requirements for on site labor safety in North America S pecial controller not needed Detection of human body intrusion is possible using just the sensor unit eIncludes Start restart interlock function to prevent automatic reset of output e The projector lens and
219. eceiver nt 24 VDC 24 VDC noom w _ co a pm S i to Rm e E a OMNE 2 KM1 9 C gt a ko tc st O 5 2 3h E eB g O o dp 23 2 N 5 S 9 5 KM2 t g O 2 O O o 5 c o O Terminal names or numbers are given in brackets E1 24 VDC power supply recommended S82K S1 Start switch to release interlock NC contact KM 1 KM2 DC driven high sensitivity contactors e g J 7AN Timing Chart Light incident Light interrupted Start switch S1 Control output KM1 or KM2 NO contact KM1 or KM2 NC contact EE FF EET l um EENNNN Auto start Mode Emitter Receiver pum SS Ems S A 4 a T TI ji T Ground terminal Ground terminal O e x Q gt L KM1 a gt Ps o z fear lt 5 2 o N a 2 o a 5 3 eN gt Oo o wt 7 3 el amp 2 KM2 S 5 O O o c Oo O Terminal names or numbers are given in brackets E1 24 VDC power supply recommended S82K KM1 KM2 DC driven high sensitivity contactors e g J 7AN omnon Timing Chart Light incident Light interrupted Inm __ Control output B KM1 or KM2 NO contact KM1 or KM2 NC contact E Num 4TH F3SS Connection with OMRON G9SA 301 Safety Relay Unit Category 4 Emitter Receiver E M BP LLLA Em LU di LE HE ALi
220. ection to the MS4800 Auxiliary protection Auxiliary protection L Two axis MSF4800 Protection Strengthening Rigidity during Installation To increase rigidity it is recommended that mounting brackets be added when installing an MS MSF 4800 system that has a length of 1 000 mm or more Use the T slot groove on the back of the MS MSF 4800 to install the mounting brackets to the rear surfaces of both the Transmitter and Receiver Alternative T slot mounting mmis Alternative T slot mounting Note When the alternate T slot mounting is used to secure the MS MSFA800 the mounting bracket can no longer be used to adjust the beams Installing Multiple Systems When installing two or more MS MSF4800 systems with the same scan code in a line in close proximity measures must be taken to prevent mutual interference between the systems This problem can be solved by positioning Transmitters and Receivers back to back or by stacking the systems Staggering Positions When Installing Multiple Safety Light Curtains Recommended Installation Transmitter Receiver Receiver Transmitter Machine 1 Code A Code A Non recommended Installation Transmitter Receiver Transmitter Receiver Machine 2 Machine 1 Code A Code A The MS MSF 4800 scan code function can also be used to install multiple systems in a line in close proximity S pecial coding for the light beams allows unique system operation and
221. ed Floating Range With 2 floating light beams oo a D 72 o c o 7 With 3 floating light beams With 4 floating light beams 30 Size of Interrupting Object mm F3SJ ALJ20 Series uonoogjes onpoJd 93 o P9 O 2 with 1 floating light beam a NS 20 o2 TT ZY With 2 floating light beams With 3 floating light beams e eo With 4 floating light beams o 20 30 40 a Size of Interrupting Object mm e F3SJ ALI25 Series lt D m3 N a With 1 floating light beam P G With 2 floating light beams c With 3 floating light beams o With 4 floating light beams Ds d 30 40 50 60 A Size of Interrupting Object mm F3SJ ALI30 Series V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 With 1 floating light beam D Z With 2 floating light beams gt o With 3 floating light beams o With 4 floating light beams m m W C2 40 60 NTI oo Size of Interrupting Object mm F3SJ AL 155 series 7 Permitted Floating Range as b e abi MO eae iudi o o With 1 floating light beam With 2 floating light beams With 3 floating light beams With 4 floating light beams 80 120 Size of Interrupting Object mm omnon Warning Zone Function Summary The detection zone can be divided into the detection zone anda warning zone The warning zone output is not a safety output Do not include this area in the safety distance calculation Shortening the safety distance may result in seriou
222. ed to mount the F39 LSP or F39 LM45 to a wall without using a pipe F39 LA Top and Bottom Brackets F39 LA Top bracket 6 85 dia 22 Bar ks center of tab F39 LA Bottom bracket Using the F39 LM45 and F39 LA to Mount the F39 MSS MSG Mirror to a Wall F39 MSS MSG F39 LM45 Safety Precautions Observe the following precautions when using the F3SS Regulations and Standards The F3SS has not received the type certification provided by Article 44 2 of the Industrial Safety and Health Law of J apan Therefore it cannot be used in apan as a safety device for pressing or shearing machines provided by Article 42 of that law Safety Distance Always maintain a safety distance S between the F3SS and a hazardous part of a machine Failure to do so causes the machine to fail to stop before an operator reaches the dangerous area and may result in serious injury Refer to the Precautions for All Safety Sensors on page 242 for calculating the Safety distance Precautions for Safe Use Do notused the product in atmospheres or environments that exceed product ratings Refer to the nstruction Manual for details on installation connections and operating methods omnon F3SS nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 uonoojes onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4
223. ediate brackets to match protective height 0 to 2 Intermediate brackets for side mounting 1 When using for both emitter and receiver order two sets 2 The same four digits indicating protective height that are used in the Sensor model number L J are used in the 1 I part of the Protector model number F39 PJ MS For side mounting order to suit the desired protective height Protective height of up to 1 000 mm 0 intermediate brackets Protective height of 1 001 to 2 000 mm 1 intermediate bracket Protective height of 2 001 mm or more 2 intermediate brackets Water resistant Case Set of 1 tube packing and dedicated connector cable 1 2 Appearance e gt E ao Ve r E i 4 Specifications For emitter Model F39 EJ I J L 3 Remarks Includes gray cable for emitter For receiver Rear Mounting Brackets Side Mounting Brackets Series connection cable for emitter Series connection cable for receiver 1 When using for both emitter and receiver order two sets 2 There are restrictions to the application conditions depending on the protective height of the Curtain Refer to the Water resistant Case on page 303 F39 EJ J D 3 F39 EJ R 4 F39 EJ S 4 F39 JJR3WE L F39 JJR3WE D Includes black cable for receiver Top bottom 1 each total of 2 Top bottom 1 each total of 2 Purchase additionally for se
224. el amema C C 100 to 150 of ON threshold level uonoog es onpo4d 75 to 10096 of ON threshold level Lit Not lit am SoS oo ess lt lt C C CO 50 to 75 of ON threshold level 3 g CO CO CO CO CO Less than 50 of ON threshold level 33 Cause of error o Lx c c e selection input line or the reset input line is not wired correctly or became Relay contact S welded Releasing time of the relay takes too long z m The EDM input line is not wired correctly or became open D Ele meds Wiot Communication line RS 485 is not wired correctly became open or causes other errors a ee One of the OSSD outputs is shorted or is not wired correctly i Flashing Notlit r r Other failure in OSSD outputs E C3 Mutual interference Interference light is received Ls Types of the receiver and emitter are not the same T Numbers of the receiver and emitter connected in series are not the same External noise Internal hardware failure of the receiver or the emitter y 3 Engineering Data Typical Examples T Ti Ti 02 C2 Qoo Parallel operating range Angular range Angular range T22 Angle of elevation Angle of rotation gt U D gt F3SN A1107P14 F3SN A1107P14 F3SN A1107P14 c 300 D o E D T 2 Positive direction gt 8 200 amp for receiver Positive direction D S for receiver Oo z Positive vertical A direction N 100 eis
225. ency stop switch E t E uU DE F39 JCOA L L F39 JCOA D D LJ LJ o lt d E o Communication line 4 Gray Qu E 8 9 5h el 9 2 gt Communication 2 a s s N al S z line Pink S8 la Sl Qa E 3 2 8 2 2 Eg zi nc ol 9 5 9 x 5 6 o S a 2 dm 3 el i s e ej 8 saz E E S 3 og E 3 9 iz oS 5 if o9 o g o S o2 co E 24 VDC OV 0 eo S D z 900 08 S 1 If an emergency stop switch is not used connect 2 E control output 1 to T12 terminal and control i 3 output 2 to T23 directly S1 External test switch connect to 24 V if the a i switch is not necessary d L S2 Interlock reset switch e S3 Emergency stop switch direct opening contacts A165E A22E PE 25 23 22 A S4 Lockout reset switch connect to O V if the e Egon sor oh switch is not necessary b KM1 KM2 Magnetic contactor o un KM3 Solid state contactor Gi3J Timing Chart Light incident A M 3 phase motor Light interrupted ar EED TES E a a E E1 24 VDC power supply S82K TT T xternal test switch A i EE 55 S1 L1 Ll LI PLC Programmable controller IZZ Interlock reset switch o E Fog Used for monitoring not related to safety DU S2 E EE H system Emergency stop switch co eo is E WE Wiring for auto reset mode D Control output E Hb DRAMA ae Q I l I I Fog gt K1 K2 N O contact
226. ensor bottom M 12 straight connector Sensor top No connector Application e Standalone detectable object Appearance Operating range 0 2 to 3 5 m Protective height mm Number of beams F3SN AL SS Model F3SN A0217P25SS 04 F3SN A0262P25SS 04 F3SN A0352P25SS 04 F3SN A0427P25SS 04 F3SN A0502P25SS 04 F3SN A0592P25SS 04 F3SN A0667P25SS 04 F3SN A0742P25SS 04 F3SN A0832P25SS 04 F3SN A0907P25SS 04 F3SN A0982P25SS 04 F3SN A1072P25SS 04 F3SN A1147P25SS 04 F3SN A1222P25SS 04 F3SN A1312P25SS 04 F3SN A1462P25SS 04 F3SN A1627P25SS 04 Protective height mm 16 32 43 48 54 64 75 86 96 107 Number of beams F3SN A1792P25SS 04 Model F3SN A0217P25SS S F3SN A0262P25SS S F3SN A0352P25SS S F3SN A0427P25SS S F3SN A0502P25SS S F3SN A0592P25SS S F3SN A0667P25SS S F3SN A0742P25SS S F3SN A0832P25SS S F3SN A0907P25SS S F3SN A0982P25SS S F3SN A1072P25SS S F3SN A1147P25SS S F3SN A1222P25SS S F3SN A1312P25SS S F3SN A1462P25SS S 16 27 38 48 59 70 so 86 107 F3SN A1627P25SS S F3SN A1792P25SS S Note 1 A Connector Cable is not supplied with the Main Unit and must be purchased separately The overall length of the cable connecting a Safety Light Curtain to the DC power supply must not exceed 10 m 2 Two ferrite cores are provided with Safety Light Curtains th
227. equipment ESPE in accordance with European Union EU Machinery Directive Index Annex IV B Safety Components Item 1 3 The F3SJ A complies with the following legislation and standards 1 EU Regulations Machinery Directive Directive 98 37 EC EMC Directive Directive 2004 108 EC 2 European standards EN61496 1 TYPE 4 ESPE prEN61496 2 TYPE 4 AOPD EN61508 1 to 7 SIL3 3 International standards IEC61496 1 TYPE 4 ESPE IEC61496 2 TYPE 4 AOPD EN61508 1 to 7 SIL3 4 JIS standards JIS B9704 1 TYPE 4 ESPE JIS B9704 2 TYPE 4 AOPD 4 The F3SJ A received the following certification from the EU accredited body TUV SUD e EC type test based on machinery directive Type 4 ESPE EN61496 1 Type 4 AOPD prEN61 496 2 e T V S D Type Certification Type 4 ESPE EN61496 1 Type 4 AOPD prEN61 496 2 e SIL1 2 3 EN61508 1 to 7 Application EN954 1 categories B 1 2 3 4 5 The F3SJ A has received certificates of UL listing for US and Canadian safety standards from the Third Party Assessment Body UL e Type 4 ESPE UL61496 1 Type 4 AOPD UL61496 2 6 The F3SJ A is designed according to the standards listed below To make sure that the final system complies with the following standards and regulations you are asked to design and use it in accordance with all other related standards laws and regulations If you have any questions consult with specialized organizations such as the body responsible for presc
228. equire the use of a Programming and Diagnostics Module PDM to program the operating parameters of the Light Curtain In addition to Safety Light Curtain configuration this Module also serves as a diagnostics device allowing the user to retrieve fault information e Displays programming and diagnostics information on a multi line LCD display e Supports English and J apanese languages To switch between English and J apanese continue to press the right Forward Backward Scroll Button more than ten times at the log in screen that appears after the PDM is connected to the MS MSF 4800 e The housing is rated IP 65 allowing permanent mounting near the S afety Light Curtain Note The light curtain does not require the PDM to operate The factory default settings allow for basic guarding operation Programming Diagnostic Module Up Down Scroll Buttons Enter Button Forward Backward Scroll Buttons Sti MS4800 PDM For the MS MSF4800 to comply with IEC 61496 1 and UL 508 the DC power supply unit must satisfy all of the following conditions e Must be within rated power voltage 24 VDC 20 e Must have tolerance against the total rated current of devices if it is connected to multiple devices e Must comply with EMC directives industrial environment e Double or enhanced insulation must be applied between the primary and secondary circuits e Automatic recovery must be possible for overcurrent protection e
229. er F3SX E L2R category 4 PNP models only e Emergency stop switch can be connected e Door switch two hand control single beam or relay unit can be used in combination with F3SX e Various settings can be changed and input output terminals can be monitored using the setting support software for F3SX Wiring when safety light curtain F3SJ is not used Main Module 24 VDC E1 24 VDC operation command S1 Emergency stop switch direct opening contacts A165E A22E S2 Reset switch KM1 KM2 Magnetic contactor LC1D RY1 RY2 Relay M 3 phase motor E1 24 VDC power supply S82K Note 1 This wiring example is for category 4 2 This example shows the connection when auxiliary output 1 is in the standard setting ON when light is interrupted 3 When the F3SJ is series connected or 5 or more sets are connected to the total system of F3SX power must be supplied to F3SJ from external source For details see instruction manual of F3SX omnon L2 Module prom c M M cr or o m o s n H OT c ml c do i E m ae t n R aul F3SJ 1st unit 3 Emitter i Receiver _ _ n L E Model F39 JCOA L fA A Model F39 JCLIA D cable for emitter cable for receiver pee l Communication l line Gray Communication Zs line Pink a 3 s 8 s x
230. erlock restart interlock Must be set with a setting tool when the muting function is used External device monitor Muting Lamp burnout detection override function included F39 CN6 key cap for muting is required Fixed blanking must be set by a setting tool Floating blanking must be set by a setting tool omnon LOL dS 4 SOL 6 4 6 49A l S J V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o 297 nw a D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S 1ONpOld SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud LOL dS 4 SOL 6E4 c 49A PSEA 008v SIN V HS 4 g8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 4n oO o o F3SJ Ver 2 PNP outputs Connection type I IP25 F3SJ A IP30 F3SJ A F3SJ A IP55 P14 F3SJ A ILIP20 F3SJ A I IN25 F3SJ A I IN30 F3SJ A F3SJ A N55 N14 F3SJ A I_IN20 F3SJ A Connectors M12 8 pin Protective circuits Output short circuit protection and power supply reverse polarity protection Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Ambient operating light intensity Operating 10 to 55 C no icing Storage 30 to 70 C Operating 35 to 85 no condensation Storage 35 to 95 Incandescent lamp 3 000 Ix max light intensity on the receiver surface Sunlight 10 000 Ix max light
231. erly resulting in serious injury Safety Distance N WARNING Be sure to secure the safety distance between the MS MSF4800 and the hazardous part Otherwise the machine may not stop before a person reaches the hazardous part resulting in serious injury Note The response time of a machine is the time period from when the machine receives a stop signal to when the machine s hazardous partstops Measure the response time on the actual system Also periodically check that the response time of the machine has not changed How to Calculate the Safety Distance Specified by International Standard ISO 13855 2002 European Standard EN 999 1999 Reference The following explanation is based on standard EN 999 This standard applies to Safety Light Curtains used in an industrial environment Systems with a Detection Capability of 40 mm Max Use the following calculation for a system that detects objects with a minimum detectable diameter of 40 mm max S KxT C Where S The shortest distance in mm between the hazardous partand the detection point edge surface or area K 2000 mm s T The time in seconds required to stop the entire system T tt b tl The response time in seconds of the Safety Light Curtain This response time is listed in the Response Time on page 257 b Maximum time in seconds required to stop the machine C 28 d 14 mm however this must be 0 or more d Minimum detectable object in mm of the MS MS
232. eset input Emergency Reset input light E3SN stop switch Emergency interrupted light OFF stop switch incident ON Note This timing chart does not allow for I O device response delays omron IE F3SN AL SS F3SX EL2 Auto reset For category 4 rating Emitter F3SN ACISS Receiver a Wiring for use of the test function of the Light Curtain _ F39 JCLIA L or gt F39 JCLIA D or F39 JCOED L IE F39 JCOEL D Cable with it 1 Cable with Connector on One Connector on One End for Emitter End for Receiver l l l l l l l l I l l l l l l aae aa 4 CN RS 485 A e c nw to 2 812 8 8 gray o D 1O zlc 292 5 i 2c HF Sas CNET
233. essary S2 Interlock lockout reset switch K1 K2 Relay or other device that controls hazardous parts of the machine K3 K4 Load or PLC etc for monitoring Receiver 1 Use a switch for micro loads Input specifications 24 V 1 8 mA 2 F3SJ operates even when K3 and K4 are not connected nw Dm D 72 o lt o Gray Communication line z Red Pink E Communication 5 line uonoosJ os onpoJdg Test input Green 24 V Brown Auxiliary output 2 Red Reset input Yellow Auxiliary output 1 Yellow Interlock selection input White External device monitoring input Vg RE 8 ES 2 o So o2 a ELS Q eo S Wiring for auto reset mode Wiring when the external device monitoring function will not e The auto reset mode will be enabled when the emitter is be used T wired as shown below e Use a setting tool to set the external device monitoring function to o Disabled lt e When using an auxiliary output 1 that has not been changed output Ax operation mode is control output data and inverse of control output signals is Enabled the external device monitoring function will be T disabled when auxiliary output 1 and the external device monitoring input T are connected as shown below Q Communication line Gray D Communication line Pink Z O O D 2 2 3 8 v J D 3 5 SI ED x al 3 S 5 Q Qa Q a SE
234. f the detection capability To calculate a safety distance be Sure to use the increased size of the detection capability Failure to do so causes the machine to fail to stop before an operator reaches the dangerous area and may result in Serious injury AN Use of the Fixed Blanking Function F3SN A only AN AN AN Refer to the Precautions for All Safety Sensors on page 242 for calculating the Safety distance Response Time Table Protective Response time R Number of mm OFF ON 180 to 450 20 to 50 10 0 40 F3SNACOOO 459 to 765 51 to 85 12 5 50 P14 01 774 to 1 080 86 to 120 15 0 60 1 089 to 1 125 121 to 125 15 5 62 Protective Response time Number of mm OFF ON F3SN A 1 J 217 to 772 13 to 50 10 0 40 P25 01 F3SN BOOOC 787 to 1 297 51 to 85 12 5 50 P25 1 312 to 1 822 86 to 120 15 0 60 omnon Protective Response time Model height died OFF to mm ON F3SN ALI II 217to757 7 to 25 10 0 40 P40 01 787 to 1 297 26t043 12 5 50 F3SN BOQOC P40 1 327 to 1 807 44 to 60 60 Protective Response time Model height a OFF to mm ON F3SN AL IIT 277 to757 5 to 13 10 0 40 SA 817 to 1 297 14 to 22 12 5 50 F3SN BOQOC P70 1 357 to 1 777 23 to 30 60 e Response time for series connected types is calculated as follows F3SN A For 2 sets Response time ON to OFF Response time of Light curtain 1 Response time of Light curtain 2 3 ms
235. ffix 05 gt ee Relay welded return time too long or external relay monitor line wiring mistake or broken line Test LocKout Interlock POWER ERROR A B 6 1 2 3 4 5 LEVEL di o Communications line R S 485 wiring mistake broken line or other error Test LocKout Interlock POWER ERROR A B c 1 2 3 4 5 LEVEL S Control output short wiring mistake or control output circuit fault omron RY lt o Qo Dum D 7 o lt o UOI 99 9S jonpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J SOL 6E4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 SS J F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Ordering Information Main Units Connecting Cables are not included with the Main Units The connecting cables must be purchased separately F3SN A Safety Light Curtains Type 4 Operating range Beam gap Detection capability 14 mm dia for finger protection 25 mm dia for hand protection 40 mm dia for presence protection 70 mm dia for presence detection Number of Protective beams height 189 to 1125 mm every 18 mm 217 to 1822 mm every 15 mm 21 to 125 odd numbers only 13 to 120 L Infrared Connector for series Model 1 2 connection Noo F3SN ACIOOOP14 F3SN ACIOOOP14 01 F3SN ALI_ILILIP25 01 217 to 1807 mm 2 7 to 1777 mm
236. functions can be used even without a setting tool A setting tool can be used to make more detailed settings omnon nw Dm D 7 o lt o 7 uonoogjos onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suoineoaud 008vt SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS J V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 n oO o o F3SJ Ver 2 Two Kinds of Setting Tools The following accessories sold separately can be purchased in SD Manager Setting Support Software for the order to use various F3SJ series functions and change settings F3SJ e F39 MC21 Setting Console 0 A Setting Console can easily make settings onsite The following items are included with the F39 GWUM SD Manager Setting Support Software for the F3SJ e F39 GWUM SD Manager Setting Support Software for the F3SJ With this software a personal computer can be connected to make P CD ROM SD Manager setting Support Software for the F3SJ Communications Unit Driver settings The SD Manager Setting Support Software for the F3SJ C Digo Uni can make more detailed settings than the Setting Console VOmIMUnICAONS a e Branch Connector with Connector Cap e Special Cable Setting Console e Instruction Manual Installation Guide ot The following items are included with the F39 MC21 Setting Console e Special Cable with Plug E Setting Console The F3SJ s operating status can be checked and its parameters can gg Bran
237. g Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008t SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o 373 F3SP TO1 Dimensions Unit mm F3SP TO1 Status indicators LEDs From left to right PWR RY1 K1 RY2 K2 TEST RESET and AUX Modular Connector for Light Curtain Support Software I O terminals PR Two 4 2 dia holes G7SA 3A1B K1 G7SA 3A1B K2 Ayayes o D o o o Oll oO oO o Ol oO oO o Ol oO oO Ol oO oO Oll oO col Oll oof col Ol oO oO Of oO co Ol oO oO 4 Oll oof col Ol oO oO o Ol oO oO o Relay contact output terminals uonoogjes onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 4n GO o o SY omnon Safety Precautions NWARNING Do not operate the product in atmospheres containing flammable or explosive gas Arcs or heating of relays during switching may cause fire or explosion Do not use a load that exceeds the contact ratings or switching capacity Doing so may cause the product to fail to perform its specified functions causing insulation failure contact welding or contact failure It may also cause damage to the F3SP TO1 or burning
238. g Fog oo i Qo PLC input 1 Depends on the output operation 5 mode of the auxiliary output I PLC input 2 PLC output omnon MS4800 Series Example When Connected to the G9SX AD322 T15 Controller Category 4 MS MSF 4800 Settings e Auto start mode e External device monitoring not used e Test input used Use the PDM to enable the test input G9SX AD322 T15 Settings e Auto Reset Mode Transmitter Receiver e Feedback loop used pape pim S1 External test switch S2 Start input KM1 to KM4 Magnetic contactors e M1 M2 3 phase motor PLC Programmable Controller E1 24 VDC power supply Used for monitoring This is not a part of a safety system nw oa D 7 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd z X D 2D 9 S 2 8 e a Z E 8 S e Feedback loop T E e o o 3 m a m ea Q l o e 3 em l Motor controller c Q p OOS Z gt E ao g 5 nj s E Mo vs of B E gt gt g 8 8 Bl Bl a 2g 9 o z al 5 e 3 B o KM1 1 KM1 X A KM3 4 4 4 lt iS E L Q Q amp Doo T i 2 E S Bg E 2 E g 6 5 KM2 2 8 KM2 A KM4 X X M o i f 3 E E l g KM3 x l KM4 ci l o ER lt 24 V L El N Ground 62612 62629 5 62693 61 ia oO P G9SX AD322 T15 e Control circuit B ES oO o P e um Wiring for the Manual Re
239. gap in L shaped installations U shaped configuration The cable F39 JJRO6L does not get in the way when used in series connections omnon F3SJ Ver 2 New functions for extra reliability Combine safety and productivity with a controller less muting function The muting function temporarily disables the light curtain when an object must pass through the detection zone such as when supplying a workpiece to your equipment l l In the past this function required a dedicated muting controller but now it is built into s Vh d ean HAA E ue he F3SJ ey Cap sold separately to the sensor He F39 CN6 To use the muting function purchase the F39 CN6 Key Cap for Muting sold Key Cap for Muting separately The muting function is enabled simply by replacing the Unit s cap with this Dictus a due Lo adi ai D an Key Cap In addition a muting sensor that determines the muting timing as well as a idi pn E muting lamp that communicates the muting status to other operators should be connected to the F3Su A measure to prevent you from forgetting to connect a series connection cable The connectors for series connection feature an intelligent design To connect a series connection cable to the F3SJ remove the Key Cap that is required when the sensor is used by itself If you should happen to forget to connect the series connection cable the sensor will not operate by itself without the Key Cap This solves the problem of sensors oper
240. ght mm Number of Beams Response time ms ON to OFF response time ms OFF to ON 245 to 263 26 to 28 11 281 to 389 30 to 42 48 407 to 497 44 to 54 52 515 to 605 56 to 66 56 PORO 623 to 731 68 to 80 60 series 767 to 983 84 to 108 17 5 70 1 055 to 1 271 116 to 140 80 1 343 to 1 559 148 to 172 90 1 631 180 100 245 16 40 275 to 425 18 to 28 44 455 to 635 30 to 42 12 48 F3SJ AL120 665 to 815 44 to 54 13 52 Senes 845 to 995 56 to 66 56 F3SJ AL P20 TS 1 235 to 1 655 82 to 110 70 1 805 to 2 105 120 to 140 80 F3SJ AL_ 25 series F3SJ A P25 TS series 2 255 to 2 495 150 to 166 22 5 90 260 to 320 13 to 16 40 340 to 580 17 to 29 44 600 to 840 30 to 42 48 860 to 1100 43 to 55 52 1120 to 1340 1360 to 1600 56 to 67 14 56 68 to 80 15 60 1620 to 2240 81 to 112 2260 to 2500 113 to 125 245 to 395 10 to 16 420 to 720 17 to 29 FSSJ AL 30 1 070 to 1 295 43 to 52 13 52 series 1 395 to 1 620 56 to 65 1 745 to 1 995 70 to 80 2 120 to 2 495 85 to 100 2 0 to 770 6 to 16 F3SJ A 155 820 to 1420 17 to 29 11 44 series 1470 to 2070 30 to 42 12 48 Response time ON to OFF Response time OFF to ON 2120 to 2470 For 3 set series connection Response time ON to OFF Response time OFF to ON For 4 set series connection Response time ON to OFF Response time OFF to ON 43 to 50 13 52 Note Use the following expressions for series connection For 2
241. h W Weight Sensors Safety Light Curtains Stop Switches PAST EMSS 4 sets a 1 set e F3SX EB1 45 0 mm Approx 0 3 kg 8 sets ies 1 set m F3SX E B1B1 67 5 mm Approx 0 4 kg 4 sets su 1 set 2 sets F3SX E B1D1 67 5 mm Approx 0 4 kg 4 sets 2 sets 1 set 22s F3SX E L2B1 67 5 mm Approx 0 4 kg Instant Breaking Models F3SX E I II R with Relay Safety Output and DC Solid state Safety Output Input types E3ZS E3FS Safety F3SJ F3SN F3SH Emergency Model Width W Weight Sensors Safety Light Curtains Stop Switches Boor sies 4 sels hea F3SX E B1R 90 0mm Approx 0 5 kg omnon OFF delay Time Setting Models Using Function Setup Software for the F3SX F3SX N RR2 with Relay Safety Output and DC Solid state Safety Output E3ZS E3FS Input types E3ZS E3FS Safety F3SJ F3SN F3SH Emergency Model Width W Weight Sensors Safety Light Curtains Stop Switches Poor sve es 4 sets x 1 set 2 sets F3SX N B1D1RR2 157 5 mm Approx 0 7 kg 4 sets 2 sets 1 set us F3SX N L2B1RR2 157 5 mm Approx 0 7 kg OFF delay Time Setting Models Using Function Setup Software for the F3SX F3SX E I R2 with Relay Safety Output and DC Solid state Safety Output Input types E3ZS E3FS Safety F3SJ F3SN F3SH Emergency Model Width W Weight Sensors Safety Light Curtains Stop Switches Pro SX 4 sets ds 1 set F3SX E B1R2 90 0 mm Approx 0 5 kg 4 sets RR 1 set F3SX E B1D1R2 112 5 mm Approx 0 6 kg 4 sets 2 sets 1 set F3SX E L2B1R2 11
242. he F39 MC21 Setting Console or F39 GWUM SD Manager Setting d Support Software for F3SJ See the Ratings and Performance data for other differences between this and standard models 4 S9 Safety Light Curtain Model List Products other than those listed below are also available Please contact your OMRON sales representative for details C2 a F3SJ A14 Series 9 mm gap Model No of Protective Model No of Protective PNP Output NPNOutput Beams Height mm PNP Output NPN Output Beams Height mm F3SJ A0245P14 F3SJ A0245N14 245 6 F3SJ A0263N14 28 F3SJ A0605P14 F3SJ A0623P14 F3SJ A0605N14 66 605 8 F3SJ A0623N14 6 623 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 F3SJ A0659P 14 F3SJ A0659N14 72 659 F3SJ A0695P 14 F3SJ A0695N14 76 695 F3SJ A0731P14 F3SJ A0767P14 F3SJ A0803P 14 F3SJ A0731N14 8 731 0 F3SJ A0767N14 84 767 F3SJ A0803N14 88 803 F3SJ A0839P 14 F3SJ A0839N14 92 839 F3SJ A0875P14 F3SJ A0875N14 96 875 F3SJ A0911P14 F3S
243. he User s Manual to determine whether the functions can be used in combination or not omnon Ayayes o it o ce o uonoojes onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008vt SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o F3SJ Ver 2 Dimensions Unit mm Main Units When Using Standard Mounting Brackets Backside mounting ow Dn D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd ga o 9 o OOS Mounting screw holes n D o 2 Top bottom mounting brackets 9 o 2 2 Mounting hol eU g holes Z ids 4 M5 R t OO F e b T 6 25 e e TI C3 o e 22 7 lt Intermediate mounting 2 M5 H D bracket N a B A i Tl 42 T B l C Protective 4 height oO Ol Tl E C2 o m e prg IN 1 10 4 Mounting holes j zz 37 TAA mmm m os Q 9 600 Y A v Y i TZ 6 5 dia 13 75 C protective height 4 digit number in the table Es EID 2 Mounting holes bo 0 da A C 74 B C 46 5 D C 20 E See table below m D Z 1 5 dia M12 Waterproof connector P Rea gt D 0245 to 0596 0 0600 to 1130 mm 1136 to 1658 zb 1660 to 218
244. he information on protective height specifications to calculate the height For example ifthe beam gap is 9 mm and the No of beams is 21 the protective height will be 9 x 21 2189 mm The model with this protective height is F3SN A0189P 14 2 F3SN ALILIL TL IP 14 01 is a customized model Consult with your dealer or OMRON representative when ordering this model 3 Only models ending in 01 03 04 or 05 have this output and functionality 4 For the factory setting the manual reset mode is set to the start restart interlock Using the F39 MC11 can select either the start interlock or the restart interlock 5 For the factory setting the function is not set It can be enabled with the F39 MC11 6 Not provided with the F3SN ALILILILIP 70 and F3SH A Weight packed state Accessories Applicable standards nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 uonoojos onpoJd NSD 7 The intermediate mounting bracket is supplied with the following types 2 DS Types which have the total length of the light curtain from 640 mm to 1280 mm 1 set for each of emitter and receiver S o amp Types which have the total length of the light curtain over 1280 mm 2 sets for each of emitter and receiver oo 8 Models with different connector configurations are also available as options Refer to Many Connector Variations on page 379 o I Co e e Tl C3 7 c
245. he muting indicator output contains a current monitoring circuit to confirm normal operation Connect an external indicator load that supplies 10 to 100 mA of current uonoojes jonpoJd Programming and Diagnostics Module Item Model MS4800 PDM Display LCD multi line display SsJosuag Language capability English J apanese Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud Degree of protection Conforms to IP 65 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 4n oO o o omnon Connection Circuit Examples Examples of Safety Circuits Example When Using the MS MSF4800 Individually Category 4 MS MSF4800 Settings MS4800 Series Use Start Restart Interlock Mode Use the PDM to set the operation mode to Start Restart Interlock Mode Use the external relay monitor function Use the PDM to turn ON the EDM function Use the test input Use the PDM to enable the test input Transmitter Shield Green Test input White Test input return Black External device monitoring input Red 2 Start input Yellow 24 VDC OV Ground Light incident Light interrupted Co D 3 vo o ei D N PLC output aH E E Auxiliary output Pink The output operation mode of the auxiliary output is the Dark ON output mode Receiver S1 External test switch S2 Start input KM
246. he product Mounting Brackets Intermediate nn Material Iron zinc plating M5 x 7 bracket fixing screw Intermediate bracket 3 LN dubi M4 x 6 sensor fixing screw bracket 2 Note Provided with the product The number of brackets required depends on the total length of the Sensor Intermediate bracket 1 Accessories Optional Cables with Connector on One End F39 JCR5A L 0 5 m F39 JC10A L 10 m F39 JC3A L 3 m F39 JC15A L 15 m F39 JC7A L 7 m Lk gt _f 39 5 T 15 dia y Waterproof connector Vinyl insulated round cable 6 6 mm dia 8 cores 4 twisted pairs conductor cross sectional area 0 3 mm insulation outside diameter 1 15 mm dia Standard length L L 3 7 10 15 m Color Emitter gray Receiver black Cables with Connectors on Both Ends F39 JCR2B L 0 2 m F39 JC7B L 7 m F39 JCR5B L 0 5 m F39 JC10B L 10 m F39 JC1B L 1 m F39 JC15B L 15 m F39 JC3B L 3 m F39 JC20B L 20 m F39 JC5B L 5 m F39 JC30B L 30 m F39 JC40B L 40 m F39 JCR2C L 0 2 m F39 JC1C L 1 m F39 JC3C L 3 m F39 JC7C L 7 m F39 JC10C L 10 m F39 JC15C L 15 m Waterproof connector Waterproof connector P Vinyl insulated round cable 6 6 mm dia P 8 cores 4 twisted pairs conductor cross sectional area 0 3 mm insulation
247. height is 217 to 592 mm a 800 when the protective height is 667 to 1222 mm a 900 when the protective height is 1312 to 1792 mm p 0 for models with no suffix or ending with 01 B 2100 for models ending with 02 B 200 for models ending with 04 Accessories Applicable standards Test rod instruction manual error mode label mounting brackets top and bottom mounting brackets intermediate 7 IEC61496 1 EN61496 1 Type 4 ESPE Electro Sensitive Protective Equipment IEC61496 2 Type 4 AOPD Active Opto electronic Protective Devices 1 Use the following equations to determine series connection response time Series connection with two sets Response time ON OFF Sensor 1 response time Sensor 2 response time 3 ms Response time OFF 0ON Sensor 1 response time Sensor 2 response time 12 ms Series connection with three sets Response time ON OFF Sensor 1 response time Sensor 2 response time Sensor 3 response time 4 ms Response time OFF 0ON Sensor 1 response time Sensor 2 response time Sensor 3 response time 16 ms 2 Models ending in 01 and 04 only 3 The test indicator orange on the Emitter and the blanking indicator green on the Receiver will flash to indicate the need for preventive maintenance when the total ON time exceeds 30 000 hours 4 The glossary and functions are the same as those for the F 3S N A Series Refer to F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A on page 378 5 The default setting of
248. hem e You cannot use the product if the positive side is connected to ground e NC terminals have no function Do not connect them Wiring the Terminal Block e Insert the wires using the following procedure Flexible wires 1 Use a flat blade screwdriver to push in the lever and 2 insert the wire Solid wires or ferrules Insert the wire into the wire hole and push all the way to the back Operating the lever is not required e Remove the wires using the following procedure same for flexible wires solid wires and ferrules 1 Use a flat blade screwdriver to push in the lever and 3 pull out the wire to base and is within the following standards Side Front view view Dimension D 0 3 to 0 8 Dimension E 2 9 to 3 6 We recommend the following flat blade screwdrivers for inserting wires D E Recommended Screwdrivers Model XW 4Z 00B XW 4Z 00C omnon Mounting to and Removing from DIN Track e To mountthe productto a DIN Track release the slider lock place the product on the DIN track and then lock the slider e After using the slider lock make sure that the lock is engaged on the DIN Track e To dismount the product from the DIN Track place the driver in the slider section release the lock and then remove the product from the DIN Track e Secure both ends of the Safety Terminal Relays with End Plates The following products are sold separately Screwdriver PFP 50N gem DIN Tracks P
249. ht stes S D C 44 oo Side mounting L lt e N Mounting screw holes T ada When using M5 When using M6 M8 2 M8 e 4 M5 i e eo Nags Bee OF 2 M6 d Ur ba mmm C3 G C9 NN Tae B B PU A 7 Protective height d o Z gt o o mm C3 C9 22 D o Y 2 Y d Y E i C so Dimensions A to D i 7wU n 2 Mounting Brackets d A C 4 108 o B C 76 The Mounting Brackets F39 EJ S are E rately MEE C 4 digit number of the model pala separately name protective height D C 44 omnon nw oo D 7 oz o 7 uonoogjes onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LO L dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 i C2 o o F3SJ Ver 2 Connection Circuit Examples Examples of Safety Circuits For PNP output See page 337 for NPN output wiring Wiring for single F3SJ application category 4 e Use of welded relay contact detection and interlock is possible without a controller or relay unit Shield Timing Chart r ul Emitter C F39 JCLIA L Communication line Gray Communication line Pink Reset input Yellow External device monitoring input Red o E N 2 Q O 2 il amp X 2 c 24 VDC E1 OV Light incident T i Light intermipted EM External test switch S1 Reset switch
250. i 320 When replacing the F3SN with the F3SJ 2 Bb F3SN Intermediate the mounting hole pitches in the Bracket Replacement F39 LJ3 SN Intermediate Brackets are not the same 1 set with 2 pieces Spacers This Spacer is placed between the J mounting holes to mount the F3SJ i Mounting bracket used when replacing LEA Tosbotomanodifin existing area sensors other than F3SN or for emitter 2 F3WN with the F3SJ bracket B mounting hole F39 LJ4 For front mounting 2 for receiver LI Suitable for mounting hole pitch of 18 to iE d 20 mm L A Mounting bracket used when an F3SN 2 for emitter e LI dl E dfc F39 LJ5 with protective height of 300 mm or less is 2 for receiver g replaced by an F3SJ total of 4 per set e rg a UR brackets to mount facing for emitter bracket Length is 12 mm shorter than the standard total of 4 per set z F39 LJ1 bracket p x4 u Mounting bracket used when replacing ES CE Mounting bracket used existing F3W C series area sensors with 2 for emitter 4 when replacing an F39 LJ9 the F3SJ 2 for receiver F3W C For front mounting or side mounting total of 4 per set 7 Mounting hole pitch 16 mm B v Top bottom mounting Mounting bracket used when replacing 2 for emitter A bracket C mounting hole F39 LJ11 existing area sensors having a mounting 2 for receiver Key cap for muting pitch 13 mm Appearance A 4 omnon Model F39 CN6 pitch of 13 mm wi
251. ial number Year of manufacture 9 F3Su s version number Verify that the version is Version 2 or later Functions Editable with Setting Tools O Can be used x Cannot be used Function or monitored item Fixed blanking function 1 F39 GWUM SD Manager Setting F39 MC21 Setting Console Support Software for the F3SJ OQ Floating braking function 1 Settings for Warning zone function 1 individual Muting function 2 applications when using the muting system Override function 2 O OO Safety distance calculation function 1 Power cable length calculation Function 1 Rated response time check 1 Other functions when using the muting system 2 O Auxiliary output k2 O O Specified light beam output function amp 1 x O Indicator and I O EI settings External indicator output 2 O O Interlock function 3 amp 2 o D External device monitoring function 2 IQ O Changing detecilon distance Change detection distance function 1 O O Light intensity indicators 1 O O onitoring T T CL operation Ambient light intensity indicators 1 O O Status indicators 1 x O Maintenance information Power ON time 1 oO Number of load switching operations 1 O O Recovering settings Recover settings function 1 O O x O x O Q 1 These functions were newly added in Version 2 A setting tool can be used to enable these functions or read the function settings 2 These
252. iameter and set the number of floating light beams so that the object s size is less than the corresponding dimension shown in the chart omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaJd 008v SIN 6 49A FSES S0 1 6 4 LOL dS J V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o F3SJ Ver 2 Example Setting Floating Blanking Mode When an F3SJ A 14 is being used with an interrupting object that is The floating blanking function has two operation modes 20 mm in diameter set three light beams as floating light beams With 1 Continuous Light Beam Mode this setting the F3Su s safety output will not turn OFF even if there is The safety output will not go OFF if the interrupting object is smaller an interrupting object up to 22 mm wide in the floating blanking area than the set size although the safety output will go OFF if objects pass through several areas in the detection area The floating blanking monitor function can be set in this mode Refer to the User s Manual for details 2 Discontinuous Light Beam Mode A light blockage is detected when the number of light beams blocked in the area is equal to or greater than the preset number of one Settable Range i With 1 floating light beam Example ris Size light beams Effective Range vs Number of Floating Light Beams F3SJ AL 4 Series Permitt
253. iary output 1 2 l Red External device monitoring input mm V Oo l Blue Power supply 0 V d Jl LP fe o I L doko E E E CN7 MSA1 CN8 MSB1 CN5 MSA2 sk CN6 MSB2 Muting Sensor Al Muting Seen Bl Muting Mean Muting ie B2 Use the following connecting cable to connect the Muting Sensors M 12 4 pin connector Pin 1 24 V Pin 2 Not used Pin 3 0 V Pin 4 Output When using a Through beam Photoelectric Sensor use an XS2R D426 L I11 F Y joint with Socket and Plug or similar product to connect the transmitter and receiver omnon ow a D o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J SO0 1 6 4d LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 Pee ee SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 SS J F39 TC5 NPN Model with Muting Sensor Output Mode F39 TC5NO1 Note When a short circuit connector is connected to CN1 terminals 1 and 2 and terminals 3 and 4 will be short circuited CN2 COMM This connects the Muting Sensor input to Setting Console F39 MC21 muting input 1 and muting input 2 of the F3S CN3 L CN4 D or CN1 F3SJ A Emitter HH F3SJ A Receiver PC Tool for F3S F39 GWUM Muting Sensor output 9999699 19999 90996 Blue Power supply 0 V ft er Tr 5066 d055_ CN5 MSA2 CN6 MSB2 Muting dram A2 Muting Lae
254. icates the ambient light level at the F3SJ from other light sources such as photoelectric sensors This function can help identify the photoelectric sensors that are the source of the light interference and identify the light beams being affected by the ambient light MEMO omnon Wire saving Device for F3S Significantly reduces the number oo o o 2L o c o D Muting Sensors can be easily connected with wire saving devices UOI 99 9S jonpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 6 49A l S J SO 1 6 5 LO1 dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 J i T i o Provides IP67 protection The wiring status can against water and dust be checked at a glance with the LED indicators D _ i LED Indicators 3 Connection using The Setting Software can be oO connectors significantly connected enabling on site adjustment of the Light Curtain To Connect to Muting Sensors gt the Safety Light Curtain and the Muting Sensors Safety Light Curtain and These new Wire saving Devices enable ea Connector Terminal Box P360 P of wires between mE y II UE g gI F39 GWUM SD Manager PC Setting Support Software F3SJ Ver 2 Safety Light Curtain Setting Console Four Muting Sensors Wire saving Device for F3S sily using the muting function of the F3S Gees a Fs F8
255. il to work properly resulting in serious injury Pee gt omnon Do not use a sensor system in a reflective configuration Doing so may hinder detection Mirrors can be used change the optical route When using more than 1 set of Safety Light Curtain install them so that mutual interference does not occur such as by configuring series connections or using physical barriers between adjacent sets Precautions for Safe Use Do notused the product in atmospheres or environments that exceed product ratings Installation Prevention of Mutual Interference For series connection Refer to the Precautions for Correct Use for individual models for information on preventing mutual interference of linkable Safety Light Curtains For no series connection When installing two or more pairs of light curtains independently from each other due to inconvenience of wiring or other reason take proper measures to prevent mutual interference If mutual interference occurs a lockout condition will result for the Safety Light Curtain e Installation which may cause mutual interference Incorrect Receiver 1 Emitter 2 lu dal Emitter 1 Receiver 2 Incorrect Emitter 1 Receiver 1 Emitter 1 Emitter2 Receiver 2 oo gt Ol e Installation to prevent mutual interference 1 Install so that the two light curtains emit in the opposite directions staggered
256. in mm Refer to Safety Light Curtain Model List on page 381 for model number details 3 Safety Light Curtains with model numbers ending in 02 through 05 provided with different connector configurations are also available as options Refer to page 379 for details Consult with your dealer or OMRON representative when ordering these models F3SH A Multi beam lemme Sensors Type 4 C Infrared Beam gap Appearance Operating range irs E Ear IE Model No F3SH A09P03 300 mm for whole body protection Yes F3SH A09P03 01 Safety Light Curtains of model numbers ending in 02 through 05 provided with different connector configurations are also available as options Refer to page 379 for details Consult with your dealer or OMRON representative when ordering this model omnon F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Safety Light Curtain Model List _ F3SN BLILILILIPLICI safety light curtains are also available F3SN ADOOOP14 01 e Ee Model Protective per So eee F 3SN A0189P 14 01 21 F3SN A0513P 14 01 513 57 F 3SN A0837P 14 01 93 F3SN A0207P 14 01 207 23 F3SN A0531P 14 01 531 59 F3SN A0855P 14 01 855 95 F3SN A0225P 14 01 225 25 F3SN A0549P 14 01 549 61 F3SN
257. ination of E3FS and E3ZS n a E Sensors can be connected to the B1 Module of the F3SX 2 D MT y Note Since the ESFS has not received any safety certification for use by i lt itself make sure to connect it with an F3SX for use in safety applications d P O Ol c U uF Q V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 C2 o o omnon ow on D 7 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpo4d SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S 3 S0 1 6 4 LO L dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SE pE i C2 o o E3ZS E3FS Ordering Information Sensors Sensor method Sensing distance Appearance Connection Polybutylene terephthalate 0 2to3m Pre wired cable 2 m Through beam Be qu wi a Brass Me connector Controller Instant Breaking Models F3SX N L I IL R with Relay Safety Output BEEN idiom pwp X 10m Red light Infrared light Output Model E3ZS T81A E3FS 10B4 2M ESFS 10B4 M1 M Input types Width W Weight 4 sets fst resnem 90 0 mm Approx 05g 4 sets zu 1 set 4 sets F3SX N B1D1D1R 135 0mm Approx 0 7 kg Instant Breaking Models F3SX E with DC Solid state Safety Output Input types E3ZS E3FS Safety F3SJ F3SN F3SH Emergency Model Widt
258. ine 0 3 A 40 m max connector section After applying 500 VDC for 60 s 100 MO min Vibration resistance Speed 10 Hz to 500 Hz to 10 Hz in 20 minutes Simple vibration with full amplitude of 1 52 mm or 98 m s whichever has the smaller amplitude for two hours each in three directions X Y and Z total of 6 hours Measured while connector is connected Shock resistance 490 m s for 11 ms three times each along three axes six directions X Y and Z total of 18 times Measured while connector is connected MIL STD 202F Test 213B Condition A Ambient operating temperature Ambient operating humidity Degree of protection Accessories omnon 25 to 70 C with no icing or condensation 25 to 85 with no icing or condensation IP 67 S hort circuit connector models with Muting Sensor outputs only waterproof cover F39 TC5 Connections Internal Circuit Diagrams PNP Model with Muting Sensor Output Mode F39 TC5P01 Note When a short circuit connector is connected to CN1 terminals 1 and 2 and terminals 3 and 4 will be short circuited _ CN2 COMM This connects the Muting Sensor input to CNS L CN4 D Setting a a muting input 1 and muting input 2 of the F3SJ F3SJ A Emitter F 3S A Receiver PC Tool for F3S F39 GWUM Muting Sensor output HERE 1 22 0 00 0 0 0 7 CD 2 9 00 4 Q0 2 9 2 1 I OHS HAAA LLLE LL Brown Power supply HH 24 VDC olen Pink Test input
259. ing area Fixed Blanking allows the Safety Light Curtain to remain in the RUN state while the obstruction is fixed as a non moving object within the sensing area The output is turned OFF when a beam other than the set fixed blanking beams is interrupted or when light is incident on a fixed blanking beam Floating Blanking This function turns OFF the output when the total number of interrupted beams inside the sensing area exceeds the number of set beams 1 or 2 Monitored Blanking This function is used when a machine or workpiece constantly interrupts beams in a part of the sensing area and moves within the sensing area Monitored Blanking allows the Safety Light Curtain to remain in the RUN state while the obstruction moves within the sensing area The output is turned OFF when the machine or workpiece disappears from the monitored blanking area that was setby teaching or when the total number of interrupted beams increases due to a different obstruction Reduced Resolution Blanking When the resolution of the MS MSF 4800A is reduced the size of the smallest detectable object is increased The output will not turn OFF regardless of how many continuous interrupted beams there are in the sensing area as long as the beams are fewer than the set number 1 2 or 3 beams When an object whose size exceeds the set number of beams intrudes the output is turned OFF For example in an application where a conveyor cart approaches a robot work
260. ins in that state until the object is removed When the intrusion into the sensing area disappears the system automatically changes from the Machine Stop State to the Machine Run State Start Interlock If no objects are in the sensing area when the power is turned ON in Start Interlock Mode and an alarm lockout condition does not occur the system enters the Interlock State To shift to the Machine Run State an operator must press and release the Start Button on the S afety Light Curtain If an object intrudes in the sensing area during the Machine Run State the system will change to the Machine Stop State When the objectis removed from the sensing area the system will automatically shift to the Machine Run State Start Restart Interlock If no objects are in the sensing area when the power is turned ON in Start R estart Interlock Mode and an alarm lockout condition does not occur the system enters the Interlock State To shift to the Machine Run State an operator must press and release the Start Button on the Safety Light Curtain If an objectintrudes in the sensing area during the Machine Run State the system will change to the Machine Stop State When the object is removed from the sensing area the system will shift to the Interlock State instead of automatically shifting to the Machine Run State To shift to the Machine Run State an operator must press and release the Start Button When there is an object in the sensing area
261. installed close together shortening the detection distance can reduce mutual interference Description of Function The detection distance can be set to 0 5 m 1m 2m 3m 5m or MAX either 7 m or 9 m The most suitable detection distance can be set to match the installation distance Note MAX represents the rated detection distance Monitoring Operation Received Light Intensity Indicator Summary It is possible to read the F3SJ s received light intensity Example Application Adjust the light beams while checking the F3Su s received light intensity Description of Function Indicates the F3Su s received light intensity The F3SJ s received light intensity level can be checked with a setting tool Other Functions The F3SJ is also equipped with the following functions Refer to the User s Manual for details on using these functions e Status indicators e Error log e Power ON time Number of load switching operations Safety distance calculation function Power cable length calculation function Rated response time check function omnon Ambient Light Intensity Indicator Summary It is possible to read the intensity of the light received by the F3SJ from ambient sources such as other photoelectric sensors Example Application Display the ambient light level while taking steps to reduce light interference form sources such as photoelectric switches in the area and neighboring F3SJ Units Description of Function Ind
262. ions on page 389 for details m ITI M Environment resistant Enclosures Package of a Pipe Gasket and Bracket Appearance Applicable sensor Model F3SN ADOOOP 14 01 F39 HPL T 11 7 14 3 F3SN ADOOOP 25 01 O F3SN ADOOOP 40 01 F3SN ADOOOP 70 01 e F3SN BLIDLILP 25 Pazera ee F3SN BOOOOP 40 5 F3SN BOOOOP 70 ay F 3SH A09P 03 01 F39 HPH09 03 Purchase 2 sets when using both an emitter and a receiver omnon F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Multi beam Sensor Support Stands Mirror Stands Appearance Specification Model Remarks Stand unit Materials Base STKM base SUS 304 leaf spring Pipe bolts and nuts SUS304 Weight 11 8 kg Minimum order quantity 1 pc F39 ST1 In total 2 stands are required for each F3SH A one for the emitter and the other for the receiver nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 Minimum order quantity 1 pc In total 6 brackets are required for each F3SH A 3 units each for emitter and receiver These brackets are not required for the F 39 MLG series reflection mirrors since these mirrors are supplied together with a specially designed adapter i i Mounting bracket Materials Aluminum F39 L22 Weight 250 g UOI 99 9S onpoJd Mounting Brackets for Sensors Optional 93 o 9 Appearance Specification Model Remarks S Ta X Wall mounting bracket orem eps i LJ Manal ea cic plating xk F39 L18 For receiver 2 pcs
263. istance An error code is also displayed when an error is occurs This function is provided only on the Receiver q 5 E g Ec o o o 5 E 9 m m Receiver Transmitter C3 C2 NTI Receiver Transmitter oo When the beams are not aligned T aM 3 o 1 The IBIs turn ON at the positions where the beams are interrupted When the beams are aligned The IBIs turn ON at the positions This notifies the operator that the beams are interrupted all IBIs turn OFF where the beams are shifted omron Zi nw oo D 72 o lt o UOI 998 9S jonpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008t SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 MS4800 Series Four Blanking Functions for Disabling Beams advanced series only MM When a machine or a workpiece is present inside the sensing area of the Safety Light Curtain the output turns OFF and the machine cannot be started However a blanking function can be used to disable the appropriate beams of the Safety Light Curtain and allow work to continue without stopping the machine The MS4800 Series provides four blanking functions to combine both safety and productivity in a wide range of applications Fixed Blanking P This function is used when a machine or workpiece constantly interrupts beams in a part of the sens
264. it F3SN AL SS Safety Light Curtains Type 4 A Connector Cable is not supplied with the Main Unit and must be purchased separately Connection method Sensor bottom Sensor top No connector M12 straight connector M12 straight Connector Application e Standalone e Lastsetina series connection Second of 2 sets connected in series or third of 3 sets connected in series Not the last set in a series connection first of 2 sets connected in series orfirstor second of3sets connected in series For external indicator installations Back connector with 0 4 m cable No connector omnon Standalone When dimensions at the bottom of the Sensor are restricted Lastsetin a series connection second of 2 sets connected in series orthird of 3 sets connected in series Min detectable object Beam Appearance 15 mm Operating range 0 2 to 3 5 m 1072 Protective height Number of beams mm Model 13 F3SN A0217P25SS 262 16 F3SN A0262P25SS 22 F3SN A0352P25SS 427 27 F3SN A0427P25SS 32 F3SN A0502P25SS 592 38 F3SN A0592P25SS 667 43 F3SN A0667P25SS 742 48 F3SN A0742P25SS 832 54 F3SN A0832P25SS 59 F3SN A0907P25SS 982 64 F3SN A0982P25SS 70 F3SN A1072P25SS 1147 75 F3SN A1147P25SS 80 F3SN A1222P25SS 1312 86 F3SN A1312P25SS 1462 96 F3SN A1462P25SS 1627 107 F3S
265. it Stability Operation indicator indicator 1 Green 1 Receiver Main Connects to the control circuit output terminal 1 x1 a Connects to the 0 V m u ais terminal 1 Emitter 1 When using in Safety Category 2 configurations make sure all terminals on the B1 Module of the F3SX are properly connected Do not connect the terminals to another module See the F3SX operation manual for details 2 Make sure to connect the pink wire mode selection input 2 to 24 VDC 3 Make sure to connect to the OV terminal when the E3ZS is not connected to an F3SX and the test input is not used Timing Charts Output Modes and Timing Char Light interrupted Operation ON orange output OFF Emitter Timing Chart OFF Emission ON JN 8 OFF Operation ON indicator OFF orange Note The F3SX performs self diagnosis every 20 ms ESFS Circuit Diagrams ESFS 10B4 with PNP Output Output mode ON when light is incident Light ON I O circuit Lit when OFF Lit whe ON Wl 8 Green Heceiver resistance 1 I of the output I IC Blue Lit when i emitting x1 Connects to the 0 V terminal I I Emitter I I Blue 3 1 Make sure all terminals on the B1 Module of the F3SX are properly connected Do not connect the terminals to another Module See the F3SX operation manual for details 2 Make sure to connect the pink wire
266. itions can be attained only by achieving safe usage installation maintenance and operation of the MS MSF4800 These factors must be thoroughly confirmed by the customer who purchased the MS MSF4800 as well as installers and employers Precautions for Users N WARNING The MS MSF4800 must be installed set and integrated into the mechanical control system by a qualified technician who has received the appropriate training Installation by an unqualified person may prevent the MS MSF4800 from operating correctly with the result that people may go undetected and serious injuries may occur When changing parameters with the Programming and Diagnostics Module the change must be made and the contents of the change must be managed by the person in charge of the system Unintentional or mistaken parameter changes may prevent detection of people and result in serious injury The manager of the system is responsible for the selection and training of personnel to properly install operate and maintain the machine and its safeguarding systems The MS MSF4800 must be installed verified and maintained by a qualified person A qualified person is defined as someone who holds credentials or certification proving that he or she has received relevant professional training or someone whose ability to solve problems related to the specific matters or operations at hand has been verified by considerable knowledge training or considerable experie
267. je 39 l I I 39 l Y Y B 1 1 1 M5 l i i M5 Mounting hole Interme diate brackets 3 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 20 a 3 75 6 25 13 75 4 Mounting holes 2 Mounting holes 6 4 M3 bolts with 2 Mounting holes hexagonal holes and attached washers Protective support Mounting bracket 1 SSLIV NS 4 C protective height 4 digit number in the table A C 74 B C 46 5 Number of intermediate brackets used 3 o SZ 3 SJ 3 0245 to 0995 1001 to 2000 2009 to 2500 C3 SS 4 Note For reference D is the dimension that will not interfere with the intermediate bracket on the Safety Light Curtain body omnon F3SJ Ver 2 Side mounting oo ow 9n D 7 oz o 7 Mounting screw holes QU Oo o 8 3 M5 bolts with O E Ed Mounting bracket 2 j 2c aA 9 hexagonal holes and When using M5 When using M6 M8 oL eo 9 dia attached washers 20 L 5 6 5 dia 13 75 2 M8 y 6 4 M5 3 75 6 25 OSD t y P2 e 9 oe o 2 EE eum a OS Los 2 M6 9o 9 o lt D D Intermediate Lou i RT EE B brackets 4 for side e mounting C Protective l 39 39 height Y e 1 I I M5 I 1 1 M5 lt D Th N Sensor H oO l i i oO Ol T
268. k state Normal operation A sensor enters interlock state when e The power is turned ON start interlock This is useful if you want to keep the machine stopped until start inspection is completed after the power is turned ON e F3SJis interrupted restart interlock After F3SJ is interrupted and the machine stops the machine can be restarted after safety is ensured For PNP output 1 Connect the interlock selection input line to 9 to 24 V pin 1 white Connect the reset input line to 9 to 24 V via the reset switch NO contact pin 4 yellow Keep the reset switch contact open and turn the power of F3SJ Ver 2 Manual Reset Wiring Procedure For NPN output 1 Connect the interlock selection input line to O to 1 5 V pin 1 white Connect the reset input line to 0 to 1 5 V via the reset switch NO contact pin 4 yellow Keep the reset switch contact open and turn the power of F3SJ ON To reset For PNP output Apply voltage of 9 to 24 V for 250 ms or longer to the reset input line and set it open or to 0 to 1 5 V Note Install the reset switch outside the hazardous area where the F3SJ ON For NPN output Apply voltage of 0 to 1 5 V for 250 ms or longer to the reset input line and set it open or to 9 to 24 V operator can clearly see the hazardous area Interlock Function in a Muting System Because the interlock selection input line is used as muting inpu
269. kets to mount a sensor on its side the bracket protrudes outward in front of the lens surface When this protrusion is of concern use the F39 LJ2 side mounting brackets sold separately Easy to change from previous models When replacing your previous standard multiple beam area sensor use the F39 LJ4 top bottom mounting bracket B sold separately which features enlarged mounting holes i Can be used with a pitch of 18 to 20 mm omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 uonoogjos onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaJd 008t SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o ow ox D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 SUOIINEIAId 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 i C2 o o F3SJ Ver 2 A variety of features are provided for easier use Resistant to mutual interference No wiring between sensors and no interference for up to three sets OMRON has developed a unique interference light prevention algorithm that automatically prevents malfunction even when light is received from three sets This feature is ideal for applications where it is not possible to perform wiring with an interference sensor such as between an A
270. l I Y 0 0 Q2 AA t e ul 6 20 me 3 75 6 25 5 2 Mounting holes H 3 20 Q 2 Mounting holes 4 Mounting holes PUREE S SUPPONI 4 M3 bolts with hexagonal holes and attached washers Mounting bracket 1 The four intermediate brackets F39 PJ MS for side mounting are not provided V HS 4 g8 NS J V NS 4 o o gt o o C protective height 4 digit number in the table Co G3 A 2 C 74 B C 46 5 Oo Protective height Number of protective D brackets used 4 0245 to 0995 0 T 1001 to 2000 1 B 2 if 2009 to 2500 2 B 3 Note For reference D is the dimension that will not interfere with the intermediate bracket on the Safety Light Curtain body omnon F3SJ Ver 2 Water resistant Case F39 EJOOOCO L D Backside mounting Mounting screw holes 60 5 dia MS 20 When using M5 When using M6 M8 2 M8 4 M5 8 tas No H 2 M6 2 a nw D D t l4 3 O lt m B B A C D q 1 Protective height EE Ov O ge o amp 3 di i oS M 228 aos E HI 32 le y 34 Y o S o y Jif fe o 7 A C 108 7 20 Pg 8 lt B C 4 76 2 Mounting Brackets i EJ 4 digit number of the model name ls enia Brackets F39 EJ R are protective heig
271. l S J S0 1 6 4 LO L dS J V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o MS4800 Series Adaptor Cables for Replacement Use Type Misi Cable length Model Application M 12 connector For replacing an MS4600 with 8 pin bile test input with an MS 4800 e Forreplacing an F3SL orMS4600 Cables i c 0 22 m MS4800 ADPT TXS without test input with an p MS 4800 s Recei M12 t F laci F3SL orMS4600 5 eceiver connector i i orreplacing an or UEM Cables 8 pin eum eo UE USEUA with an MS4800 0 Loose wire Connectors for Relays Type Appearance pid Cable length Model Application 1m MS4800 PMCTX 01M Transmitter E M12 connector Cables CN AU 5 pin 5m MS4800 PMCTX 05M Loose wire connectors for mount ing in relay boxes 77 1m MS4800 PMCRX 01M Receiver W D M12 connector UOI 99 9S onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008vt SIN Cables TA 8 pin MS4800 PMCRX 05M 6 49A l S J Programming and Diagnostics Module PDM Appearance Mod Remarks SOL 6E4 MS4800 PDM Cable length 2 m LOL dS 4 Mirrors 1296 Sensing Distance Attenuation n T TI C3 C9 C9 T22 Appearance Width mm Thickness mm Length mm Model ai 406 F39 MLG0406 3 610 F39 MLG0610 o 711 F39 MLGO0711 E 914 F39 MLG0914 O 1 067 F39 MLG1067 Glass mirror 145 3
272. l c on RE S2 5 A A TEI D 9 z 24 V BES e c E1 opc 8693 68 696 69 69 2 060 909 HE Control circuits 24 VDC TER oo i F3SX EL2 s zi 24 VDC S e o DEES SIE 5 lt N e E1 24 V c e e e oe e E DST else v s 9 2 e 8 olg 2 cli 8 82 o aS L 992 5s Ee r 9 o gt g gt 296 Slza S 2 o a s O0s5 Szaz 5 319 c a 57 gt 2 8 8 oz cls gt s9 8 Z o od Q o o PESER o OP gsi a amp zg22 9g eg p E1 T Ble lea 21 S cs 23 S 8 U 24 V 5 o E RS 485 B o pink EA I X KM1 S1 Emergency stop switch A165E A22E S2 Reset switch fff X TT A KM1 KM2 Relay with forcibly guided contacts Q2 02 02 wy a M Three phase motor o E s S E1 24 VDC power supply S82K PU gt T i Note 1 The above circuit diagram conforms to Category 4 2 In this connection example the auxiliary output is set to the 22 standard setting Dark ON operation gt 7 ESSROAISE T To operate using non standard settings refer to the catalog or gt Eroiiier MSCSIVOr Instruction Manual for the F3SN ALISS x Timing Chart Use the optional F39 MC11 Setting Console to disable the EDM o Reset switch S2 oN OFF ON Emergency stop SZ 3 SJ 3 switch S1 F3SN ALISS control outputs 1 and 2 F3SX EL2 SS1 SS2 I C3 KM1 KM2 j o OFF E i E ii Stop i I i l l l Reset input F3SN R
273. l connection Applicable safety category Detection capability Beam gap P Opaque objects 14 mm in diameter 9 mm Opaque objects 20 mm in diameter 15 mm Opaque objects 25 mm in diameter 20 mm Opaque objects 30 mm in diameter 25 mm Opaque objects 55 mm in diameter 50 mm Number of beams n 26 to 180 16 to 166 13 to 125 10 to 100 6 to 50 Protective height PH 245 to 1 631 mm 245 to 2 495 mm 260 to 2 500 mm 270 to 2 470 mm Lens diameter Operating range Diameter 5 mm 0 2 to 9 m protective height 1 640 mm max 0 2 to 7 m protective height 1 655 mm min Depending on the setting tool the detection distance can be shortened to 0 5 m Response time ON to under stable light OFF incident condition For details see Response Time OFF to on page 301 ON 1 set 0245 to 983 11 ms to 17 5 ms max 1 055 or higher 20 ms to 25 ms max 1 set 0245 to 983 44 ms to 70 ms max 1 055 or higher 80 ms to 100 ms max 1 set 0245 to 1 205 10 ms to 15 ms max 1 235 or higher 17 5 ms to 22 5 ms max 1 set 0245 to 1 205 40 ms to 60 ms max 1 235 or higher 70 ms to 90 ms max 1 set 0260 to 1 600 10 ms to 15 ms max 1 620 or higher 17 5 ms to 20 0 ms max 1 set 0260 to 1 600 40 ms to 60 ms max 1 620 or higher 70 ms to 80 ms max 1 set 10 ms to 17 5 ms max 1 set 40 ms to 70 ms max 1 set 10 ms to 13
274. le amplitude 20 sweeps in X Y and Z directions EE Shock resistance Malfunction 10G 1 000 times in X Y and Z directions S E Materials EO ADU polyurethane powder coating 33 Accessories Test rod Instruction Manual mounting set 2 top 2 bottom mounting brackets surge absorber IEC 61496 1 EN 61496 1 UL 61496 1 Type 4 ESPE Electro Sensitive Protective Equipment e Applicable standards IEC 61496 2 prEN 61496 2 UL 61496 2 Type 4 AOPD Active Opto electronic Protective Devic S es IEC 61508 SIL3 Response Time t Curtains Used Individually 1 segment System Curtains Used in Series Connection 3 segment System S Minimum number Response time ms Minimum number Response time ms __ of beams of beams Normal Delayed of beams ber of beams Normal Delayed 423 3 3 17 23 38 60 114 32 53 T 7 32 53 115 a 68 127 180 41 68 169 228 50 83 d 181 50 83 224 256 59 99 K 236 256 59 99 Sg Curtains Used in Series Connection 4 segment System Curtains Used in Series Connection 2 segment System Minimum number Maximum num Response time ms 327 Minimum number Maximumnumber Response time ms of beams ber of beams Normal Delayed 292 of beams Normal Delayed x 0 53 23 380 BUD 0 23 38 54 108 32 53 66 120 32 53 109 162 41 68 7 121 41 68 163 217 50 83 175 229 50 83 218 256 59 99 D 230 256 59 99 Refer to Response Time Adjustment MS MSF4800A Only on page 266 mm NTI
275. les per set for emitter and receiver E D Appearance Cable length Model Ro e 2 0 3 m F39 JJR3K z 4 o Series Connection Cable 2 cables per set for emitter and receiver E Type Appearance Cable length Model Application For series connection 1 eee Series connection cable 0 3m F39 JJR3W When using the Water resistant 99 Case 2 PU o 5 To change series connection T Extension cable 0 5 to 15 m F39 JCLIB length in combination with F39 m JJR3W 5 CO CO 0 06 m F39 JJRO6L Dedicated series connection Oo Side by side Series cable with minimum length connection cable used in place of the sensor s T 0 15 m F39 JJR15L cable with connector 7 7 1 Total cable length of series connection is 0 6 m to connect to connector cable of the main sensor unit For series connection with minimum length use the F39 JJRO6L or F39 JJR15L 2 When using the F39 EJL IL IL IL I L D Water resistant Case in series connection configurations use the special series connection cables for the Water resistant Case Refer to page 295 for details omnon F3SJ Ver 2 Relays with Forcibly Guided Contacts Type Appearance Specifications Model Remarks e No of contacts 4 l e Contact type 2NO 2NC G7SA 2A2B For other models and nn bcn i e Rated switch load 250 VAC 6 A 30 VDC 6 A functions refer to G7SA e No of contacts 4 on page 538 and Socket Contacts del e Contact type 3NO 1NC G7SA 3A1B Models e Rated switch load 250 VAC 6 A 30 VDC 6A e
276. ll a protective structure so that the hazardous part of a machine can only be reached by passing through the sensor s detection zone Install the sensors so that part of the person is always present in the detection zone when working in a machine s hazardous areas If a person is able to step into the hazardous area of a machine and remain behind the MS MSF4800 s detection zone configure the system with an interlock function that prevents the machine from being restarted Otherwise it may result in heavy injury When using Start Restart Interlock Mode install the interlock reset switch in a location that provides a clear view of the entire hazardous area and where it cannot be activated from within the hazardous area The MS MSF4800 cannot protect a person from an object flying from a hazardous area Install protective cover s or fence s When detection of an area has been disabled by the fixed blanking function provide a protective structure around the entire area that will prevent a person from passing through it and reaching the hazardous part of the machinery Failure to do so may prevent detection of people and result in serious injury After setting the fixed blanking function be sure to confirm that a test rod is detected within all areas that require detection Failure to do so may prevent detection of people and result in serious injury omnon nw Du D 7 o lt o 7 uonoo os onpoJd sJosuag Aya
277. lt Oo D Communica D o tion line a 8 Fa cC 7 E D D 5 32 o amp 3 Os VU S 0 PQ o 2 GOs S1 External test switch connect to 24 V if the switch is not necessary E 92 Lockout reset switch connect to 0 V if the switch is not necessary A1 Contact by muting sensor A1 B1 Contact by muting sensor B1 K1 K2 Relay or other device that controls hazardous parts of the machine co K3 Load or PLC etc for monitoring M1 Muting lamp 1 Use a switch for small loads input specifications 5 V 1 mA 3 2 When using the interlock function this also functions as an interlock reset switch Must be set with a setting tool 3 The F3SJ operates even when K3 is not connected 2 x4 Connect the muting lamp to either the external indicator output or auxiliary output 1 for the emitter or the receiver When d connecting the muting lamp to auxiliary output 1 the parameter must be changed with a setting tool 5 Two wire sensors cannot be used a Wiring when the external device monitoring function will not be used t e Use a setting tool to set the external device monitoring function to Disabled e When using an auxiliary output 1 that has not been changed output operation mode is control output data and inverse of control outputsignals is Enabled the external device monitoring function will be disabled when auxiliary output 1 and the external device monitoring input are D connected as shown below bi e
278. m Degree of protection IP67 IEC60529 d Materials Case Acrylic resin rubber NBR60 mounting bracket SUS316L screw SUS 316L A To conform to IP67 tighten the screws according to the Cautions for Use as described in the manual packaged together with the product omnon F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Connections Wiring for Sensor Only Configuration Wiring for the Manual Reset Mode and the EDM Function Emitter Receiver S1 External test switch 2 Interlock lockout reset switch 53 Lockout reset switch If the switch is not necessary connect between the reset input and 24 VDC K1 K2 Relay that control the dangerous zone etc K3 Load PLC etc used for monitoring Emitter cable Receiver cable F39 JCLIA L F39 JCLIA D Wiring for the Auto reset Mode MF a m m i mi m m Emitter Receiver o Qo Dm D 72 o lt o RS 485 A Gray l Ke EN n D c z c o o FAN RS 485 B Pink s E 3 s s 3 8 2 c Slo c o l 2 9 9 2 o 5 2 loo l gt Z D c 0 gt z c I 5 2 MC l on o oO gt g es elsz l c 2 QU s a S z 8 2 oz 2 o D 5 0 a Elo D 6 2 a l m x o o i zg Fl eles i og z 5 s zm oj 35 o loo zZ 3 oc lt ES l l l l l
279. meter for the smallest detectable object becomes larger Be sure to use the diameter for the smallest detectable object for the fixed blanking function or the floating blanking function when calculating the safety distance Failure to do so may prevent the machinery from stopping before a person reaches the hazardous part of the machinery and result in serious injury The muting and override functions disable the safety functions of the device Additional safety measures must be taken to ensure safety while these functions are working Install muting sensors so that they can distinguish between the object that is being allowed to be pass through the detection zone and a person If the muting function is activated by the detection of a person it may result in serious injury Muting lamps external indicators that indicate the state of the muting and override functions must be installed where they are clearly visible to workers from all the operating positions Muting times must be precisely set according to the application by qualified personnel who have received appropriate training In particular if the muting time limit is to be set to infinity the person who makes the setting must bear responsibility Use two independent input devices for the muting inputs Install the F8SJ Muting Sensors or a protective wall so that workers cannot enter hazardous areas while muting is in effect and set muting times Positi
280. mm Masters Masters Model Protective height mm Model Number of beams Protective height mm MSF4800A 30 0280 280 MSF4800B 30 0280 14 280 MSF4800A 30 0320 16 320 MSF4800B 30 0320 16 320 MSF4800A 30 0360 18 360 MSF4800B 30 0360 18 360 MSF4800A 30 0400 20 400 MSF4800B 30 0400 20 400 MSF4800A 30 0440 22 440 MSF4800B 30 0440 22 440 MSF4800A 30 0480 480 MSF4800B 30 0480 24 480 MSF4800A 30 0520 520 MSF4800B 30 0520 26 520 m MSF4800A 30 0560 28 560 MSF4800B 30 0560 28 560 o MSF4800A 30 0600 30 600 MSF4800B 30 0600 30 600 T MSF4800A 30 0640 32 640 MSF4800B 30 0640 32 640 MSF4800A 30 0680 34 680 MSF4800B 30 0680 34 680 MSF4800A 30 0720 720 MSF4800B 30 0720 36 720 MSF4800A 30 0760 760 MSF4800B 30 0760 38 760 MSF4800A 30 0800 40 800 MSF4800B 30 0800 40 800 om MSF4800A 30 0840 42 840 MSF4800B 30 0840 42 840 62 MSF4800A 30 0880 44 880 MSF4800B 30 0880 44 880 og MSF4800A 30 0920 46 920 MSF4800B 30 0920 46 920 MSF4800A 30 0960 48 960 MSF4800B 30 0960 48 960 rm MSF4800A 30 1000 50 1000 MSF4800B 30 1000 50 1000 Z gt 9 MSF4800A 30 1040 52 1040 MSF4800B 30 1040 52 1040 S o0 amp MSF4800A 30 1080 54 1080 MSF4800B 30 1080 54 1080 TS MSF4800A 30 1120 56 1120 MSF4800B 30 1120 56 1120 lt MSF4800A 30 1160 1160 MSF4800B 30 1160 58 1160 MSF4800A 30 1200 60 1200 MSF4800B 30 1200 60 1200 MSF4800A 30 1240 62 1240 MSF4800B 30 1240 62 1240 S MSF4800A 30 1280 64 1280 MSF4800B 30 1280 64 1280 S MSF4800A 30 1320 66 1320 MSF4800B 30 1320 66 1320 MSF4800A 30
281. n 1 24 V Pin 2 Not used Pin 3 0 V Pin 4 Output When using a Through beam Photoelectric Sensor use an XS2R D426 L I11 F Y joint with Socket and Plug or similar product to connect the transmitter and receiver omnon Wiring Diagrams PNP Model with Muting Sensor Output Mode F39 TC5P01 Note The Key Cap for Muting and the Muting Lamp can connector be connected to either the F39 MC 1 Emitter or the Receiver Muting Lamp or E Key Cap for Muting PC Tool s F39 CN6 orange for F3SJ F39 GWU E F3SJ Ea a a SS gt h Emitter Receiver Lr Muting Sensor PNP Short circuit connector Setting Console M Test input Pink S2 Reset input Purple External device monitoring input Red Auxiliary output 1 Gray Safety output 1 Black Safety output 2 White F39 TC5 Model with Override Mode F39 TC5P02 Note The Key Cap for Muting and the Muting Lamp can F39 MC21 be connected to either the Emitter or the Receiver gt C Muting Lamp E Or p E Key Cap for Muting PC Tool for 2 F39 CN6 orange F3SJ F39 GWUM 7 ES all F3SJ Ds a p h Emitter Receiver Ly T T Sensor TE XS2H D521 Setting Console I O Auxiliary Connector Recommended 24 VDC OV GO A 5 pin DC Reset input Purple Auxiliary output 1 Gray External device monitoring input
282. n 10 seconds Error Lockout The F3SJ is in error or lockout status O O Muting Override The F3SJ is in muting or override status O O Blanking Warning Zone 2 Lise ease blanking or warning O O Specified light beam output 3 A specified light beam is blocked x O Power ON ane oe ON time has exceeded the threshold O O Warning zone 4 Light is blocked in the warning zone O O Test input ON The test input went ON O O Blanking light beam incident light ee LOME eami ia receiving 2 Interlock The F3SJ is in interlock status O O Muting error The F3SJ is in muting error status O O Number of load switching operations The number of load switching operations O O exceeded exceeded the threshold value An interlock lockout or muting error has x O Information trigger occurred Individual linked sensor output channel 1 Channel 1 control output is ON when Units are linked in series O Auxiliary output 1 only O Auxiliary output 1 only Individual linked sensor output channel 2 Individual linked sensor output channel 3 Individual linked sensor output channel 4 Note When specified light beam output is allocated as the output operation mode for auxiliary output 1 or 2 or external indicator output 1 or 2 Channel 2 control output is ON when Units are linked in series Channel 3 control output is ON when Units are linked in series Channel 4 control output is ON when Units are linked in series that mo
283. n be attached to emitters and or receivers Light source Red LED Green LED Yellow LED o Power supply voltage 24 VDC 10 supplied by sensor S Consumption current 50 mA max supplied by sensor Dedicated accessory connector cable d eonne ction tye Sensor side Dedicated 10 pin connector Indicator side M12 8 pin connector 2 Indicator red Dedicated Indicator green Dedicated Indicator yellow Dedicated Set contents connector cable 0 1 m Dedicated connector cable 0 1 m Dedicated connector cable 0 1 m Dedicated N mounting brackets 1 for each mounting brackets 1 for each mounting brackets 1 for each oO Water resistant Case i Item Model F39 EJ_ILILILI L F39 EJLIL LL D i F3SJ series Curtains with a protective height of 600 F3SJ series Curtains with a protective height of 605 Ambient temperature 10 to 55 C operation and storage 13 to 33 C operation and storage i e Mounting direction No restrictions Vertical direction only see following diagram Operating range 0 2 to 7 m for a protective height of 1 631 mm max 0 2 to 5 m for a protective height of 1 655 mm min Degree of protection IP67 IEC60529 When assembled according to the application precautions PP Materials Case Acrylic resin Rubber Nitrile rubber M5 bolt SUSXMT M4 bolt SUS316L Eo Cable Oil resistant PVC Plate SUS304 Mounting Bracket optional SUS304 Calculation formula Weight g 1 5 x LILJLIL1 300 LILIL TL stands for the
284. n of Mutual Interference Install the sensor system at distance D or further from highly reflective surfaces such as metallic walls floors ceilings or workpieces as shown below Side View Top View Reflective ceiling Reflective surface WW G ay 0 9 a lt t L I 0 5 F3SN A F3SN ALISS F3SH A F3SJ 8 10 F3SN B D Receiver Reflective floor Distance between Allowable installation distance D The emitter and the receiver to be set facing each other should be a pair of the same set Erroneous combination may create a zone where objects cannot be detected emitter and receiver Detection Distance Type 4 Type 2 For0 2to 3m 0 13 m 0 26 m EO a ar Oore L 2 x tan5 L 2 x tan10 L x 0 044 m L x 0 088 m Others To use the Safety Light Curtain in PSDI mode restart of cycle operation by the sensor you must configure an appropriate circuit between the Safety Light Curtain and the machine For details about PSDI refer to OSHA1910 217 IEC61496 1 and other relevant standards and regulations Do not try to disassemble repair or modify this product Doing so may cause the safety functions to stop working properly Do not use the Safety Light Curtain in environments where flammable or explosive gases are present Doing so may result in explosion Perform daily and 6 month inspections for the Safety Light Curtain Otherwise the system may fa
285. nal Test This function performs a test to ensure that the safety system stops properly when the F3SJ is interrupted by using an external signal to forcibly stop emission To stop emission apply 9 to 24 V for PNP output types or 0 to 1 5 V for NPN output types to the test input line of the emitter Apply the voltage for a minimum of 4 x the safety output response time Lockout If an error is found in the self test the sensor enters lockout state keeps the safety output in the OFF state and indicates the error at the same time Resetting Lockout When a cause of lockout is removed you can release the lockout by using either of the following methods e Cycle the power back ON e Reset input For PNP output After manual reset apply voltage of 9 to 24 V for 100 ms or longer to the reset input line and set it open or apply O to 1 5 V After auto reset apply voltage of 0 to 1 5 V for 100 ms or longer to the reset input line and set it open or apply 9 to 24 V For NPN output After manual reset apply voltage of 0 to 1 5 V for 100 ms or longer to the reset input line and set it open or apply 9 to 24 V After auto reset apply voltage of 9 to 24 V for 100 ms or longer to the reset input line and set it open or apply O to 1 5 V omnon External Device Monitoring Function This function detects malfunctions such as welded contacts in external relays or contactors that control the hazardous area of a machine This functi
286. nce If a person approaches the detection zone of the Safety Light Curtain perpendicularly calculate the safety distance as shown below S KxT C Eq 1 e S Safety distance e K Approach speed to the detection zone e T Total response time of the machine and Safety Light Curtain e C Additional distance calculated by the detection capability of the S afety Light Curtain S ystem that has detection capability of 40 mm max Use K 22 000 mm s and C 8 x d 14 mm in equation 1 for the calculation S 2 000 mm s x Tm Ts 8 x d 14 mm e S Safety distance mm e Tm Machine s response time s e Ts Response time of the Safety Light Curtain from ON to OFF s sk e d Size of Safety Light Curtain s detection capability mm sk These values differ depending on the S witch Refer to the Precautions for Correct Use for the S witch you are using Calculation example When Tm 20 05s Ts 0 01 s and d 2 14 mm S 2 000 mm s x 0 05 5 0 01 s 8 x 14 mm 14 mm 120 mm Eq 2 If the result is less than 100 mm use S 2 100 mm If the result exceeds 500 mm use the following equation where K 21 600 mm s S 1 600 mm s x Tm Ts 8 x d 14 mm Eq 3 If the result of this Eq 3 is less than 500 mm use S 2500 mm lt S ystems with a Smallest Detectable Object Size Diameter Greater than 40 mm or Systems Using Multi beam Safety Sensors gt Assuming K 21 600 mm s and C 2850 mm the followi
287. nce See ANSI PMMI B155 1 2006 for details MS4800 Series Machine Installation N WARNING Do not use this sensor for machines that cannot possibly be quickly stopped by electrical controls For example do not use it for a pressing machine that uses a full rotation clutch Otherwise the machine may not stop before a person reaches the hazardous part resulting in serious injury Do not use the auxiliary output for safety applications Failure of the MS MSF4800 may cause a person to go undetected resulting in serious injury The guarded machine must not present a hazard from flying parts The guarded machine must have a consistent stopping time and adequate control mechanisms All safety related machine control elements must be designed so that a failure in the control logic or a failure in the control circuit does not lead to danger Additional guarding may be required for access to dangerous areas not covered by the MS MSF4800 system For mounting N WARNING Be sure to test the operation of the MS MSF4800 after installation with the machine in a non operating condition to verify that the MS MSF4800 operates as intended Unintended function settings may cause a person to go undetected resulting in serious injury Be sure to secure the safety distance between the MS MSF4800 and the hazardous parts Otherwise the machine may not stop before a person reaches the hazardous part resulting in serious injury Insta
288. nce when the total ON time exceeds 30 000 hours Models without this a flashing function are also available as options An NT to the model number Ask your OMRON representative for details Ol Tl C2 o ip Q V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 4n oO o o omnon F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Function Power indicator Lit when power is supplied always lit F3SN A F3SH A E mitter Lit when power is supplied flashing when the F39 MC11 is connected F3SH A Receiver Interlock indicator Lit during interlock condition Lockout indicator Flashing during lockout condition Test indicator Lit during external test ON state indicator Lit when OSSD outputs are in ON state OFF state indicator Lit when OSSD outputs are in OF F state Blanking indicator F3SN A only Lit when blanking is set flashing when the F39 MC11 is connected x Optional function indicator F3SN B only These indicators flash to indicate the need for preventive maintenance when the total ON time exceeds 30 000 hours Models without this flashing function are also available as options An NT to the model number Ask your OMRON representative for details Flashing after a lapse of 30 000 hours oU TSi o L o lt o D 1 2 3 4 5 Light intensity level 20096 and above of ON threshold level Light intensity level indicator gt 150 to 200 of ON threshold lev
289. nd F39 ST1 Four 14 dia drillings 42 7 dia 110 dia gt Pr 1300 nl dia 12 Mounting Bracket F39 L22 TONES Hexagon socket head screw a 7 x cl j i i E Two M5 M6 hexagon socket 20 head check bolt omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 uonoogjos onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaJd 008t SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS J V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 EELE SS J F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Wall Mounting Bracket F39 L18 y eo Oo zu o lt Free location Bracket F39 L19 ell Mounting 5 30 EI Emitter cover or receiver cover uonoogjes onpoJd Os Uu zl M5 up set S o hexagon bolt 37 0 g hexagon bolt TE p TS f 2 Free location Bracket F39 L20 o D Co o e 3 43 gt c Hoops M4 up set S 30 5 12 ie hexagon bolt 12 65 N 5 Dod I M i B z 155 1 NEN H 23 co 9 dia A d o Otr 4 4 7 e Md 6 5 dia M5 up set hexagon bolt 4 7 ri 1 14 995 0 8 10 d 25 25 BAN C2 0 1 5 T Side mounting o H 30 M4 up set hexagon b
290. nd dust Connection using connectors significantly reduces wiring work e The wiring status can be checked at a glance with the LED indicators e The Support Software can be connected enabling on site adjustment of a Light Curtain AN Be sure to read the Safety Precautions on page 366 and the Precautions for All Safety Sensors on page 242 Ordering Information Connector Terminal Box Classification Applicable models Specification Type Model F3S ACPO Model with Muting Sensor Output Mode F39 TC5P01 Model with Override Mode F39 TC5P02 Muting Terminals l 35 ACOCCINGC Model with Muting Sensor Output Mode F39 TC5NO1 Model with Override Mode F39 TC5N02 Optional Accessories Sold separately Classification S hort circuit Connector Waterproof Covers Appearance Model Number per box F39 CN8 XS2Z 22 50 Note One short circuit connector is included with the F39 TL 101 for Muting Sensors Three waterproof covers are included with a Connector Terminal Box with Muting Sensor Output Mode F 39 TC5 101 and four waterproof covers with a Connector Terminal Box with Override Mode F39 TC5L102 Order the above accessories only as spare parts Specifications Refer to Instruction Sheet for details Ratings Rated voltage Rated current Characteristics Contact resistance Insulation resistance 24 VDC 20 at ambient temperature of 20 C Power line 2 4 A Signal l
291. ng brackets BT F Depends on the protective height See the table on the 245 io 440 2 right 443 to 785 3 B 2 794 to 1140 4 B 3 1145 to 1490 5 B 4 1495 to 1840 6 B 5 1845 to 2180 7 B 6 Y p 2195 to 2500 8 B 7 T 2 Use F 350 or less when none of the F values shown above are used When only F39 LJ3 free location mounting brackets are used without standard brackets allow a space of at least 350 mm between the brackets The number of brackets required varies according to the protective height For details about the number of required brackets refer to the table below The standard included intermediate mounting brackets are the same as the F39 LJ3 free location mounting brackets Purchase brackets as necessary if there are fewer intermediate mounting brackets than required When intermediate mounting brackets are included they can be used as free location mounting brackets uonoogjes onpoJd Required number of F39 LJ3 free location mounting brackets for 1 F3SJ set emitter receiver 2 pieces are included with gs 3 F39 LJ3 o gt S F P Number of included free location Number of free location Number of free location Bo iO cive me tan brack i diate bracket brackets t t F3SJ brackets to be purchased d 2 rackets as intermediate brackets rackets to moun rackets to be purcnase 0245 to 0440 4 2 sets 7 0443 to 0596 6 3 sets 1136 to 1140 4 8 2 sets amp 1145 to 1490 4 10 3 sets lt 1495 to 1658 4 12 4
292. ng calculation is made using Eq 1 S 21 600 mm s x Tm Ts 850 Eq 4 e S Safety distance mm e Tm Machine s response time s e TS Response time of the Safety Light Curtain from ON to OFF s Calculation example When Tm 20 05 s and Ts 20 01 s S 21 600 mm s x 0 05 s 0 01 s 850 mm 2946 mm How to calculate the safety distance specified by American standard ANSI B11 19 Reference S ystems with a Smallest Detectable Object Size Diameter Less than 64 mm If a person approaches the detection zone of the Safety Light Curtain perpendicularly calculate the safety distance as shown below K x Ts Tc Tr Tbm Dpf e S Safety distance e K Approach speed to the detection zone the value recommended by OSHA standard is 1 600 mm s Approach speed K is not specified in the ANSI B 11 19 standard To determine the value of K to apply consider all factors including the operator s physical ability e TS Machine s stop time s e Tr Response time of the Safety Light Curtain from ON to OFF s e Tc Machine control circuit s maximum response time required to activate its brake s e Tbm Additional time s If a machine has a brake monitor Tom 2 Brake monitor setting time Ts Tc If ithas no brake monitor we recommend using 20 or more of Ts 4 Tc as additional time e Dpf Additional distance According to ANSI s formula Dpf is calculated as shown below Dpf 23 4 x d 7 0 Where d is th
293. nsing distance of up to 20 m also lets you use mirrors to guard three sides with a single MS4800 system Reduced Resolution Blanking Advanced series only Reducing the detection resolution of the MS MSF 4800A Safety Light Curtain increases the size of the smallest detectable object This can improve productivity by allowing objects such as carts to enter the sensing area Muting MSF 4800A only Combining the MSF 4800A and the MS4800 RM6 Muting Module lets you set muting without having to use an external controller Floating Blanking Advanced series only Floating blanking can be set for one or two beams When the number of set beams are interrupted the output is turned OFF omnon MS4800 Series Ordering Information Safety Light Curtains MS MSF4800 series Safety Light Curtains C Infrared light Minimum Protec Model i detect tive Series Sensing distance i i able 3 height Individual use piden bee object mm for muting 1 Master MSF4800A 30 L 14 to 106 429 msagooa 30 0 2120 MSF4800 30 J Slave 2 Advanced XR2 Series Oo Master MSF4800A 40 J dc 12to68 2901 msasooa 4o 9 Fils 2040 sjava MSF4800 40 0 3 to XR2 20m Master MSF4800B 30 14to106 290 9 ms4800B 30 0
294. o omnon ow fe D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpo4d SsJosuag Ayayes IIV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 Sita SS J MS4800 Series Specifications For details refer to the nstruction Manual or User s Manual Safety Light Curtains MS MSF4800 series Safety Light Curtains Series Model Individual use Advanced Series Basic Series MS4800B 30 MS4800B 40 Item Series connection Sensor type MS4800A 30 MS4800A 40 MSF4800A 30 MSF4800A 40 J Type 4 Safety Light Curtain MSF4800B 30 MSF4800B 40 Setting tool connection Applicable safety category Minimum detectable object Connectable Category 4 3 2 1 or B Opaque object Opaque object 30 mm dia 40 mm dia Opaque object Opaque object 30 mm dia 40 mm dia Beam gap P 20 mm 30 mm 20 mm 30 mm Number of beams n 14 to 106 12 to 68 14 to 106 12 to 68 Protective height PH 280 to 2120 mm 360 to 2040 mm 280 to 2120 mm 360 to 2040 mm Sensing distance 1 Lens diameter Response time ON to OFF under stable light incident condition Refer to page 257 OFF to ON for details Startup waiting time 0 3 to 20 m selectable from 0 3 to 8 m with the Programming and Diagnostics Module Diameter 7 mm Individual 14 to 32 ms Indivi
295. o0 m Using incandescent lamp for external indicator output 1 60m 45m 30m 20m Using incandescent lamp for auxiliary output 1 Not using incandescent lamp 100m 60m 45m 30m Note Keep the cable length within the rated length Failure to do so is dangerous as it may prevent safety functions from operating normally uonoogjes onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008vt SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 4n oO o o omnon F3SJ Ver 2 Accessories Control Unit Item Model F3SP B1P Applicable sensor F3SJ A Only for PNP output type Power supply voltage 24 VDC 10 Power consumption DC1 7 W max not including sensor s current consumption Operation time 100 ms max not including sensor s response time Response time 10 ms max not including sensor s response time Number of 3NO 1NC E contacts g g ste Rated load re eee Rated current 5A Connection Between sensors M12 connector 8 pin Weight packed state Approx 280 g 2 Accessories Instruction manual E NPN output type cannot be connected Also the system cannot be used as a muting system OSD i 29 Dedicated External Indicator Set B28 Item Model F39 A01PR PAC F39 A01PG PAC F39 A01PY PAC 29 co Applicable sensor Eh lt Common for PNP NPN output type Ca
296. olt gt M5 up set hexagon bolt yey V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 Emitter cover or receiver cover Back mounting SSLIV NS 4 M4 up set hexagon bolt E 30 Emitter cover or receiver cover SZ 3 SJ 3 M5 up set hexagon bolt 4n oO o o omnon F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Connection Circuit Examples An Example of Safety Circuits Where No Controller Is Used For Category 4 Rating F3SN A F3SH A Category 2 Rating F3SN B ET Regeer Applicable operation mode Manual reset mode Using the EDM function Sl External test switch S2 Interlock lockout reset switch KM1 KM2 Safety relay with forcibly guided contacts G7SA or magnetic contactor KM3 Solid state contactor G 3 M 3 phase motor A E1 24 VDC power supply S 82K T PLC Programmable controller o RS 485 B Pink Used for monitoring This is nota part of a safety system o fee 3 Timing Chart 2 23 z Light incident a als Bug 3 d HE i LLL EL L 22 KM1 Reset switch mE ets 5 HN NES N o8 KM2 I l f m E E in I l I l I VSI KM1 KM2 O25 N O contact i E im o bo KM1 KM2 a N C contact Dr A 20 24 VDC I I I 02 i pc puts o po pM ec OV PLCoupt W hi E The output operation mode of the auxilia
297. ommunication Communication JC7A 7 m line i line F39 Communication Communication Communication Communication 7 JC10A 10 m line line x 0 V 0 V OV F39 External device Auxiliar i y output 2 External device T JC15A 15 m monitoring input 2 monitoring input MMC UES 1 Basic system indicates a system with default factory settings Muting system indicates a system attached with a muting keycap F39 CN6 to enable muting function 2 N C for models with the TS suffix omnon Ayayes o D o o o uonoogjes onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J SOL 6E4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 ET oO o o F3SJ Ver 2 Nomenclature Main Unit and Cables Emitter Component Emitter receiver Extension cable Single end connector cable Beam center line mark A line indicates where the beam is aligned This line indicates the reference line used to measure the safety distance EA To attach or detach the cap and power cable remove the 4 screws shown above Indicator Receiver Power cable Power cable Black Description Gray Select a type name based on the required protective height and detection cap
298. on constantly monitors that a specified voltage is applied to the receiver s external device monitoring input line and enters lockout state when an error occurs The relay s operational delay can be up to 300 ms without being evaluated as an error For example if a specified voltage is not applied to the external device monitoring line because the normally closed NC contact is not closed within 300 ms after the control outputs turn from ON to OFF it is evaluated as an error and enters a lockout state To utilize this function properly use safety relays and contactors that have forcibly guided or mechanically linked contact structure Other Functions Auxiliary Output Non safety output The auxiliary output is used to monitor the status of the F3SJ This output can be connected to a device such as a relay indication lamp programmable controller etc There are two auxiliary outputs Auxiliary output 1 and auxiliary output 2 e Auxiliary output 1 Control output inversion signal e Auxiliary output 2 Turns ON when the point of 30 000 operating hours is reached The auxiliary output modes can be changed with a setting tool See the User s Manual for details on the modes that can be set Do not use the auxiliary output or external indicator output for safety applications Failure of these outputs may prevent detection of people and result in serious injury Note 1 Auxiliary output 1 has a load current of 300 mA max and
299. on page 242 for the installation conditions of Safety Light Curtains F3SH A Multi beam Safety Sensor Install protective structures around the machine so that you must pass through the detection zone of the F3SH A to reach a hazardous part of the machine If itis possible for an operator to get between the sensor s detection zone and the hazardous part of the machine design the system so that machinery cannot start up automatically Make sure that machinery cannot restart while the operator is in the hazardous area Position the Switch for restarting machinery in a location from which the status of the hazardous area can be seen clearly The Switch position location must be a place where the switch cannot be operated from within the hazardous area Failure to do so may result in serious injury After setting the fixed blanking check that the F3SN A detects a test rod at any position in the detection zone through which a person can reach the hazardous part of the machine If any positions are found by check above install protective structures to preventintrusion which the F3SN A can not detect Failure to do so may result in serious injury Safety Distance Always maintain a safe distance S between the light curtain and a hazardous part of a machine Failure to do so causes the machine to fail to stop before an operator reaches the dangerous area and may result in Serious injury Use of the floating blanking increases the size o
300. on the switch that is used to activate the override function in a location where the entire hazardous area can be seen and where the switch cannot be operated from inside the hazardous area Make sure that nobody is in the hazardous area before activating the override function Install the sensor system so that it is not affected by reflective surfaces Failure to do so may hinder detection resulting in serious injury F3SJ Ver 2 When using more than 1 set of F3SJ install them so that mutual interference does not occur such as by configuring series connections or using physical barriers between adjacent sets Make sure that the F3SJ is securely mounted and its cables and connectors are properly connected Make sure that no foreign material such as water oil or dust enters the inside of the F3SJ while the cap is removed Do not use the sensor system with mirrors in as retro reflective configuration Doing so may hinder detection It is possible to use mirrors to bend the detection zone to a 90 degree angle Reflector Position with retro reflection AN v FEY yy ESAN ZLA e 9 Pm Reflector Position with detection zone bent at 90 ca Cn When using series connections perform inspection of all connected F3SJs as instructed in the User s Manual For wiring For PNP output connect the load between the output and 0 V line For NPN output connect the load between
301. ons or using physical barriers between adjacent sets Mutual interference from other F3SJ is prevented in up to 3 sets without series connection o o omnon Using Setting Tools The following setting tools sold separately can be purchased in order to change or confirm various F3SJ series parameters e F39 MC21 Setting Console e F39 GWUM SD Manager Setting Support Software for the F3SJ The Setting Console cannot be used with the F3SJ ALI TS Series The FS3J must be installed set and integrated into the mechanical control system by a qualified technician who has received the appropriate training Failure to make correct settings may prevent detection of people and result in serious injury F3SJ Ver 2 F3SJ Versions Setting tools can be used with Version 2 and later versions of the F3SJ The setting tools cannot be used with Version 1 The setting tools cannot be used even if a Version 1 F3SJ is combined in series with compatible F3SJ Units A communications error lockout will occur Unfortunately the F3SJ s version cannot be upgraded The F3SJ s version number appears on its label as shown in the following diagram Location of the F3SJ s Version Number Within Dashed line Box Emitter Receiver KR EE E E E E E E E E E E E Rd Close up View of Dashed line Box Serial No Year Version OMRON Corporation Kyoto JAPAN D Ser
302. oooooooooo ooo Upper Lower Detection zone F39J Ver 2 Figure 3 Jj Upper Detection zone 2CH All light beams Warning zone All light beams E 0000000000000000 Lower poeooooooooooooog 1CH Nm Upper Lower Examples of Unacceptable Warning Zone Settings Figures 4 and 5 Figure 4 All light beams Warning zone Upper Lower Figure 5 Detection zone Warning zone Detection zone o o o o o o o do o6 ooo oo Upper Lower Warning Zone Display Label When the warning zone is set affix this label to indicate which areas belong to the normal detection zone and the warning zone Normal light beam Q Warning light beam M O O O OI e e e ww WA Ne ee 0 Detection zone I Warning zone l omnon oo Dm D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaJd LOL dS 4 SOL 6E4 c 49A PSEA 008v SIN V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 sdg 7 C2 o o ow ooa D 7 o lt o 7 uonoogjes onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 4n oO o o F3SJ Ver 2 Muting Function Summary Makes settings related to the muting function The muting function disables the safety functions of the device Additional safety measures mu
303. or Specifications Main Unit Material d Model Controller Safety Category a Metal Plastic E3ZS i Refer to page 432 E3ZS T81A Required an E3FS 10B4 2M Required Mim E3FS Refer to page 432 E3FS 10B4 M1 M Required T F3SS Safety Laser Scanner Specifications Model Detection Capability Detection Angle Safety Category 0S3101 Opaque objects 62 mm dia 180 3 Refer to page 458 0S 3101 2 PN S 1 896 min reflection factor omnon Safety Sensor Product Selection Application Sensing Distance Em Safety oaung i Catego Mutin gory Blanking s 5m 10 m 20 m 40m 60 m 4 20m DT 4 20m DT e 4 20m DO e ex 4 20m ee nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 4 om2 4 om2 1 4 om2 e 4 om2 UOI 99 9S onpoJd sJosuag suoinneoaud e im J e m J e I 3 C J9A f S J i9JeS lv 10 e om J g a T e sm im J 2 Bm 2 10m L 2 10m L 2 10m L V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 TI oO O z gt o o Sensing Distance 5m 10m 20m 40 m 60 m d o r 3m LC 10m mm C3 C9 OO 10m 60m m C2 o o Sensing Distance 5m 10m 20m 40 m 60 m Protective Area 4m Warning Area 15m omnon nw Dm D o c o UOI 99 9S onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaJd 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6
304. oring function disabled G9SA 301 settings o Manual reset mode h EE Using feedback loop Using emergency stop switch F39 JCOA L F39 JCDA D DY p O l l de 0 Communication line 4 Gray ET Kf Z E es s 3 3 l D S z 8 Communication 5 5 2 cl m s line Pink 3 Sl Q N 9 5 Ol c E F o 5S5 amp c o S e DS ke as s 8 x9 5 s oo 5 2 49 e Se 3e ze og E f 3 E S 9 KM3 E oeg o 29 o g o So o2 KM1 313 So OV D e e e k1 If an emergency stop switch is not used connect control 9 output 1 to T12 terminal and control output 2 to T23 lt directly N S1 External test switch connect to O V if the switch is not necessary S2 Interlock reset switch d S3 Emergency stop switch direct opening contacts ur A165E A22E Q S4 Lockout reset switch connect to 24 V if the switch is not necessary G9SA 301 KM1 KM2 Magnetic contactor o KM3 Solid state contactor Gi3J A M 3 phase motor d E1 24 VDC power supply S82K M EM un P WT PLC Programmable controller Timing Chart _ Light incident Used for monitoring not related to safety Light interrupted system l V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 External test switch S1 11 Wii Wiring for auto reset mode I I I l g Interlock reset switch NH l o SS crRc a S2 l I I I 1 TI Q2 Eves eee z S3 I I I I 1 l
305. otoelectric Sensors as the muting sensors Mutual interference must be taken into account when installing these Sensors 2 The muting sensors must be installed so that distance D between muting sensors A1 and A2 is smaller than workpiece length L e 3 Through beam or Retro reflective Photoelectric Sensors Proximity Sensors or Limit Switches can be used as the muting sensors L Two wire sensors cannot be used N oO P O Ol Tl C2 5 ba V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o omnon ow Dn E ro o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 i C2 o o F3SJ Ver 2 Safety Precautions This catalog is intended as a guide for product selection Be sure to use the instruction manual provided with the product for actual operation Regulations and Standards 1 Application of an F3SJ A sensor alone cannot receive type certification provided by Article 44 2 of the Labour Safety and Health Law of Japan It is necessary to apply it in a system Therefore when using the F3SJ A in Japan as a safety system for pressing or shearing machines prescribed in Article 42 of that law the system must receive type certification 2 The F3SJ A is electro sensitive protective
306. ous injury There is a possibility that reflective surfaces next to the sensing area may reflect light and prevent the detection of beam interruption due to obstacles within the area refer to Figs 1 to 5 Reflective surfaces may exist on parts of machinery mechanical protective devices or products The minimum distance d must be set between the reflective object and the beam centerline of the MS MSF 4800 sensing area For information on how to test this condition refer to the Mini Safe 4800 Series Light Curtains Installation and Operating Manual Fig 1 Example of Correct Installation with Proper Placement The interruption of the beam due to the obstacle is accurately detected The reflective object is outside the directional angle i Sensing distance R gt Approaching direction Transmitter Receiver Reflective surface Hazardous area zone Fig 2 Example of Unsafe Installation Reflection prevents the obstacle from being detected The reflective objectis inside the beam angle Approaching direction Directional angle a Obstacle a Interrupted beam Beam centerline Transmitter Receiver Reflection Reflective surface Hazardous area borderline Fig 3 Example of Unsafe Installation The interruption of the beam due to the obstacle is not detected because of reflection R eflective surface interference can occur from either above or below the sensing area Sensing ar
307. ous injury Two or more pairs of the F3SN ALISS can be connected in series When connected in series the F3SN ALISS Sensors generate Safety Distance beams in a time sharing manner to prevent mutual interference and Always maintain a safety distance S between the Light ensure safety Curtain and a hazardous part of a machine oid Failure to do so may prevent the machine from stopping Emitter 1 Rocawear before an operator reaches the dangerous area and may un isl result in serious injury CU Le CURT CSBIS E i i um F39 JCR2B or Floating blanking is used to increase the minimum F39 JCRSB or b detectable object size Be sure to use the minimum icc NI detectable object size for floating blanking when calculating safety distance Failure to do so may prevent the machine from stopping before an operator reaches the dangerous area and may result in serious injury Refer to the Precautions for All Safety Sensors on page 242 for calculating the safety distance Incorrect Incorrect Emitter 1 Receiver 1 Emitter 1 Receiver 2 Receiver 2 Emitter 2 Emitter 2 E Receiver 1 i Do not connect the Emitter and Do not combine an Emitter with a Receiver in series or a lockout Receiver of a different pair condition will result This will cause a lockout condition and detection of objects will be disabled When Not Connected in Series Refer to Precautions for All Safety Sensors on page 242 for information on preventing m
308. outside diameter 1 15 mm dia Standard length L Color Emitter gray Receiver black omnon Control Unit F3SP B1P Emitter Receiver 24 M3 ee UN SVININVINVINVINMT Cao ee U 10 5 1 J gt 13 max dL i KAAORE ED aD DIE EDD an e Pj 76 max 63 4 d GD QD GD GD OOOOOO S 5 fas F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Terminal Allocations 069990 060099 i l Indicators i PWR green K1 orange K2 orange 009966 QE G9 Mounting screw holes Two 4 2 dia or M4 omnon oo Dm a L o c o D UOI 99 9S onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suoinneoaud LOL dS 4 SOL 6E4 c 49A PSEA 008v SIN V HS 4 a NSe4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Setting Console Branching Connector F39 MC11 supplied with F39 MC11 F39 CN1 Communications jack o Qo Dum D 7 o lt o CN3 Communications o a connection indicator a amp ilt Function indicator Two 8 dia E spot facing depth 2 mm or Channel display Two 4 5 dia Oz Channel keys o a9 Mode display o 9 o c S S Up key 9 o lt Right key CN1 Connector cable CN2 Sensor o Co Bownikey CN3 Setting console o Enter key wo o c lt D v External Indicators Mirrors F39 A0
309. pecial Controller F3SP B1P 292 382 416 Leg Body Protection TYPE4 lt 2 F3SJ AL I IL Tl 1 155 mas Ver er gt 282 Safety Light Curtain SSL V NS 4 1S 4 Safety Controller F3SX Body Protection TYPE4 F3SN AL I J JP70 Safety Laser Scanner TYPE F3SN BLILILILIP70 TYPE4 F3SH A09P03 TYPES 083101 Safety Sensor Product Selection Safety Light Curtain Specifications Application Model Finger Hand Moped m Leg Body Paus Fixed Protection Protection Protechon Protection No of Beams Blanking MS 4800B e MSF4800B o MS4800 Series Refer to page 246 MS4800A e e dq 2T MSF 4800A e e o lt 0 9 F3SJ Ver 2 D 2 Refer to page 282 o o TF o 29 e e o g o0 20 ju id lt 1 F3SN ALIP25 L e Qo F3SN A c Refer to page 378 N F3SN A P70 e 5 to 30 o F3SN ALISS Ol F3SH Refer to page 378 F3SH A09P03 e 4 o S F3SN BOP25 0 ur F3SN B p F3SN BOP70 0 e 5 to 30 NNW T22 PU 1 Muting Module MS4800 RM6 sold separately is required 3 2 The sensing distance for the F3SJ AL120 with 110 to 166 beams the F3J ALI25 with 83 to 125 beams the F 3S AL130 with 70 to 100 beams 3 and the F3SJ A055 with 34 to 50 beams is 7 meters a Single beam Safety Sens
310. presence detection Ayayes o D o o o AN Be sure to read the Safety Precautions on page 346 and the Precautions for All Safety Sensors on page 242 uonoog es jonpoJd Features VSI 2 gt 8 Choose from two new tools for setting parameters and checking the system status o aos SD Manager PC Setting Support Software o2 k o E m M a F3SJ p 2 4 5 E gt To a USB terminal hee pn t S SUE L u e gt sD Manage tll aL jah B J co F39 JCLIA Single E 3 o end Connector ar lt Cable or F39 JCLIB Branch S A i ELS D Double end Connector TI x So y ul Connection Cable All parameters can be set and the system status can be checked F39 GWUM with a personal computer In addition to making it easy to monitor SD Manager os the beam alignment the ambient incident light intensity can be PC Setting Lt displayed in bar graph form for an easy check of the system status Support Software O Ol The SD Manager PC Setting Support Software helps reduce the time required for installing and troubleshooting the Safety Light Curtain 4 Beam alignment is easier The ambient incident light The error log can be displayed 7 intensity can be checked iy Lurene 9 Lf a e e Tr I I ee MM Se a gen aci com E ete H mmm E ia
311. r 2 turns OFF for T3 0 1 s or longer 2 When the muting continuation time exceeds the muting time limit of T2 60 s a setting tool can be used to change the limit in the range of 1 to 600 s or to eliminate the time limit T3 0 1 s max E li ON Muting input 1 OFF E A T1 min to T1 max T3 0 1 s max EN pe ON Muting input 2 ginput2 se dL T2 max 0 15 s max m L 0 25 s max Muting status ana Disabled l l Muting lamp Blink l l external l indicator OFF Light F3SJ incident Light incident fm S d meum ES ae Light Light interrupted interrupted ye M M OFF This value is the time when the F3SJ is used singly When used in a series this time is as shown in the table below Control output Number of Connected Units Time s 1 0 15 Series of 2 0 26 Series of 3 0 29 Series of 4 0 32 e T1 min Muting input time limit min This is the minimum input time lag between muting inputs 1 and 2 and is set to 0 03 s If the time lag between muting inputs 1 and 2 are shorter than this value a muting error is generated e T1 max Muting input time limit max This is the maximum input time lag between muting inputs 1 and 2 and is set to 3 s The minimum value must be less than the maximum value min max omnon e T2 Muting time limit This is the continuous time of the muting function and is set to 60 s If the muting status exceeds this time muting is c
312. r each of the emitter and receiver is included e For protective height from 1 136 to 1 658 mm 2 sets for each of the emitter and receiver are included e For protective height from 1 660 to 2 180 mm 3 sets for each of the emitter and receiver are included e For protective height from 2 195 to 2 500 mm 4 sets for each of the emitter and receiver are included Applicable standards omnon IEC61496 1 EN61496 1 UL61496 1 Type 4 ESPE Electro Sensitive Protective Equipment IEC61496 2 prEN61496 2 UL61496 2 Type 4 AOPD Active Opto electronic Protective Devices IEC61508 EN61508 SIL3 F3SJ Ver 2 F3SJ AL IL IL IP20 TS P25 TS Model Sensor type Version F3SJ A F3SJ A IP25 TS Type 4 safety light curtain Ver 2 P20 TS Setting tool connection Applicable safety category Detection capability Parameter setting Not possible Monitoring Possible Category 4 3 2 1 or B Opaque objects 25 mm in diameter Opaque objects 20 mm in diameter Beam gap P 15 mm 20 mm Number of beams n Protective height PH Lens diameter Operating range 13 to 125 260 to 2 500 mm 16 to 166 245 to 2 495 mm Diameter 5 mm 0 2 to 9 m protective height 1 640 mm max 0 2 to 7 m protective height 1 655 mm max Response time under stable light incident condition
313. ribing and or enforcing machinery safety regulations in the location where the equipment is to be used e European Standards EN415 4 EN692 EN693 e US Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA 29 CFR 1910 212 e US Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA 29 CFR 1910 217 e American National Standard Institute ANSI B11 1 to B11 19 e American National Standard Institute ANSI RIA 15 06 e Canadian Standards Association CSA Z142 2432 Z434 e SEMI standard SEMI S2 omnon Precautions for Safe Use Indication and meaning for safe use Meanings of Signal Words To ensure safe use of the F3SJ A signal words and an alert symbol are used in this catalog to indicate safety related instructions Because these instructions describe details very important to your safety it is extremely important that you understand and follow the instructions The signal words and alert symbol used in this catalog are shown below N WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in minor or moderate injury or may result in serious injury or death Additionally there may by significant property damage N CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage Definition of Symbol Prohibited Indicates a prohibited action Warning Labels For users N WARNING The FS3J must be installed
314. ric shock 240 beams can be connected The emission of series connected F3SJ is time divided so mutual interference does not occur and For F3SJ to comply with IEC 61496 1 and UL 508 the DC power l safety is ensured supply unit must satisfy all of the following conditions e Must be within rated power voltage 24 VDC 20 e Must have tolerance against the total rated current of devices if it Emitter 1 j Receiver 1 is connected to multiple devices gu e Must comply with EMC directives industrial environment d dbi ede t ow i F39 JJR15L or a tE e Double or enhanced insulation must be applied between the F39 JJROGL EE P 2 eu primary and secondary circuits Connecting a e Automatic recovery of overcurrent protection characteristics Hase Ensia Receivera reversed L sagging e Output holding time must be 20 ms or longer pu e Must satisfy output characteristic requirements for class 2 circuit or Ir nu limited voltage current circuit defined by UL508 28 e Must comply with EMC laws and regulations of a country or a 25 region where F3SJ is used Ex In EU the power supply must Emitter 3 Receiver 3 comply with EMC Low Voltage Directive E 93 Double or enhanced insulation from hazardous voltage must be gt o ES applied to all input and output lines Failure to do so may result in a p electric shock E D lt The cable e
315. ries connection when using the Water resistant Case 3 The same four digits indicating protective height that are used in the Sensor model number I are used in the J part of the Case model number 4 Be sure to purchase brackets with the Case to match the mounting direction rear or side omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 uonoo os onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suoineoaud 008t SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 EELE SS J ow Dn D 72 oz o UOI 99 9S onpo4d SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud LOL dS 4 SOL 6E4 c 49A PSEA 008v SIN V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 sd d SS J F3SJ Ver 2 Specifications For details refer to the instruction manual or User s manual Main Units F3SJ A I I IP14 P20 P25 P30 P55 N14 N20 N25 N30 N55 NUT F3SJ A I J L P14 F3SJ Al I J IP20 F3SJ AL I J P25 F3SJ A I I IP30 F3SJ A Il J P55 Model Ks F3SJ A Il J N14 F3SJ A Il J 1 IN20 F3SJ A Il I 1N25 F3SJ A I I 1N30 F3SJ AL Il J 1 1IN5b5 Sensor type Type 4 safety light curtain Ver 2 Connectable Category 4 3 2 1 or B Version Setting too
316. ron dust or salts Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when using the product in the following locations e Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise e Locations subjectto possible exposure to radioactivity e Locations close to power supply lines F3SP TO1 Installation e Do not use products that have been dropped or have its internal parts disassembled Specified characteristics may not be achieved and may cause damage to the product or burning e f the products are installed side by side the rated current is 1 A Do not exceed 1 A e Use the F3SP T01 in an enclosure that provides atleast IP 54 degree of protection Installation and Wiring e Use the following electrical wiring for external I O devices Solid wire 0 2 to 2 5 mm AWG24 to 12 0 34 to 1 5 mm AWG22 to 16 Flexible If flexible wires are used terminate the wires with wires insulated ferrules DIN 46228 4 compatible type before connecting them Compatible Ferrules e Use ferrules that meet the following standards for length and width If the standards are not met connection may fail or the ferrules may not be able to be plugged in and out of the terminals e Ferrule Dimensions for Power Supply Terminal of F3SP T01 Square Ferrules Cylindrical Ferrules NG C dia Dimension A 1 0 to 2 3 The cross sectional Square area after crimping Ferrules must be less than Dimension B 0 8 to 2 6
317. ry rA output is the Dark ON output mode co S An Example of Safety Circuits Where the G9SA 301 Safety Relay Unit is Connected T For category 4 rating F3SN A F3SH A category 2 rating F3SN B o lt E mitt R i Applicable operation mode 1 The F39 MC11 setting console cannot be x For sensor connected to the F3SN B Therefore short Auto reset mode circuit the auxiliary output terminal and the Disable the EDM monitor function EDM input E M by setting on the F39 MC11 1 2 If emergency stop switch is not necessary Lt For safety relay unit connectthe OSSD 1 directly to T12 terminal Q Manual reset mode and connect the OSSD 2 directly to T23 Use the feedback loop terminal n e Use the emergency stop switch 2 z S1 External test switch 4 S2 Reset switch sf x esas e RS485B Pin A Z2 gt S3 Emergency stop switch 2 2 9 3 2 3 z 9 8 3 2 direct opening contacts dE 9 go 8 x2 zj I gt A165E or A22E MPP E 3183 2953 8 8 KM1 KM2 Magnetic contactor TS 8 3 a u gt oj KM3 Solid state contactor G3J 0 A 155 x M 3 phase motor Eu lt E1 24 VDC power supply S82K 7 PLC Programmable controller o Used for monitoring This is not a part of a safety system Timing Chart 2 Light incident Light interrupted l l e e External test switch S M NTI S1 00 Reset switch o BH NIE NH Emergency stop switch l l Ar S i l l l l l l TI M oO osso i E NEIN D l I
318. s Material Aluminum case and cap Weight packed state Approx 2 5 kg 1 set Accessories Applicable standards 1 ESPE Electro Sensitive Protective Equipment 2 AOPD Active Opto electronic Protective Devices Connections Wire the F3SS only after all power has been turned off Emitter Terminal block spells Functions bh dl number g 424 VDC 424 VDC i oo RTN OV G N D RTN 24VDC Set of mounting clamps operation manual caps for conduits IEC EN 61496 1 Type4 ESPE 1 IEC prEN 61496 2 Type4 AOPD 2 Note Ground the projector and receiver to the ground terminal inside the case Receiver E eua Functions number 1 Control output 1 2 For control output 1 2 COM 3 Control output 2 J5 4 START 5 START 6 24 VDC 7 OV GND Terminal block assignments 1 2 A 1g o3 4 5 0 7 LLLI I 7 o0O00O00Q0 omnon nw DE D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS J 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 nw Dm D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 SUOIINEIAId LOL dS 4 SOL 6E4 c 49A PSEA 008v SIN V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 SS J F3SS Start Interlock or Start Reset Interlock Mode Emitter R
319. s e Automatic recovery must be possible for overcurrent protection e Output holding time must be 20 ms or longer e Must satisfy output characteristic requirements for class 2 circuit or limited voltage current circuit defined by UL508 e Must comply with the EMC laws and regulations of the country or region where the MS MSF4800 is used For example in the EU the power supply must comply with the EMC Low Voltage Directive Double or enhanced insulation from hazardous voltage must be applied to all input and output lines Failure to do so may result in electric shock The cable extension length must be no greater than the specified length Otherwise the safety functions may fail to work properly resulting in danger MS4800 Series Other Precautions N WARNING To use the MS MSF4800 in PSDI Mode i e restarting cycle operation by the sensor you must configure an appropriate control circuit between the MS MSF4800 and the machine For details about PSDI refer to ANSI RIA 15 06 1999 OSHA 1910 217 h ANSI B11 2 1995 R2005 and other relevant standards and regulations Do not try to disassemble repair or modify this product Doing so may cause the safety functions to stop working properly Do not use the MS MSF4800 in environments where flammable or explosive gases are present Doing so may result in explosion Perform daily and 6 month inspections for the MS MSF4800 Otherwise the system may fail to work prop
320. s F39 CN3 Cable with Connectors on Both Ends XS2W D420 081 0 XS2W D420 081 0 Ayayes Single beam Safety Sensor First Sensor Connector Second Sensor Connector o D o o o Cable with Connectors on Both Ends for Single beam Safety Sensor Branch Connection F39 JFLIS uonoojos onpoJd TE 2 DPO O 9 pS o So ET z Safety Controller F3SX P o o Tl j o amp Ili lt D T N Note 1 The Connector is supplied with the F3SX di Third Sensor Cable with Connector Socket Note Cable with Connectors on Both Ends D 2 Connect an F39 CN4 Connector on One End for Single beam Safety Sensor Branch ur Dummy Plug to unused XS2F D420 080 Connection Q Single beam Safety Sensor F39 JFLIS may also be used Connectors Fourth Sensor d Connector Connector Plug Assembly Connector Plug Assembly o XS2G D4L1L v o as Branch Connector for the E3FS F39 CN3 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 E3FS 10B4 2M 5 gt Receiver or Emitter o q p o E3ZS T81A m ITI w C2 NTI Ow Tl oO o o omnon nw a D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpo4d SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS J V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4
321. s ON when an input is given to external Turns ON when an input is given to muting device monitoring input input 1 5 EDM Muting input 1 indicator MUTET Blinking Not used Blinks during muting override EN ON Turns ON when the blanking function and Turns ON when an input is given to muting Blanking Test indicator warning zone function are enabled input 2 6 BLANKING TEST 2 Blinks wh is Dei Muting input 2 indicator MUTE2 Blinking MAS ee eee EIS DEING Blinks during muting override performed ON Turns ON when control output is OFF 7 OFF output indicator OFF Blinks in the following states l Blinking e Lockout state e One or more beams are blocked in maintenance mode 8 ON output indicator ON ON Turns ON when safety output is ON output indicator Blinking Blinks when no beams are blocked in maintenance mode Muting error indicator 9 MUTING ERROR ON Not used Turns ON when a muting error occurs o ON Nor ussd buc x when the blanking function is 10 Blanking Test indicator enabled BLANKING TEST 2 Blinki erised Blinks when external test is being Ing paid performed 1 Lockout indicator LOCKOUT for models with the TS suffix 2 In the TS model this is a test indicator labeled TEST 3 This label is included with the F39 CN6 key cap for muting Affix the label when the muting function is used omnon nw Dm D o lt o 7 uonoojes onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud
322. s connected Light Curtains Up to 3 sets e Number of beams Up to 240 beams e Length of the series connection cable 3 m max Test functions 4 e Self test when power is turned ON and while power is supplied one cycle during response time e External test light emission stop function by test input Safety functions 4 e Auto reset manual reset interlock 5 e External relay monitor e Fixed blanking 6 e Floating blanking 6 Connection method Protective circuits M12 Connector 8 pins Output short circuit protection reverse polarity protection Ambient temperature Operating 10 to 55 C storage 30 to 70 C with no icing or condensation Ambient humidity Ambient operating light intensity Operating storage 35 to 95 with no condensation Incandescent lamp 3 000 Ix max light intensity on the receiver surface Sunlight 10 000 Ix max light intensity on the receiver surface Insulation resistance Dielectric strength 20 MQ min at 500 VDC 1000 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 min Degree of protection IP65 IEC 60529 Vibration resistance Shock resistance Materials Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz 0 7 mm double amplitude 20 sweeps in X Y and Z directions Malfunction 100 m s 1000 times in X Y and Z directions Case Aluminum end cap Zinc die cast optical cover PMMA resin acrylic resin Weight packed state Weight g Protective height x 2 4 ta f a 2700 when the protective
323. s injury The warning zone cannot be used for safety purposes Always install the system so that the hazard is reached by passing through the detection zone The warning zone function can be used only when the F3SJ is installed horizontally This function cannot be used when the F3Su is A installed vertically area Detection zone Warning zone Example Application When an individual enters a warning lamp lights or buzzer sounds without stopping the equipment Description of Function Warning Zone Function Use teaching to set the light beams that you want to set as the warning zone or manually specify the light beams from the lowest or highest beam See figures 1 and 2 To indicate that the warning zone is blocked allocate the auxiliary output or external indicator output as the warning zone information The following settings cannot be made e Setting all light beams as the warning zone figure 4 e Setting a warning zone that does not include one of the outer light beams figure 5 If Safety Light Curtains are connected in series and at least one of an F3SJ s light beams is a normal light beam all of a Light Curtain s light beams can be set as a warning zone figure 3 Example Warning Zone Settings Figures 1 to 3 Figure 1 Warning zone 6 upper light beams Detection zone O O O O O 00000 peeeeeeeeeeeeee Upper Lower Figure 2 Warning zone 4 lower light beams boc
324. s part resulting in serious injury Install a protective structure so that the hazardous part of a machine can only be reached by passing through the sensor s detection zone Install the sensors so that part of the person is always present in the detection zone when working in a machine s hazardous areas If a person is able to step into the hazardous area of a machine and remain behind the F3SJ s detection zone configure the system with an interlock function that prevents the machine from being restarted Otherwise it may result in heavy injury Install the interlock reset switch in a location that provides a clear view of the entire hazardous area and where it cannot be activated from within the hazardous area The F3SJ cannot protect a person from an object flying from a hazardous area Install protective cover s or fence s When detection of an area has been disabled by the fixed blanking function provide a protective structure around the entire area that will prevent a person from passing through it and reaching the hazardous part of the machinery Failure to do so may prevent detection of people and result in serious injury After setting the fixed blanking function be sure to confirm that a test rod is detected within all areas that require detection Failure to do so may prevent detection of people and result in serious injury When the fixed blanking function or the floating blanking function is used the dia
325. s r ia MS4800A 30 2040 102 2040 MS4800B 30 2040 102 2040 MS4800A 30 2080 104 2080 MS4800B 30 2080 104 2080 MS4800A 30 2120 106 2120 MS4800B 30 2120 106 2120 C2 2 Advanced series Curtains Used Individually Basic series Curtains Used Individually Minimum detectable object 40 mm dia Beam gap Minimum detectable object 40 mm dia Beam gap 30mm 30 mm Model Number of beams Protective height mm Model Protective height mm mm MS4800A 40 0360 12 360 MS4800B 40 0360 360 nm MS4800A 40 0480 16 480 MS4800B 40 0480 480 MS4800A 40 0600 20 600 MS4800B 40 0600 600 MS4800A 40 0720 24 720 MS4800B 40 0720 24 720 MS4800A 40 0840 28 840 MS4800B 40 0840 28 840 7 MS4800A 40 0960 32 960 MS4800B 40 0960 32 960 Im rt um S006 00 x um rr E E sine ora 04 0 onm MS4800A 40 1560 52 1560 MAOILE dic ad MS4800A 40 1680 56 1680 M29008 1071500 x T50 MS4800A 40 1800 60 1800 DROE eae 29 ui MS4800A 40 1920 64 1920 MS4800B 40 1800 60 1800 MS4800A 40 2040 68 2040 MS4800B 40 1920 64 1920 MS4800B 40 2040 68 J 2040 omnon MS4800 Series Basic series Curtains Connected in Series Minimum detectable object 30 mm dia Beam gap Advanced series Curtains Connected in Series Minimum detectable object 30 mm dia Beam gap omnon 20 mm 20
326. safety Sensors NEW PRODUCT M i Safety Sensor Product Selection 238 Precautions for All Safety Sensors 242 Safety Light Curtain MS4800 Series NEW 246 Safety Light Curtain Type 4 F3SJ Ver 2 282 Wire saving Device for F3SJ 358 Connector Terminal Box Muting Terminals for F3SJ A F39 TC5 360 m ee gg Safety Terminal Relays for F3SJ ACICILILIPETET F3SP TO1 368 fae Safety Light Curtain F3SN A 378 B F3SN B Multi beam Safety Sensor F3SH A 3 8 Safety Light Curtain Multi beam Safety Sensor F3SN ALISS 410 3 aoc Single beam Safety Sensor E3ZS E3FS 432 9 Single beam Safety Sensor for Long Distance Detection F3SS 448 ws S S o o So go z o eo o L Ro e t Tl O ba V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 SS J p oun exp eene ecu reed eed uei elem deri im re eee e Heer liec i ime er V eee emn ee ie e erm mde rue iem mr e c nem irm rui iem em e ee 4 Product Discontinuation and Recommended Substitute Products No information on Product Discontinuation and Recommended Substitute of Safety Sensors available Ayayes o D gt o o o uonooJes jonpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 SUOIINEIAId 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LO L dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 1S 4 SSLIV NS 4 szed S
327. sary connect between X1 and H1 KM1 KM2 Relay with forcibly guided contacts G7SA T KM3 Solid state contactor 63 a M 3 phase motor n El 24 VDC power supply S82K BRE enm PLC Programmable Controller peau e Used for monitoring This is not a part of a safety system oo 2 Timing Chart d Light incident EE EN Light interrupted External test switch i i S1 o OE 3 3 3 Reset switch RG Interlock Test Reset Auxili os BN E E NN TZ secon output TM Control output E E K1 K2 1 A di E K L N O contact E E KM1 KM2 I Q External device N O contact P monitoring eae D N c contact a N KM1 KM2 _ 3 24 VDC N C contact E1 l l Y e PLC input1 Depends on the operation mode of the auxiliary output Oo PLC input 2 PLC output z Wiring for the auto reset mode Bo i Note 1 If the EDM is not necessary short circuit T31 and T32 2 For the number and arrangement of all terminals on the F3SP B1P see the instruction manual packaged together with the F3SP B1P 4 L1 01 1 amp Interlock Test selection omnon F3SN AL SS An Example of Safety Circuits Where the F3SX Safety Controller is Used with Two F3SN AL SS Sets Connected F3SX EL2 Manual Reset
328. screws are not tightened properly the degree of protection may not be obtained and the screws may come loose from vibration e If the cables are connected with the polarity reversed the load will not operate or the operation indicator will not light e Make sure that signal lines are always connected through a load e Use Sensors that meet the specifications e Do not pull on the connectors and cables Doing so may damage the connector or break the cable e To avoid breaking the cable and damaging the connector install them in a location where there is no danger of stepping on them If you mustinstall them in a location where they mightbe stepped on place a protective cover on them e When installing the product do not bend the cable where it is connected to the product e f you must bend the cable make sure that the bend radius is greater than 60 mm e f you are not going to install Sensors and switches place waterproof covers XS2Z 22 on the connectors to protect the contact surface Storage Observe the following points when storing the product for an extended period of time 1 Make sure that the storage location is well protected against dust and humidity 2 Do notstore the product close to areas where ammonia or sulfurization gas is generated MEMO omnon Safety Terminal Relays for ERES E NUN LL F3SP T01 Simplifies wiring from Safety Light Curtains to the Safety Relay outputs e Simplifies
329. set Mode em KM km3 KM PLC etc etc V HS 4 g8 NS J V NS 4 Motor controller c Qo operation command z s o Control output ENEN BN o l I KM1 KM2 NC contacts l l Co CO AE KM3 KM4NC contacts o f OW I I i KM1 KM2 NO contacts l l a KM3 KM4 NO contacts gt Se o EE S3 Reset switch o Motor operation command Jo ANN i 1 For the MS MSF4800B use NC contacts for the start input switch I i T i For the MS MSF 4800A refer to Start Input Methods MS MSF4800A Only Motor rotation on page 266 k l x2 Fuse provided by the customer OFF delay time 3 The test input is disabled with the default setting To use the test input connect the PDM to the Receiver and enable the test input and use NC contacts for the test input omnon Connection to the MS4800 RM6 Resource Module MSF4800A Only Power supply Earth 24 VDC OV ground MSF4800 Receiver Black OSSD 1 O Ce e UO N 4 Pink Auxiliary output 5 Start a Yellow F WO Eeee 31 Hed Brown ED2 Brown 24 VDC Green M12 connector x2 EDT 0 V Ground Orange OO OO ET aaa MSF4800 Transmitter MTS White T return Brown 24 VDC Ground x o 8 9 MS4800 RM6 Resource Module VDC Return RS485 RS485 Shield Ground MTS Tes
330. sors generate beams in a Spacing A 670 mm max zB time sharing manner Thus they prevent mutual interference and e Forthe F39 L20 ensure Safety Spacing B 400 mm max d Correct Note When installing sensors at if Ens Beceri locations susceptible to l vibration and shock increase E i ov Banat the number of mounting 5 connection brackets oo F39 JCR2B or E A a5 F39 JCR5B or z me F39 JC3B 93 Emitter 2 Receiver 2 Receiver a 22 S A tc dl o So CEA Emitter i A 2 E o g 1 e Incorrect Incorrect ES Emitter 1 Receiver 1 Emitter 1 _ Receiver 2 Mounting bracket Screw x length mm Tightening torque F39 L19 M5 x 12 screw 2 0 N m F39 L20 M4 x 8 screw 1 2 Ne m a lt F39 L19 F39 L20 Q Emitter d i Receiver 2 Emitter 2 E T i broker s id ud T Mounting sn Y Toothed washer bracket 3 D 2 pcs 4 O Emitter e receiver mounted LL face PPL m C2 A M5 x 12 Do not connect the emitter and Do not combine an emitter with a screw 9 receiver in series or a lockout condition will result When not connected receiver of a different pair This will cause a lockout condition and detection of objects will be disabled Refer to Precautions for All Safety Sensors on page 242 for Mounting bracket 2 Brackets and screws included in one set e Mounting bracket 1 1 e Mounting bracket 2 1 e M5 x 12 screw 1
331. st be taken to ensure safety while this function is working Install muting sensors so that they can distinguish between the object that is being allowed to be pass through the detection zone and a person Muting lamps external indicators that indicate the status of the muting function must be installed where they are clearly visible to workers from all the operating positions Muting times must be precisely set according to the application by qualified personnel who have received appropriate training In particular if the muting time limit is to be set to infinity the person who makes the setting must bear responsibility Use two independent input devices for the muting inputs For the PNP output type F3SJ use a sensor with a PNP transistor output or N O contact For the NPN output type F3SJ use a sensor with an NPN transistor output or N O type contact To prevent a worker from entering the hazardous area while the muting function is engaged install the F3SJ muting sensor and then a protective barrier and set a limited muting time omnon Example Applications e Allowing only work pieces to pass into the conveyor entrance e Operating the muting function in a specific area only e Setting a different muting mode when standard muting is not appropriate for the application Description of Functions See User s Manual for details Operation Modes When the SD Manager Setting Support Software is being use
332. t 1 0 V X2 x3 X4 5 x6 X7 MS4800 Series Suppressor O To machine control H ED1 ED2 Muting inputs Sensors with PNP outputs 24 VDC x11 RO Dark operate 24 VDC Light operate Ed 24 VDC Dark operate d 24 VDC Light operate Edi T S In 1 S In 2 S In 3 S In 4 Lamp 24 VDC 87 When using relays with forcibly guided contacts as the final control devices they must be monitored Connect the red wire to 0 V via the NC contacts Do not use both external devices simultaneously The user can use the Programming and Diagnostics Module to turn OFF the external device monitoring EDM function for pre installation testing When doing this the EDM wire red wire must be connected to 0 V Auxiliary Output PNP 100 mA max default Fuse provided by the customer The start connection is shown with NC contacts connected to 0 V Insert suppressors in parallel with the final control devices The MTS test input is disabled with the default setting To use the test input connectthe PDM to the Receiver and enable the test input and use NC contacts for the test input For details refer to the Mini Safe 4800 Series Safety Light Curtains Installation and Operating Manual Connect the yellow wire to 24 VDC to enable external device monitoring EDM and to 0 V to disable EDM 10 Not used 11 There is no need to connect sensor inputs that are not used omnon Ayayes
333. t 1 when using the muting function the default setting is auto reset Use a setting tool for manual reset omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 uonoogjes onpo4d sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suoineoaud 008t SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o ow oa D 7 o lt o 7 uonoogjes jonpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J SOL 6E4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 SS J F3SJ Ver 2 Diagnostic Functions Self test A self test is performed to check for errors when the power is turned ON within 2 seconds within 2 2 seconds when series connected Also the self test is regularly performed within the response time while operating Waveform of Control Outputs When the F3SJ is receiving light the control outputs cyclically turn OFF as shown below to test the output circuit When this OFF signal is fed back the output circuit is diagnosed as normal If the output signal does not include an OFF pulse signal the receiver determines that a failure has occurred with the output circuit or wiring and enters lockout state Refer to the following illustration Approx 15 ms ON Control output 1 2 OFF OFF signal Approx 65 us Approx 140 us Exter
334. t incident light N 7 N 7 N or X Alo 4 7 N P4 N 7 N Power supply voltage of F3SJ is out of the rated range Insufficient current capacity of power supply Incident light to blanking beams 010 88 Kx N Nh Nom hl PA Failure in communication line Emitter and receiver have different F3SJ type names or number of series connections 7 TN a ZN N 7 N g 7 N Outside the effective range of parameters set by setting tool Cap is not attached o xXx External device monitor failure 4 N 0 3 01010 e Ne ZEN Failure in interlock selection input line or reset input line Muting wiring failure P4 N N 7 7 N 7 N N P4 N P4 Failure in control output wiring Failure in series connection cable wiring 01010 N 7 N g 7 N Nal 4 N Pd Failure in wiring of external display lamp output Failure in wiring of auxiliary output f 0 0 4 bab 0X XX XX ri ZN Broken series connection cable Wiring error or broken communications wire Ne Nash js Neh LTN omnon Influence of electrical noise or failure in a series connected F3SJ Safety related Functions Interlock Function The F3SJ turns the safety outputs OFF when the power is turned ON or when a beam is interrupted and maintains this state until a reset signal is applied This state is called interlock Yo
335. t input resets the interlock condition and the OSSD outputs go to the ON state e Start restart interlock After the power is turned ON or when at least one beam is interrupted the light curtain enters the interlock condition e Start interlock Only after power ON the light curtain enters the interlock condition e Restart interlock Only when at least one beam is interrupted the light curtain enters the interlock condition Fixed Blanking Function F3SN A only This function is set with the F39 MC11 setting console This is a function provided to disable a specific area of the light curtain s detection zone Fixed blanking can be set for any desired number of beams If an object enters the disabled detection zone the OSSD outputs status will not change This function is used when there is a stationary object in the detection zone that needs to be ignored Floating Blanking Function F3SN A only This function is set with the F39 MC11 setting console During normal operation when floating blanking is disabled and at leastone beam is interrupted the light curtain will go to the OF F state However using this function prevents the light curtain from going to the OFF state until multiple beams amp 1 2 and amp 3 are interrupted 3 1 The number of the floating blanking beams can be selected in the range of 1 to 3 beams 2 This function can be set to be active only if the interrupted beams are adjacent to each other
336. tains di e lt 9 N C2 P Oo Ql TI C2 5 E Q V HS 4 a NSe4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o omnon F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Names and Functions of Parts Emitter F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Test Lockout Interlock Power ERROR A Test indicator Orange ii Lockout indicator Red 5 LEVEL Interlock indicator Yellow Error mode Light intensity level Power indicator Green indicator Red indicator Green Receiver F3SN A E OFF state indicator Red Error mode Light intensity e ON state indicator Green indicator Red level indicator Green T Lockout indicator Red Blanking indicator G p INN Blanking Lockout ON OFF 5 LEVEL QU 0 O 3g Receiver F3SN B O Zu OFF state indicator R ed Error mode Light intensity level pg ON state indicator Green indicator R ed indicator Green ES Lockout indicator Red 7 TE Optional function indicator Green 3 I lt OPT Lockout ON OFF 5 LEVEL o s Receiver F3SH A e e i OFF state indicator Red Error mode Light intensity level ON state indicator Green indicator Red indicator Green D Lockout indicator R ed Power indicator Green D X N Power Lockout ON OFF ERROR A 5 LEVEL TL l l 2 These indicators flash to indicate the need for preventive maintena
337. tc e Manual reset mode p ES E ES j U G9SB 301 D Settings KM1 KM2 Magnetic contactors e Feedback loop used Ped c eM aud e Emergency stop switch used E4 2 no power supply PLC Programmable Controller Used for monitoring This is not a part of a safety system nw Dm D 7 o lt o IN1 IN2 5 A lt S o c g 3 9 e 2 oS co E S JE I Z amp amp F i gS 9s 2 D 2s gl amp ab e 2 gt ap B lt o o No Uu E coc c c 5 1 a gt oc x Q 8 oro E XO 3 9 KM3 I9 E lt S AS no As 2o o2 eU lt A 008tSIN oO Qo c lt 2 N oO v O Ol Tl C2 Qo G9SB 301 D bi Q Light incident i T Light interrupted nnm Ioi C3 C3 C2 External test switch S1 A oon aM EMT gt UD Interlock reset switch S3 i i BE BN 1 For the MS MSF4800B use NC contacts for the start input switch T Forthe MS MSF4800A refer to Start Input Methods MS MSF4800A Emergency stop switch S4 Ss Only on a 266 p o NE BEN x2 Fuse provided by the customer Control output x3 The testinputis disabled with the default setting To use the test input T d connect the PDM to the Receiver and enable the test input and use y K1 K2 NO contacts C E c NC contacts for the test input KM1 KM2 NO contacts C9 C9 NTI i MEE oi oo K1 K2 NC contacts EO NND KM1 KM2 NC contacts EN x fm EL m Fog Fo
338. tectable object 40 mm dia beam gap 30 mm or 70 mm dia beam gap 60 mm V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 q e Protective height 2 F3SN A 217 to 1 822 mm gt F3SN B 217 to 1 777 mm 7 o m m C3 C9 N TI OW e o o omnon F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A A New Concept to Meet User Needs Various Safety Functions Built into the Sensor Connect Up To Three Sets in Series without Pp many SAIE GIFCHIE SOngdgredens Mutual Interference Auto reset or manual reset Combine Standard Models with Linking Models with Connectors to External relay monitoring connect up to three sets in series Wiring is required only for one set instead of wiring all three sets as would have been required Select the Safety Circuits for the Required Safety previously to enable protecting all sides of hazardous areas Mutual Standards interference protection is also provided Build Circuits for Type 4 F3SN A F3SH A or Type 2 F3SN B with No Relay Units 2 Relays with Forcibly Guided Contacts Reduced Costs and Reduced Space Requirements A built in external relay monitor function eliminates the need for Safety Relay Units Ayayes o D o o o No Safety R elay Units e me SEC dw F39 J COA i S Welded relay detection Safety Light c g Circuit is possible PHNAGIS A ur Curtains with two Relays with De F3S
339. tem of the guarded machine function properly and that the machine stops as intended If the test results in failure there is a strong possibility that a serious accident could occur involving an operator Wiring Precautions N WARNING For an PNP output connect the load between the output and 0 V line Connecting the load between the output and 24 V line results in a dangerous condition because the operation mode is reversed to ON when light is interrupted Do not interconnect an output line with the 24 V line Otherwise the output is always ON creating a dangerous situation Also 0 V of the power supply must be grounded so that output does not turn ON due to grounding of the output line Configure the system by using the optimal number of control outputs that satisfy the requirements of the necessary safety category Do not connect the lines of the MS MSF4800 to a DC power supply higher than 24 VDC 20 Also do not connect to an AC power supply Otherwise it may result in electric shock For the MS MSF4800 to comply with IEC 61496 1 and UL 508 the DC power supply unit must satisfy all of the following conditions e Must be within rated power voltage 24 VDC 20 e Must have tolerance against the total rated current of devices if it is connected to multiple devices e Must comply with EMC directives industrial environment e Double or enhanced insulation must be applied between the primary and secondary circuit
340. th a setting tool When the F3SJ is shipped all light beams are set The light beams can be specified by teaching recording the blocked light beams as muting light beams or manually specifying the desired light beams Indicator and I O Settings F3SJ Ver 2 Auxiliary Output Non safety and External Indicator Output Non safety Summary A setting tool can be used to change the allocation of auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 and external indicator outputs 1 and 2 Do not use the auxiliary outputs or external indicator outputs for safety purposes Serious injury may result if an output fails and a person is not detected Example Applications e Allocating a lockout output or warning zone output to an auxiliary output e Connecting an external indicator to an auxiliary output and making it flash An auxiliary output or external indicator output can be connected to an incandescent light to function as a broken wire or short circuit detector Refer to the User s Manual for details Output Operation Modes when allocated to an auxiliary output or external indicator output Description of operation SD Manager Setting CH SEN CYTE SM fern er Output will go ON in the following situation seltingi amp ensole Support Software Control output The control output is ON O O The F3SJ is ON and the received light intensity O O Light intensity diagnosis 1 is 100 to 130 of the threshold value for more tha
341. th the F3SJ total of 4 per set Remarks Cap attaches to the main unit to enable muting function Attach it to either an emitter or a receiver Case orange Setting Tools 1 F3SJ Ver 2 Type Appearance Model Remarks 7 Accessories SD Manager CD ROM 1 SD Manager Setting A F39 CN1 Branch Connector 1 Support Software for the rs N F39 GWUM Connector Cap 1 2 m Dedicated Cable F3SJ sm A 1 0 3 m Dedicated Cable with Plug 1 a s oa I Instruction Manual Accessories F39 CN1 Branch Connector Setting Console F39 MC21 2 1 Connector Cap 1 2 m Dedicated Cable 1 0 3 m Dedicated Cable with Plug 1 Instruction Manual 1 The setting tools described above can be connected only to F3SJ A models with built in software of Ver 2 or later Note that the setting tools cannot be used with products shipped prior to December 2005 The setting tools cannot be used for setting parameters on the F3SJ AL TS series but the monitoring function can be used k2 This product is for use only with the F3SJ A It cannot be connected to conventional models of the F3SN A series Similarly the F39 MC11 and F39 MT11 Dedicated Consoles for the F3SN A cannot be connected to the F3SJ A series Protective Bar Main unit mounting bracket 1 and a rear mounting bracket set 1 Type Protective Bar Set Appearance am a vi Model F39 PJ I J S 2 Remarks Rear Mounting Brackets 2 including interm
342. the Start Button is disabled MS4800 Series Blanking Functions Advanced Series Only Fixed Blanking This function is used when a machine or workpiece constantly interrupts beams in a part of the sensing area Fixed blanking allows the S afety Light Curtain to remain in the Machine Run State while the obstruction in the sensing area as a non moving object The output is turned OFF when a beam other than the set fixed blanking beams is interrupted or when light is incident on a fixed blanking beam Floating Blanking This function turns OFF the output when the total number of interrupted beams inside the sensing area exceeds the number of set beams 1 or 2 Monitored Blanking This function is used when a machine or workpiece constantly interrupts beams in a part of the sensing area and moves within the sensing area Monitored blanking allows the S afety Light Curtain to remain in the Machine Run State while the obstruction moves within the sensing area The output is turned OFF when the machine or workpiece disappears from the monitored blanking area that was set by teaching or when the total number of interrupted beams increases due to a different obstruction Reduced Resolution Blanking When the resolution of the MS MSF 4800A is reduced the size of the minimum detectable object is increased The output will not turn OFF regardless of how many continuous interrupted beams there are in the sensing area as long as the beams ar
343. time under connection See page 301 Test functions Safety functions Connection type Protective circuits Ambient temperature Self test when power is turned ON and while power is supplied e External test emission stop function by test input e External device monitor e Muting Override function included F39 CN6 Key Cap for muting is required Lockout occurs under either of the following conditions e When more than 3 Units are connected in series e When the total number of beams connected in series exceeds 240 e When any model other than a TS model is included in a series connection Connectors M12 8 pin Output short circuit protection and power supply reverse polarity protection Operating 10 to 55 C no icing Storage 30 to 70 C Ambient humidity Operating 35 to 85 no condensation Storage 35 to 95 Ambient operating light intensity Insulation resistance Dielectric strength Degree of protection Incandescent lamp 3 000 Ix max light intensity on the receiver surface Sunlight 10 000 Ix max light intensity on the receiver surface 20 MO min at 500 VDC 1 000 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 min IP65 IEC60529 Vibration resistance Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz 0 7 mm double amplitude 20 sweeps in X Y and Z directions Shock resistance Malfunction 100 m s 1 000 times each in X Y and Z directions Materials Weight packed state Casing including metal parts on
344. ting hours is reached Operating mode can be changed with the setting tool External indicator output 2 ON when lock out for a basic system Operating mode can be changed with the setting tool ON when muting override for a muting system Operating mode can be changed with the setting tool Use of the Spatter Protection Cover causes a 10 maximum sensing distance attenuation omnon Model Input voltage Indicators Mutual interference prevention function PNP outputs NPN outputs PNP output NPN output Emitter Receiver F3SJ Ver 2 IP30 F3SJ A IP20 F3SJ A I IP55 F3SJ A IP25 F3SJ A IP14 F3SJ A IN30 F3SJ A IN55 I 1 IN20 F3SJ A I N25 F3SJ A F3SJ ALIL JL I N14 F3SJ A Test input interlock selection input reset input and muting input are all ON voltage 9 to 24 V Vs sink current 3 mA max OFF voltage 0 to 1 5 V or open External device monitoring input ON voltage 9 to 24 V Vs sink current 5 mA max OFF voltage 0 to 1 5 V or open Test input interlock selection input reset input and muting input are all ON voltage 0 to 1 5 V short circuit current 3 mA max OFF voltage 9 to 24 V or open External device monitoring input ON voltage 0 to 1 5 V short circuit current 5 mA max OFF voltage 9 to 24 V or open Light intensity level indica
345. tion Type 4 ESPE EN61496 1 Type 4 AOPD prEN61496 2 4 The F3SN A F 3SH A received the following certification from the Third Party Assessment Body UL e Certificate of UL listing for US and Canadian safety standards Both of which are TYPE 4 ESPE UL61496 1 TYPE 4 AOPD UL61496 2 5 The F3SN A F3SH A received the following certification from BG PRUFZERT of Germany e BG test and certification mark License Type 4 ESPE EN61496 1 Type 4 AOPD prEN61496 2 3 The F3SN A F 3SH A is designed according to the following standards To make sure that the F 35 N A F 3S H A complies with the following standards and regulations you are asked to design and use it as provided by any other related standards laws and regulations Underlined regulations are applicable to the F 3S N A only Consult UL or other standardization bodies if you have any questions e EN415 4 prEN691 EN692 prEN693 European standards e OSHA 29 CFR 1910 212 US Industrial S afety and Health Regulation e OSHA 29 CFR 1910 217 US Industrial Safety and Health Regulation e ANSI B11 1 B11 19 US standard e ANSI RIA 15 06 US standard e Guideline Concerning Failsafe Methods for Control Mechanisms in Machine Tools 28 J uly 1998 The Announcement No 464 Ministry of Health Labour and Welfare F3SN B 1 Type Certification specified in the Chapter 44 2 of the Industrial S afety and Health Law in J apan does not apply to independent units of the
346. tion manual F3SJ Ver 2 Example of a Safety Circuit with the Muting System For PNP output Wiring for muting function with single F3SJ application category 4 When two muting sensors are connected e Attaching a keycap for muting F39 CN6 enables the muting function to be used Muting lamp external indicator nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 Auto reset mode Eu Using external device monitoring function Emitter Receiver O D Og o amp 5 OSD o 23o 0 PQ S o5 E 9S EE Qo F39 JCLIA L f F39 JCLIA D S e Gray e Communication line t C3 E i Ns s zI 2 lt Be P Ef gal 8 8 z 2 e Eg Communica 9 922 SIG Z x D o 2 ten Fi m KM1 QN 5 Oo 166 tion line i LL T amp g xS 5 5 5 Wp 5 0 4 82 2 a Q M LE N 2Es Ss ii E KM22 49 8 gge c x lt O 2 C2 Qo bs e as Muting sensor E 24 VDC PNP output E1 i Fl a C 3 Reflector 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 T MT i S1 External test switch connect to 0 V if the switch is not Timing Chart _ Light incident necessary Light interrupted ME EE l i l S2 Lockout reset switch connect to 24 V if the switch is not y Mutinginput1 E were l i T Lo ie 4 i KM1 KM2 Safety relay with forcibly guided contacts G7SA or mE MEME magnetic contactor p Muting inp
347. toring not related Reset switch S2 E R to safety system i i i Wiring for auto reset mode Control output Fl Fm Pj r K1 K2 N O contact KM2 di S1 External test switch T 92 Interlock lockout reset switch Q KM1 KM2 Magnetic contactor Timi Chart ighi meid ni o i i i KM3 Solid state contactor Gi3J iming Char fia amie M 3 phase motor E1 24 VDC power supply S82K a External test switch S1 PLC Programmable controller Q l l V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 C2 TE TENE o KM1 KM2 N O contact Pd 0 K1 K2 N C contact llr Ell o E I l Interlock l EE Ig selection KM1 KM2 N C contacto Too LLL 4 mm I I I I I N Tl E EE Wiring when the external device VAR PLCinputt Bd nie E j monitoring function will not be used PLC input 2 External device i Al Loa monitoring 7 PLC output o The output operation mode for auxiliary output 1 is control output data inverse of control output signals enabled default setting Note When the F3SP B1P is used the system cannot be used as a muting system omnon Ayayes o D o o o uonoog es onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud LOL dS 4 SOL 6E4 c 49A PSEA 008T SIN V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 SS J F3SJ Ver 2 Wiring for connection with a controll
348. tors green LED x 2 orange LED x 3 ON based on the light intensity Error mode indicators red LED x 3 Blink to indicate error details Power indicator green LED x 1 ON while power is on Interlock indicator yellow LED x 1 ON while under interlock blinks at lockout External device monitoring indicator muting input 1 indicator Blanking test indicator muting input 2 indicator green LED x 2 ON flash according to function Light intensity level indicators green LED x 2 orange LED x 3 ON based on the light intensity Error mode indicators red LED x 3 Blink to indicate error details OFF output indicator red LED x 1 ON when safety output is OFF blinks at lockout ON output indicator green LED x 1 ON while safety output is ON muting error indicator Blanking test indicator green LED x 2 ON flash according to function Interference light prevention algorithm detection distance change function nw Dm D 7 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaJd Series connection Test functions Time division emission by series connection e Number of connections up to 4 sets e Total number of beams up to 400 beams e Maximum cable length for 2 sets no longer than 15 m e Response time under connection See page 301 Self test when power is turned ON and while power is supplied External test emission stop function by test input 008v SIN Safety functions Start int
349. ts malfunctions such as welded contacts in external relays or contactors that control the hazardous area of a machine This function constantly monitors that a specified voltage is applied to the Receiver s external device monitoring input line and enters LOCKOUT state when an error occurs The relay s operational delay can be up to 300 ms without being evaluated as an error To utilize this function properly use relays and contactors thathave a forcibly guided contact structure Enabling Disabling External Device Monitoring The external device monitoring can be enabled or disabled with the Programming and Diagnostics Module When using the Auto Start Mode enabling and disabling can be switched by combining the start input line with the external device monitoring wiring Note For details refer to the Mini Safe 4800 Series Safety Light Curtains Installation and Operating Manual Machine Test Signal MTS The Machine Test Signal MTS is used to confirm that the safety system stops correctly when an MS MSF 4800 beam is interrupted by purposely halting the emission with an external signal MTS is provided by placing a normally closed switch across the MTS and MTS Return lines ofthe Transmitter A close to open transition on this switch will enable the MTS and halt the emission Other Functions Sensing Distance Selection The Programming and Diagnostics Module can be used to select the sensing distance The ShortRange Mode is 8 m and
350. tthe PDM to the Receiver and enable the test input and use NC contacts for the test input omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 uonoog es onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 SUOIINEIAId LOL dS 4 SOL 6E4 6 49A FSES 008T SIN V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o MS4800 Series Example When Connected to the G9SA 301 Controller Category 4 MS MSF4800 Settings Transmitter Receiver e Auto start mode J S1 External test switch e External device monitoring not used S2 Start input e Test input used S3 Interlock reset switch Use the PDM to enable the test input SSS S4 Emergency stop switch A165E A22E etc G9SA 301 Settings KM1 KM2 Magnetic contactors e Manual reset mode KM3 Solid state contactor G3J M 3 phase motor E1 24 VDC power supply C e Feedback loop used e Emergency stop switch used PLC Programmable Controller Used for monitoring This is not a part of a safety system nw a D 72 o lt o 7 TN Goes D IN1 IN2 T S 2 S 5 2 D T m C _ C3 3 S a S c a O has 5 T e 2 5 2 3 2 e B s s o9 Io 2 z al S 2 5 en E vE a 2 2 I cg e ES eS Ew c og me Fi L e o PO o 2 GOS 20 o2 zo o rx Co e eo T e o ce M lt Wiring for the Auto PL s BP CIL RES e 4 Control Q E TI Di 63 24 94
351. u can reset this interlock by 2 methods auto reset that automatically turns safety output ON when an interrupting object is removed and manual reset mode that keeps safety output OFF until a reset signal is provided if the interrupting object is removed Auto Reset Mode When an interrupting object is removed safety output automatically turns ON Auto reset is used on machines where a worker is not able to enter the area between the detection zone and the hazardous part of the machine Note Auto reset is always used in the F3SJ ALI TS series Auto reset wiring procedure For PNP output 1 Open the interlock selection input line or short circuit it to 0 to 1 5 V pin 1 white 2 Short circuit the reset input line to 9 to 24 V pin 4 yellow 3 Turn ON the power of F3SJ For NPN output 1 Open the interlock selection input line or short circuit it to 9 to 24 V pin 1 white 2 Short circuit the reset input line to 0 to 1 5 V pin 4 yellow 3 Turn ON the power of F3SJ Manual Reset Mode When a reset input is given while no interrupting object exists in a detection zone the safety outputs turn ON This allows the machine to be manually reset using a reset switch after ensuring safety preventing unexpected startup Light Light incident incident Light Light interrupted interrupted Reset Input ON SMS eset Inpu Po OEP ON Controoupt ol o ooo 0 00000 OFF l l l Sensorstatus Interloc
352. u have any questions consult with UL or other specialized organizations e European standards EN 415 4 EN 692 EN 693 e US Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA 29 CFR 1910 212 e US Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA 29 CFR 1910 217 e American National Standard Institute ANSI B11 1 to B11 19 e American National Standard Institute ANSI RIA 15 06 e Canadian Standards Association CSA Z142 Z432 Z434 e SEMI standard SEMI S2 Precautions for Safe Use Indications and Meanings for Safe Use To ensure safe use of the MS MSF 4800 signal words and an alert symbol are used in this document to indicate safety related instructions These instructions describe details very important to your safety It is extremely important that you understand and follow the instructions The signal words and alert symbol used in this document are shown below Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in minor or moderate injury or may result VAN WARNING in serious injury or death Additionally there may by significant property damage Meaning of Symbol General Prohibition Indicates a general prohibition Warning Indications N WARNING The MS MSF4800 is a safety area sensor that is designed to protect operators who work in hazardous environments such as those containing operating machinery MS MSF4800 safety levels for specific applications and installation cond
353. ugh the detection zone and a person If the muting function is activated by the detection of a person it may result in serious injury Muting times must be precisely set according to the application by qualified personnel who have received appropriate training In particular if the muting time limit is to be set to infinity the person who makes the setting must bear responsibility Use two independent input devices for the muting inputs Install the MS MSF4800 Muting Sensors or a protective wall so that workers cannot enter hazardous areas while muting is in effect and set muting times Position the switch that is used to activate the override function in a location where the entire hazardous area can be seen and where the switch cannot be operated from inside the hazardous area Make sure that nobody is in the hazardous area before activating the override function Install the MS MSF4800 so that it is not affected by reflective surfaces Failure to do so may hinder detection resulting in serious injury When using more than one set of MS MSF4800 install them so that mutual interference does not occur such as by configuring series connections using physical light blocking barriers or changing scan codes between adjacent sets Make sure that the MS MSF4800 is securely mounted and its cables and connectors are properly connected Make sure that no foreign material such as water oil or dust enters the MS MSF
354. unting holes 4 5 5 2 mounting holes 20 Dimensions according to the model can be calculated by using the following equations e F3SN ALTL IL ILIP 14 01 e F3SN A P 25 01 P 40 01 P 70 01 F3SN B Dimension C2 protective height 4 digits in the model name P 40 01 P 70 01 P 25 01 Dimension A 2 C2 86 Dimension B 2 C2 54 Dimension D 215 5 Dimension E 2C2 9 Dimension C1 protective height 4 digits in the model name Dimension A 2 C1 64 Dimension B 2 C1 32 Dimension D 18 5 Dimension E 2 C1 37 Dimension F See the table below Dimension F See the table below Dimension P 9 Number of Number of C2 protective height intermediate jus RS 1 C1 protective height intermediate yide aa 7 Mounting Bracket i Mounting Bracket to 0620 to 0640 0 0621 to 1125 F B 2 0641 to 1280 1 F B 2 Note If value F obtained from the above equation is not used set F 1281 to 1822 2 F B 3 to 670 mm or less Dimension P See the table below Detection capability Dimension P 25 40 70 omnon F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A F3SH A09P03 01 F3SH A09P03 01 14 Connector cap 17 3 20 8 2 mounting brackets Mounting screw holes 2 mounting holes 20 gt sacs D eal 2 o
355. ur nw oe 0 9 t8 4 4 jp 4 beam mark ry i i 2 o I ey D Q 484 5 oc o Og U E O Two M5 o gt D oz Two M5 Sc S o lt 15 Y 41 8 38 di 969 1001 969 L Intermediate 2 mounting holes E bracket M5 up set hexagon bolt H oO o c 484 5 N 300 4H C2 e j O c ry 18 5 gt oO i e Q A n LIU qp T e 4 mounting holes 4 l 2 mounting holes 9 dia V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 Mounting Precautions y 1 The intermediate bracket 3 see Mounting brackets di intermediate is shown on the left hand side of the sensor as an o example If the intermediate bracket 3 is on the right hand side of the sensor then the mounting holes must also be on the right hand eo f r D side TIT o 2 When using with the cable bent allow at least the dimensions ug shown on the right Minimum bending radius of cable R36 mm HH E G2 C2 b 80 mm min R36 mm Connector cable a t o o omnon o Qo 9n D 7 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 SUOIINEIAId 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Accessories Mounting Bracket Top and Bottom Material Iron zinc plating R2 max Note Provided with t
356. ut 2 KM3 Solid state contactor G3J Dd d M 3 phase motor Control output E1 24 VDC power supply S82K mm itt fi PLC Programmable controller Used for monitoring not P KM1 KM2 N O contact related to safety system i ott d Muting sensor Retro reflective photoelectric sensor E3Z R81 KM1 KM2 N C contact i i l I I I l TI I I I I D PLC input l o PLC output 3 The output operation mode for auxiliary output 1 is control output data inverse of control output signals enabled default setting Note Start interlock and restart interlock can be used with a setting tool omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt o uonoogjes onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud LOL dS 4 SOL 6E4 c 49A PSEA 008v SIN V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 SS J F3SJ Ver 2 When four muting sensors are connected e The muting function can be used by attaching the F39 CN6 Key Cap Muting lamp external indicator Emitter F39 JC ds Hr Gray Communication line Pink Communica tion line electo E I gt NENNEN Workpiece gt Shield 5 T lo c 2 o OQ Cc OJ O 2 T O EZE Seq j gt Q a E 2 Muting input 2 o E External device Muting sensor l PNP output F39 JCLIA D monitoring input Red Auxiliary output
357. utput 1 Yellow 1 Open or muting input 1 for models with the TS suffix 2 Open or muting input 2 for models with the TS suffix omnon 24 VDC F3SJ Ver 2 NPN Output Type The numbers in white circles indicate the connector s pin numbers The black circles indicate connectors for series connection The words in brackets indicate the signal name for muting system External indicator output 2 Brown 24 VDC 169 Emitter Main Circuit o h it p lt Muting input 1 Yellow Reset input o D gt o o o uonoojes onpoJd Pg 3 2 Communication line o ES oO E i i o External indicator output 1 co Brown Receiver Main Circuit 2 T 62 j lt N ULP l o l Receiver ll a Main Circuit 1 T e He T C2 P Indication 3 v Lee ee a a a Shield T T T i 895 Single end Connector Cable zz Signal Name Model Internal wiring Basic system 1 Muting system 1 03 Receiver Emitter Receiver Emitter in Interlock TE o F39 Safety output 2 Sur Safety output 2 Muting input 1 JCRS5A 0 5 m ae selection input 2 T SAID 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC m m F39 Control output 1 Test Input Control output 1 Test Input go JC3A 3 m 00 Auxiliary output 1 Reset input Auxiliary output 1 Reset input F39 Communication Communication C
358. utual interference of Safety Light Curtains that are not connected in series omnon nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 uonoogjes onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaJd 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSL IV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o Single beam Safety Sensor E3ZS ES3FS Detects Intrusions into Hazardous Areas with a Single Beam and Complies with International Safety Standards wn h D lt A Be sure to read the Safety Precautions on page 446 and the Precautions for All Safety Sensors on page 242 o D o o o Features Connect up to 4 sets of E3ZS E3FS per B1 Module for F3SX Safety Controller Connect to a B1 Module for F3SX to Create a Type 2 Safety Sensor Note The B1 Module is designed specifically for E3ZS ESFS input of the F3SX The safety output turns OFF when light is interrupted or when an error occurs with one or more of the E3ZS ESFS Sensors connected to the B1 Module uonoogjes onpo4d SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud B1 Module for the F3SX F3SX EB1 shown here 008v SIN Connects simply and easily using a wide range of accessories Ww E3FS 10B4 2M 6 49A l S J SOL 6E4 Dummy plug For unused E3ZS E3FS Sensor connectors LOL dS 4 ESZS T81A V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 F3SX EB
359. ve Device omnon E3ZS E3FS Connections Circuit Diagram Example F3SX EB1 Manual Reset Emitter Receiver S te E Circuit diagram example without E 2 4 an E3FS 10B4 5 amp 8 2 e Single beam Safety Sensor insta 5x 2g CR Er Oo 2 25 S a 2 82a E gSl o 838 a B 9 o gt 8 er ae ree ee __ Single beam Safety Sensor 2 2 X E3ZS T81A E3FS 10B4 74 o Emitter ___ Receiver S BEN E i7 o T c c 3 z a Ez t m er Oo S2 2 a pg 11 21 E gt g 3 a s QS f PR CN Single beam Safety Sensor 1 E3ZS T81A E3FS 10B4 pp oo Qe o9 3 E SF Ez 5 e I oPgS E1 24 VDC S o amp a 0 Bo D 2 0 24 OV VDC Qo I Co e e i 5 5 e amp 5 L 5 33 B D es a 2 E 3 z o i p Eg my oe N 1 E Ja P Emitter Receiver Single beam Safety Sensor 4 mi t ES3ZS T81A ESFS 10B4 e E oo ala c Sz oza 2 2 3 2 E O 9 4 Oo N C2 E Qo m aR CHET U A TAi PHR I P uF Emitter Receiver Single beam Safety Sensor 3 E3FS 10B4 nmm DOD Tini h S1 Emergency stop switch with positive opening mechanism A165E or A22E IZZ iming Chart S2 Reset switch gt U KM1 KM2 Magnetic contactor Emergency stop switch S1 hii RY1 RY2 Relay 7 M Three phase motor D Reset switch S2 E1
360. wiring inside the panel and helps prevent incorrect wiring e Terminals are numbered to make it easy to check terminal connections Replacement of relays is easy improving maintainability Screw less clamp terminals eliminate the need for extra tightening eThe Support Software can be connected enabling on site adjustment of Light Curtains nw Dn D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd A Be sure to read the Safety Precautions on page 375 and Os D the Precautions for All Safety Sensors on page 242 o pz g Ordering Information Safety Terminal Relays I Type Model Safety Terminal Relay F 3S ALILILILI P UII F3SP T01 T Optional Accessories Sold Separately lt x Type Model Cable for connecting Support Software cable length 1 5 m E39 Z12 1 a Replacement Relay G7SA 3A1B uf t Specifications Refer to Instruction Manual for details Ratings Characteristics E Power supply 100 ms max Operatontme not including sensor s response time Rated voltage 24 VDC 10 15 asp R 10 ms max IZZ Rated power DC 1 7 W max not including sensor s power esponse time not including sensor s response time gt wWr consumption consumption cee Vibration l Single amplitude 0 35 mm y Contacts sanos Double amplitude 0 7 mm T e 250 VAC 3 A resistive load Shock resistance Destruction 300 m s Malfunction
361. x 1 Blinks to indicate lockout External device monitoring indicator muting input 1 indicator Test indicator muting input 2 indicator green LED x 2 ON flash according to function Light intensity level indicators green LED x 2 orange LED x 3 ON based on the light intensity Error mode indicators red LED x 3 Blink to indicate error details OFF output indicator red LED x 1 ON when safety output is OFF blinks at lockout ON output indicator green LED x 1 ON while safety output is ON muting error indicator Test indicator green LED x 2 ON flash according to function omnon nw Dm D 7 o lt o 7 uonoojes onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suoineoaJd LOL dS 4 SO1L 6E4 c 49A PSEA 008vt SIN V HSE4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 sz sdg 7 C2 o o ow a D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpo4d SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud LOL dS 4 SOL 6E4 c 49A PSEA 008v SIN V HS 4 g8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 4n oO o o F3SJ Ver 2 Model Mutual interference prevention function Series connection F3SJ A IP25 TS F3SJ A I P20 TS Interference light prevention algorithm Time division emission by series connection e Number of connections up to 3 sets e Total number of beams up to 240 beams e Maximum cable length for 2 sets no longer than 15 m e Response
362. x 2 4 a B Detection width of 189 to 639 mm a 2700 Detection width of 652 to 1 267 mm a 2 800 Detection width of 1 282 to 1 822 mm a 2 900 Model with no suffix or 01 p 0 Model with suffix 02 03 or 05 B 2 100 Model with suffix 04 p 200 Test rod 4 instruction manual mounting brackets top and bottom mounting brackets intermediate 5 error mode label Applicable standards IEC61496 1 EN61496 1 Type 2 ESPE Electro Sensitive Protective Equipment IEC61496 2 Type 2 AOPD Active Opto electronic Protective Devices 1 A safety circuit has been adopted Please note that the control logic ON OFF may differ from conventionally used logic 2 The manual reset mode is set to the start restart interlock It is impossible to select interlock only or restart interlock only 3 No floating blanking or fixed blanking function is provided 4 Not provided with the F3SN BLILILILIP 70 5 The intermediate mounting bracket is supplied with the following types Types which have the total length of the light curtain from 640 mm to 1280 mm 1 set for each of emitter and receiver Types which have the total length of the light curtain over 1280 mm 2 sets for each of emitter and receiver 6 Models with different connector configurations are also available as options Refer to Many Connector Variations on page 379 omnon F3SN A F3SN B F3SH A Accessories Control Units ltem Model F3SP B1P G9SA 300 SC
363. xtension length must be no greater than the specified Emitter 4 Receiver 4 length Otherwise the safety functions may fail to work properly x resulting in danger o c Co S l m Installation Conditions Refer to Precautions for All Safety Sensors on page 242 for o installation conditions No Series Connections lt Refer to Precautions for All Safety Sensors on page 242 for X N WARNING information on preventing mutual interference of Safety Light Curtains that are not connected in series Make sure to secure the safety distance S between the F3SJ and T amp the hazardous part Otherwise the machine may not stop before a a Person reaches the hazardous part resulting in serious injury Ol Note The response time of a machine is the time period from when 1 the machine receives a stop signal to when the machine s o hazardous part stops Lr Measure the response time on the actual system Also periodically check that the response time of the machine has not changed asp Refer to the Precautions for All Safety Sensors on page 242 for IZZ calculating the Safety distance gt U 4 Prevention of Mutual Interference C2 Z Do not use a sensor system in a reflective configuration gt Doing so may hinder detection y Mirrors can be used change the optical route When using more than 1 set of F3SJ install them so that mm mutual interference does not occur such as by Oo configuring series connecti
364. y Cap for Muting PC Tool for a s s s Ble o F39 CN6 orange F3SJ S eLs 2 3 F39 GWUM SX 7 3 B Eg e j om S m F3SJ ids 2 E KM1 o aq RO ST o V HS 4 g8 NS J V NS 4 co o Emitter Receiver Ly Muting Sensor NPN o aa mm g g 9 gt oO o E m m St N Z Recommended x a P a XS2H D521 LIGO A 5 pin DC LO D bari K3 omnon F39 TC5 Dimensions Unit mm F39 TC5P01 F39 TC5P02 F39 TC5NO1 TES F39 TC5N02 Operation Indicator green LED Power Indicator green LED Three 4 5 dia holes nw Dm D 72 o lt o 7 e Case material PBT e Cable conductor cross section 0 34 mm Insulator diameter 1 76 mm uonoogjos onpoJd sJosuag Ayayes IV 10 SUOIINeIAId LOL dS J SO0 1 6 4 c 49A l S J 008t SIN V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 7 C2 o o omnon nw Dn D 7 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpoJd SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008vt SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 SJ 3 4n oO o o F39 TC5 Safety Precautions The muting and override functions disable equipment safety functions Use separate procedures to ensure safety when the muting and override functions are operating
365. y output 1 non safety output External indicator output non safety output One PNP transistor output load current 300 mA max residual voltage 2 V max except for voltage drop due to cable extension leak current 1 mA max Available indicators e Incandescent lamp 24 VDC 3 to 7 W e LED lamp Load current 10 mA to 300 mA max leak current 1 mA max To use an external indicator an F39 JJ3N universal indicator cable or an F39 A01PLI PAC dedicated external indicator kit is required Output operation mode Receiver Emitter Control outputs 1 2 ON when receiving light Auxiliary output 1 Inverse of control output signals External indicator output 1 Inverse of control output signals for a basic system ON when muting override for a muting system External indicator output 2 ON when lock out for a basic system ON when muting override for a muting system Input voltage Indicators Emitter Receiver Test input reset input and muting input are all ON voltage 9 to 24 V Vs sink current 3 mA max OFF voltage 0 to 1 5 V or open External device monitoring input ON voltage 9 to 24 V Vs sink current 5 mA max OFF voltage 0 to 1 5 V or open Light intensity level indicators green LED x 2 orange LED x 3 ON based on the light intensity Error mode indicators red LED x 3 Blink to indicate error details Power indicator green LED x 1 ON while power is on Lockout indicator yellow LED
366. yes IV 10 suoineoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S01 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 g NS 4 V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 sz sdg SS J 273 nw oa D 72 o lt o UOI 99 9S onpo4d SsJosuag Ayayes IV 10 suonneoaud 008v SIN 6 49A l S J S0 1 6 4 LOL dS 4 V HS 4 8 NS J V NS 4 SSLIV NS 4 SZ 3 Sie 4n oO o o 274 MS4800 Series When the fixed blanking floating blanking monitored blanking or reduced resolution blanking function is used the diameter for the minimum detectable object becomes larger Be sure to use the diameter for the minimum detectable object for the fixed blanking floating blanking monitored blanking or reduced resolution blanking function when calculating the safety distance Failure to do so may prevent the machinery from stopping before a person reaches the hazardous part of the machinery and result in serious injury The muting and override functions disable the safety functions of the device Additional safety measures must be taken to ensure safety while these functions are working Muting lamps that indicate the state of the muting and override functions must be installed where they are clearly visible to workers from all the operating positions Install Muting Sensors so that they can distinguish between the object that is being allowed to be passed thro

Y106-E1-09_4 - Products

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents